1 #LyX 2.3 created this file. For more info see http://www.lyx.org/
5 \save_transient_properties true
6 \origin /systemlyxdir/doc/
9 % DO NOT ALTER THIS PREAMBLE!!!
11 % This preamble is designed to ensure that the User's Guide prints
12 % out as advertised. If you mess with this preamble,
13 % parts of the User's Guide may not print out as expected. If you
14 % have problems LaTeXing this file, please contact
15 % the documentation team
16 % email: lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org
18 % for correct jump positions whe clicking on a link to a float
19 \usepackage[figure]{hypcap}
21 % the pages of the TOC is numbered roman
22 % and a pdf-bookmark for the TOC is added
23 \let\myTOC\tableofcontents
24 \renewcommand\tableofcontents{%
26 \pdfbookmark[1]{\contentsname}{}
30 % macro for italic page numbers in the index
31 \newcommand{\IndexDef}[1]{\textit{#1}}
33 % for customized page headers/footers
34 % only needed because they are only used in one section of the document
36 % change header rule width
37 \renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{2pt}
39 % used to have extra space in table cells
40 \@ifundefined{extrarowheight}
41 {\usepackage{array}}{}
42 \setlength{\extrarowheight}{2pt}
44 % workaround for a makeindex bug,
45 % see sec. "Index Entry Order"
46 % only uncomment this when you are using makindex
48 %\renewcommand*{\index}[1]{\OrgIndex{#1}}
50 \options refpage,intoc,bibliography=totoc,index=totoc,BCOR7.5mm,captions=tableheading
51 \use_default_options false
56 \maintain_unincluded_children false
58 \language_package default
61 \font_roman "lmodern" "default"
62 \font_sans "lmss" "default"
63 \font_typewriter "lmtt" "default"
64 \font_math "auto" "auto"
65 \font_default_family default
66 \use_non_tex_fonts false
69 \font_sf_scale 100 100
70 \font_tt_scale 100 100
72 \use_dash_ligatures false
74 \default_output_format pdf2
76 \bibtex_command bibtex
77 \index_command default
81 \pdf_title "The LyX User's Guide"
82 \pdf_author "LyX Team"
86 \pdf_bookmarksnumbered true
87 \pdf_bookmarksopen false
88 \pdf_bookmarksopenlevel 1
93 \pdf_pdfusetitle false
94 \pdf_quoted_options "linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue, pdfpagelayout=OneColumn, pdfnewwindow=true, pdfstartview=XYZ, plainpages=false"
97 \use_package amsmath 1
98 \use_package amssymb 1
101 \use_package mathdots 1
102 \use_package mathtools 1
103 \use_package mhchem 1
104 \use_package stackrel 1
105 \use_package stmaryrd 1
106 \use_package undertilde 1
108 \cite_engine_type default
112 \paperorientation portrait
117 \notefontcolor #0000ff
134 \paragraph_separation skip
137 \math_numbering_side default
138 \quotes_style english
142 \paperpagestyle default
143 \tracking_changes true
144 \output_changes false
148 \author -1402925745 "Günter Milde"
159 by the \SpecialChar LyX
164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
166 If you have comments on or error corrections to this documentation, please
167 send them to the \SpecialChar LyX
168 Documentation mailing list:
169 \begin_inset CommandInset href
171 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org"
183 \begin_inset Newline newline
187 \begin_inset Newline newline
191 \begin_inset Note Note
194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
195 The latest PDF-version of this document can be found here:
196 \begin_inset Newline newline
201 http://wiki.lyx.org/\SpecialChar LyX
202 /DocumentationDevelopment#UserGuide
210 \begin_layout Standard
211 \begin_inset CommandInset toc
212 LatexCommand tableofcontents
219 \begin_layout Chapter
223 \begin_layout Section
224 What is \SpecialChar LyX
228 \begin_layout Standard
230 is a document preparation system.
231 It is a tool for producing beautiful manu\SpecialChar softhyphen
232 scripts, publishable books, business
233 letters and proposals, and even poetry.
234 It is unlike most other
235 \begin_inset Quotes eld
239 \begin_inset Quotes erd
242 in the sense that it uses the paradigm of a markup language as its core
244 That means that when you type a section header, you mark it as a
245 \begin_inset Quotes eld
249 \begin_inset Quotes erd
253 \begin_inset Quotes eld
257 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
260 pt type, left justified, 5
261 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
265 \begin_inset Quotes erd
270 takes care of the typesetting for you; so you deal only with concepts,
274 \begin_layout Standard
275 This philosophy is explained in greater detail in the
280 If you haven't read it yet, you need to.
284 \begin_layout Standard
289 manual describes several things in addition to \SpecialChar LyX
290 's philosophy: most importantly,
291 the format of all of the manuals.
292 If you don't read it, you will have a bear of a time navigating this manual.
293 You might also be better served looking in one of the other manuals instead
299 manual describes that, too.
302 \begin_layout Section
307 \begin_layout Standard
308 Like most applications, \SpecialChar LyX
309 has the familiar menu bar across the top of its
311 Below it is a toolbar with a pulldown box and various buttons.
312 There is, of course, a vertical scrollbar and a main work area for editing
316 \begin_layout Standard
317 Note that there is no horizontal scrollbar.
318 This is not a bug or an oversight, but intentional.
319 When you read a book, you expect the end of a line to wrap around to the
321 Text overflows onto new pages in a vertical fashion, hence the need for
322 only a vertical scrollbar.
323 There are three cases where you might want a horizontal scrollbar.
324 The first case is large images.
325 To avoid them being displayed larger than your screen, left click on the
326 image and use the option
337 The second and third cases are tables and equations which are wider than
340 You can use the arrow keys to scroll horizontally through the table, but
341 this doesn't work for equations yet.
344 \begin_layout Standard
345 For a brief description of all \SpecialChar LyX
346 menus and toolbar buttons, have a look at
352 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
354 reference "chap:The-User-Interface"
361 \begin_layout Section
365 \begin_layout Standard
366 The help system consists of the \SpecialChar LyX
368 You can read all of the manuals from inside \SpecialChar LyX
370 Just select the manual you want to read from the
377 \begin_layout Section
378 Basic \SpecialChar LyX
380 \begin_inset CommandInset label
382 name "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
389 \begin_layout Standard
390 Almost all features of \SpecialChar LyX
391 can be configured via the menu
393 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
397 \begin_inset Index idx
400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
407 is able to inspect your system to see what programs, \SpecialChar LaTeX
409 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
410 packages are available.
411 It uses this knowledge to give reasonable defaults for the preferences
413 Although this configuration has already been done when \SpecialChar LyX
415 your system, you might have some items that you installed locally, e.
416 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
420 \begin_inset space \space{}
423 new \SpecialChar LaTeX
424 classes, and which are not seen by \SpecialChar LyX
426 To force \SpecialChar LyX
427 to re-inspect your system, you should use
429 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
433 \begin_inset Index idx
436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
437 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
443 You should then restart \SpecialChar LyX
444 to ensure that the changes are taken into account.
447 \begin_layout Section
450 \begin_inset CommandInset label
452 name "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
459 \begin_layout Standard
460 You can edit documents in \SpecialChar LyX
461 without having \SpecialChar LaTeX
462 installed, but you will not be
463 able to create PDFs or print your documents unless you do have it installed.
464 However, some \SpecialChar LyX
465 documents use DocBook as the “backend” that can produce
466 PDFs and the like, and every \SpecialChar LyX
467 document can always be output as plain text
471 \begin_layout Standard
472 Some document classes may depend upon specific \SpecialChar LaTeX
473 or DocBook classes or packages.
474 Such document classes can be used even if you do not have the required
475 files installed, but you will not be able to produce certain kinds of output.
478 \begin_layout Standard
479 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
480 packages that \SpecialChar LyX
481 has found on your system are listed in a file you can
484 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
492 If you are missing packages you need, then you must install them and then
493 reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
496 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
500 \begin_inset Index idx
503 \begin_layout Plain Layout
504 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
512 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
519 manual for more information on installing additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
523 \begin_layout Chapter
524 How to work with \SpecialChar LyX
528 \begin_layout Section
529 Basic File Operations
530 \begin_inset Index idx
533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
542 \begin_layout Standard
547 menu and in the standard toolbar are basic operations for any word processor
548 in addition to some more advanced operations:
551 \begin_layout Itemize
573 \begin_layout Itemize
589 arg "buffer-new-template"
595 \begin_layout Itemize
617 \begin_layout Itemize
627 \begin_layout Itemize
641 \begin_layout Itemize
663 \begin_layout Itemize
675 arg "buffer-write-as"
681 \begin_layout Itemize
695 \begin_layout Itemize
709 \begin_layout Standard
710 They all do pretty much the same thing as in other word processors, with
711 a few minor differences.
714 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
725 command lists the available templates.
726 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
727 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
728 They can be of use for certain classes, especially those for writing letters
734 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
736 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
743 \begin_layout Standard
744 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
753 \begin_inset Quotes eld
757 \begin_inset Quotes erd
761 \begin_inset Quotes eld
765 \begin_inset Quotes erd
769 \begin_inset Quotes eld
773 \begin_inset Quotes erd
776 Unless you tell \SpecialChar LyX
777 to open a file or create a new one, that big, blank space
778 is just that — a big, blank space.
786 \begin_layout Standard
807 are useful if more people work on the same document at the same time.
811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
812 If you plan to do this, you should check out the Version Control feature
815 Read Additional Features\SpecialChar endofsentence
833 will reload the document from disk.
834 You can of course also use it if you regret that you changed a document
835 and want to restore it to the last save.
844 you can register the changes you made to a document so that others can identify
845 them as your changes.
848 \begin_layout Section
849 Basic Editing Features
850 \begin_inset Index idx
853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
860 \begin_inset CommandInset label
862 name "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
869 \begin_layout Standard
870 Like most modern word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
871 can perform cut and paste operations
872 on blocks of text, can move by character, word, or page of text, and can
873 delete whole words as well as individual characters.
874 The next four sections cover the basic \SpecialChar LyX
875 editing features and how to access
877 We will start with cut and paste.
880 \begin_layout Standard
881 As you might expect, the
885 menu and the standard toolbar has the cut and paste commands, along with
886 various other editing features.
887 Some of these are special and covered in later sections.
891 \begin_layout Itemize
897 \begin_inset Index idx
900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
929 \begin_layout Itemize
935 \begin_inset Index idx
938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
967 \begin_layout Itemize
973 \begin_inset Index idx
976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1001 \begin_layout Itemize
1005 \begin_inset space ~
1011 \begin_layout Itemize
1015 \begin_inset space ~
1021 \begin_layout Itemize
1025 \begin_inset space ~
1029 \begin_inset space ~
1035 \begin_inset Index idx
1038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1047 \begin_inset Index idx
1050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1065 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
1075 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
1081 \begin_layout Standard
1082 The first three are self-explanatory.
1083 You can also copy text between \SpecialChar LyX
1084 and other programs by
1105 put text in two versions into the clipboard (formatted and unformatted),
1106 so that other programs can choose the most suitable form.
1111 supports formatted and unformatted text as well, and additionally graphics.
1112 It tries to interpret the clipboard contents in an intelligent way.
1113 For example if the clipboard contains text in the format of comma separated
1114 values (CSV) and the cursor is inside a table, the text will be pasted
1115 into individual cells.
1119 \begin_inset space ~
1124 shows you a list with the last strings you have pasted.
1125 You can insert one at the current cursor position by clicking on a list
1129 \begin_layout Standard
1133 \begin_inset space ~
1138 contains optional items for specific formats, depending on the clipboard
1140 These include HTML, \SpecialChar LaTeX
1142 \begin_inset space ~
1149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1155 , PDF, PNG, JPEG and EMF.
1156 These menu items are useful if the clipboard contains the same contents
1157 in different formats, and you want to select one format explicitly.
1159 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1163 \begin_inset space \space{}
1166 some programs put an image into the clipboard as graphics and as a short
1167 text which is often meaningless.) The menu item
1170 \begin_inset space ~
1173 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1175 \begin_inset space ~
1179 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1183 \begin_inset space ~
1192 , with the only difference that it acts on text only.
1193 It will insert the text in the clipboard so that the whole text is inserted
1195 A new paragraph is only started when there is a blank line in the text.
1199 \begin_inset space ~
1204 the text is inserted as paragraphs where the line breaks of the text will
1205 start a new paragraph.
1206 This is for example useful to copy contents of tables from webpages to
1207 a table in \SpecialChar LyX
1212 \begin_inset space ~
1215 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1217 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1221 \begin_inset space ~
1229 \begin_inset space ~
1232 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1235 paste from the primary selection.
1236 This is normally the currently selected text.
1239 \begin_layout Standard
1242 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1244 \begin_inset space ~
1248 \begin_inset space ~
1256 \begin_inset space ~
1260 \begin_inset space ~
1266 Once you have found a word or expression, \SpecialChar LyX
1272 button replaces the selected text with the contents of the
1275 \begin_inset space ~
1284 \begin_inset space ~
1289 button to skip the current word.
1293 \begin_inset space ~
1298 to replace all occurrences of the text in the document automatically.
1302 \begin_inset space ~
1307 option can be used if you want the search to consider the case of the search
1309 If the toggle is set, searching for
1310 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1318 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1321 will not match the word
1322 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1330 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1336 Match whole words only
1338 option can be used to force \SpecialChar LyX
1339 to only find complete words, e.
1340 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1344 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1352 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1356 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1364 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1369 offers also an advanced
1372 \begin_inset space ~
1376 \begin_inset space ~
1381 feature that is described in section
1382 \begin_inset space ~
1386 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1388 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
1395 \begin_layout Standard
1396 Things like notes, floats, etc.
1397 \begin_inset space \space{}
1401 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1405 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1409 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
1411 Dissolving an inset is done by setting the cursor to the beginning of an
1416 or by setting the cursor to the end and pressing
1423 \begin_layout Standard
1427 arg "inset-select-all"
1430 while the cursor is in normal text selects the whole document.
1431 When the cursor is inside an inset
1434 arg "inset-select-all"
1437 selects the content of the inset.
1441 arg "inset-select-all"
1444 consecutively will increase the selection to the whole inset and then to
1449 arg "command-sequence buffer-begin ; buffer-end-select"
1452 selects the whole document in every case and puts the cursor to the end
1456 \begin_layout Section
1458 \begin_inset Index idx
1461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1468 \begin_inset Index idx
1471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1478 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1480 name "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
1487 \begin_layout Standard
1488 If you make a mistake, you can easily recover from it.
1490 has a large-capacity undo/redo buffer.
1493 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1496 or the toolbar button
1502 to undo some mistake.
1503 If you accidentally undo too much, use
1505 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1508 or the toolbar button
1515 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1519 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1522 The undo mechanism is currently limited to 100
1523 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1526 steps to minimize memory overhead.
1529 \begin_layout Standard
1530 Note that if you revert back all changes to arrive at the document as it
1532 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1536 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1539 status of the document is unfortunately not reset.
1540 This is a consequence of the 100
1541 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1544 step undo limit mentioned above.
1547 \begin_layout Standard
1556 work on almost everything in \SpecialChar LyX
1558 But they will not undo or redo text character by character, but by blocks
1562 \begin_layout Section
1564 \begin_inset Index idx
1567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1576 \begin_layout Standard
1577 These are the most basic mouse operations.
1580 \begin_layout Enumerate
1585 \begin_layout Itemize
1590 once anywhere in the edit window.
1591 The cursor moves to the text under the mouse.
1595 \begin_layout Enumerate
1600 \begin_layout Itemize
1607 marks the text between the old and new mouse positions.
1610 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1613 to create a copy of the text in \SpecialChar LyX
1614 's buffer (and the clipboard).
1617 \begin_layout Itemize
1618 Re-position the cursor and then paste the text back into \SpecialChar LyX
1621 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1628 \begin_layout Enumerate
1629 Insets (Footnotes, Notes, Floats, etc.)
1633 \begin_layout Standard
1634 Right-click on them to set their properties.
1635 Also check the appropriate section of this manual for more details.
1639 \begin_layout Section
1641 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1643 name "sec:Navigating"
1648 \begin_inset Index idx
1651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1660 \begin_layout Standard
1662 offers you several ways to navigate in documents:
1665 \begin_layout Itemize
1670 menu lists all sections of the document as submenu entries that you can
1671 click to jump to the corresponding document part.
1674 \begin_layout Itemize
1675 The “Outline”, which is accessed either by the menu
1677 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
1679 \begin_inset space ~
1684 or by the toolbar button
1687 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
1693 \begin_layout Itemize
1694 You can set bookmarks in your document under
1696 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1699 and use the same menu to return to them.
1700 Note that bookmarks are saved between sessions.
1703 \begin_layout Standard
1707 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
1712 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1713 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
1715 \begin_inset space ~
1720 ) jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
1721 This is useful when you have a large document and have navigated or scrolled
1722 to another document part to look for something, and want to go back to
1723 your last editing position.
1726 \begin_layout Standard
1731 key the cursor will be vertically centered in \SpecialChar LyX
1735 \begin_layout Subsection
1737 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1739 name "subsec:The-Outliner"
1744 \begin_inset Index idx
1747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1748 Navigating ! Outline
1754 \begin_inset Index idx
1757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1766 \begin_layout Standard
1767 In the pull-down box at the top of the outline window, you can choose between
1768 several different lists, including other TOC-like objects, such as lists
1769 of tables and figures, but also lists of footnotes, or labels and cross-referen
1771 \begin_inset space ~
1775 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1777 reference "sec:Cross-References"
1781 ), or notes, or citations (see section
1782 \begin_inset space ~
1786 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1788 reference "sec:Bibliography"
1793 Clicking on any of these will take you to the corresponding object in your
1797 \begin_layout Standard
1798 Right-clicking on elements in the Outline opens in many cases a context
1799 menu that will allow for direct modification of those elements.
1800 For example, with citations, the context menu allows you to open the citation
1801 dialog and to modify the citation.
1804 \begin_layout Standard
1809 field at the top allows you to restrict which entries appear in the outline.
1810 For example, if you are displaying the list of
1812 Labels and References
1814 and wish to see only references to subsections, you can enter the text
1816 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1820 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1823 in the filter, and only entries containing that text will be displayed.
1826 \begin_layout Standard
1827 At the bottom of the outline are several buttons and the like that allow
1828 you further to control the display.
1833 option sorts the current list alphabetically.
1834 Otherwise, the elements appear in the order in which they occur in the
1840 option keeps it in the current view state.
1841 Keeping means that when you have, for example, the subsections of sections
1842 \begin_inset space ~
1845 2 and 4 displayed and click on section
1846 \begin_inset space ~
1849 3, the subsections of sections
1850 \begin_inset space ~
1853 2 and 4 will still be displayed.
1858 option they will be hidden to highlight the clicked section
1859 \begin_inset space ~
1863 Finally, the slider at the left can be used to open the Outline to a given
1865 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1869 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1873 It is best just to experiment with it to see how it works.
1876 \begin_layout Standard
1883 button refreshes the TOC (though this should not usually be necessary).
1884 Next to it are buttons that allow you to change the position of sections
1898 buttons move sections up and down in the document.
1899 So, for example, you can move section
1900 \begin_inset space ~
1904 \begin_inset space ~
1907 2.4 or after section
1908 \begin_inset space ~
1913 will then automatically renumber the sections to the new order.
1926 (or the corresponding key bindings
1934 ) you can change the level of sections.
1935 So you can for example make section
1936 \begin_inset space ~
1940 \begin_inset space ~
1944 \begin_inset space ~
1950 \begin_layout Standard
1951 By right-clicking on a section in the outliner you can select the whole
1952 section to copy, cut or delete it.
1955 \begin_layout Subsection
1956 Horizontal Scrolling
1957 \begin_inset Index idx
1960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1961 Navigating ! Horizontal Scrolling
1969 \begin_layout Standard
1971 does not have a horizontal scrollbar because the standard output page formats
1973 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1977 \begin_inset space \space{}
1981 \begin_inset space ~
1984 A4 are less wide than PC or laptop screens.
1985 Therefore you will get troubles in the output of your document if document
1986 parts exceed the width of the \SpecialChar LyX
1990 \begin_layout Standard
1991 There are of course exceptions where horizontal scrolling is necessary.
1995 \begin_layout Itemize
1997 is used on a small tablet computer
2000 \begin_layout Itemize
2001 Wide tables that are rotated 90° to fit a whole page
2005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2013 \begin_inset space ~
2026 \begin_layout Itemize
2027 Math constructs with long command names
2030 \begin_layout Standard
2031 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
2032 has an mechanism that scrolls automatically when the cursor
2034 As example shrink the \SpecialChar LyX
2035 windows so that table
2036 \begin_inset space ~
2040 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2042 reference "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2047 You will now see a dotted red line at the right or the left side of the
2049 Put the cursor into the table and move it with the Tab or the arrow keys
2050 to see the horizontal scrolling of the table.
2053 \begin_layout Standard
2054 \begin_inset Float table
2060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2061 \begin_inset Caption Standard
2063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2064 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2066 name "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2070 Horizontal scrolling test.
2078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2080 \begin_inset Tabular
2081 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="3">
2082 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
2083 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2084 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2085 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2087 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2096 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2105 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
2108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2127 \begin_layout Section
2128 Input/Word Completion
2129 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2131 name "sec:Input-Completion"
2136 \begin_inset Index idx
2139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2146 \begin_inset Index idx
2149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2180 \begin_layout Standard
2182 provides completion of words by scanning all documents that are currently
2184 Every word that appears in these documents is added to a database that
2185 is used to propose completions.
2188 \begin_layout Standard
2189 Input completion can be activated in the \SpecialChar LyX
2192 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
2197 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2204 \begin_inset space ~
2208 \begin_inset space ~
2213 the proposed completion is shown directly after the cursor.
2217 \begin_inset space ~
2222 the completions are always shown in a popup.
2223 The cursor completion indicator can be turned off by deselecting the option
2227 \begin_inset space ~
2233 With the general options you can define the delay time for the inline and
2234 popup completion, you can set the minimal number of characters a word must
2235 have that it will be taken into account for a completion and you can choose
2236 if long completions should be abbreviated.
2239 \begin_layout Standard
2241 displays a small triangle after the cursor as an indicator that there are
2242 completions available.
2247 key to accept a proposed completion.
2248 If several completions are possible, a popup is opened showing them.
2249 You can select a completion in the popup using the mouse or the arrow keys,
2250 and accept the chosen completion by pressing
2257 \begin_layout Standard
2258 The completion options for math in the preferences do the same as the correspond
2259 ing options for text.
2260 The special math option
2264 enables characters to be composed.
2265 If, for example, you want to insert the character
2266 \begin_inset Formula $\Rightarrow$
2269 , you can then input the characters
2270 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2278 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2281 to a formula to get it.
2282 So this is a quick alternative to the insertion of commands or the use
2283 of the math toolbar.
2284 A list with supported character combinations can be found in the file
2288 that is in \SpecialChar LyX
2289 's installation folder.
2290 Math autocorrection can at any time be turned on by pressing the exclamation
2299 \begin_layout Section
2301 \begin_inset Index idx
2304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2311 \begin_inset Index idx
2314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2343 \begin_inset Index idx
2346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2377 \begin_layout Standard
2378 There are at least two different primary binding maps:
2392 , which can be changed in the \SpecialChar LyX
2395 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2399 (You can list or change any key bindings as explained in section
2400 \begin_inset space ~
2404 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2406 reference "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
2413 \begin_layout Standard
2417 \begin_inset space ~
2425 \begin_inset space ~
2446 , do exactly what you expect them to do.
2450 \begin_layout Labeling
2451 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2455 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2456 LatexCommand nomenclature
2458 description "Tabulator key"
2465 There is no such thing as a tab stop in \SpecialChar LyX
2467 If you do not understand this, go read sections
2468 \begin_inset space ~
2472 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2474 reference "sec:Par-indent-intro"
2479 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2481 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
2485 , especially section
2486 \begin_inset space ~
2490 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2492 reference "subsec:Lists"
2498 If you are still confused, look in the
2503 \begin_inset Newline newline
2511 key is only used to accept proposed input completions, to move the cursor
2512 in tables or math matrices or to change the nesting level in Itemize or
2516 \begin_layout Labeling
2517 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2521 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2522 LatexCommand nomenclature
2524 description "Escape key"
2532 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2536 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2539 It is used, generically, to cancel operations.
2540 Other parts of the manual will go into greater detail about this.
2543 \begin_layout Labeling
2544 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2550 \begin_inset space ~
2554 \begin_inset space ~
2561 These move the cursor, respectively, to the beginning and end of a line,
2562 unless you are using the Emacs bindings where they jump to the beginning
2566 \begin_layout Standard
2567 There are three modifier keys:
2570 \begin_layout Labeling
2571 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2577 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2585 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2589 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2590 LatexCommand nomenclature
2592 description "Control key"
2597 in the documentation files) This has a couple of different uses, depending
2598 on which keys it is used in combination with:
2602 \begin_layout Itemize
2611 , it deletes an entire word instead of a single character.
2614 \begin_layout Itemize
2623 , it moves by words instead of characters.
2626 \begin_layout Itemize
2635 , it moves to the beginning and the end of the document, respectively.
2639 \begin_layout Labeling
2640 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2646 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2654 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2658 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2659 LatexCommand nomenclature
2661 description "Shift key"
2666 in the documentation files) Use this with any of the arrow keys to select
2667 the text between the old and new cursor positions.
2670 \begin_layout Labeling
2671 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2677 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2685 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2689 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2690 LatexCommand nomenclature
2692 description "Alt or Meta key"
2697 in the documentation files) This is the Alt key on many keyboards, unless
2698 your keyboard has a distinct Meta key.
2699 If you have both keys, you will need to try out which one actually performs
2705 \begin_inset Newline newline
2708 This key does many different things, but it also activates the
2710 menu accelerator keys
2713 If you use this in combination with any of the underlined letters in a
2714 menu or menu item, it selects that menu item.
2718 \begin_layout Standard
2719 For example, the sequence
2720 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2726 \begin_inset space ~
2730 \begin_inset space ~
2736 \begin_inset space ~
2744 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2748 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2752 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2757 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2763 \begin_inset space ~
2769 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2779 \begin_layout Standard
2784 manual lists all other things bound to the
2792 \begin_layout Standard
2793 You will learn more and more key bindings and short-cut keys as you use
2795 , because most actions will prompt a small message in the status bar at
2796 the bottom of \SpecialChar LyX
2797 's main window which describes the name of the action you
2798 have just triggered, and any existing key bindings for that action.
2799 The \SpecialChar LyX
2800 menus also list the defined key bindings.
2801 The notation for the key bindings is very similar to the notation used
2802 in this documentation, so you should not have any problems understanding
2804 However, notice that Shift-modifiers are explicitly mentioned, so
2805 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2813 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2820 followed by a capital
2827 \begin_layout Chapter
2830 \begin_inset Index idx
2833 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2843 \begin_layout Section
2845 \begin_inset Index idx
2848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2857 \begin_layout Subsection
2861 \begin_layout Standard
2862 Before you do anything else, before you ever start writing a document, you
2863 need to decide what type of document you want to edit.
2864 Different types of documents use different types of spacing, headings,
2865 numbering schemes, and so on.
2866 Additionally, different documents use different paragraph environments,
2867 and format the title of your document differently.
2870 \begin_layout Standard
2875 describes a group of properties common to a particular set of documents.
2876 By setting the document class, you automatically select these properties,
2877 making it easier to create the type of document you want.
2878 If you don't choose a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
2879 picks one for you by default.
2880 So it is up to you to change the class of your document.
2883 \begin_layout Subsection
2885 \begin_inset Index idx
2888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2895 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2897 name "sec:Document-Classes"
2904 \begin_layout Standard
2905 You can select a class using the
2907 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
2908 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
2912 \begin_inset Index idx
2915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2922 Select the class you want to use, and make any fine tunings of the options
2926 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2930 \begin_layout Standard
2931 There are four standard document classes in \SpecialChar LyX
2936 \begin_layout Description
2937 Article for basic articles
2940 \begin_layout Description
2941 Report for basic reports
2944 \begin_layout Description
2945 Book for writing a book
2948 \begin_layout Description
2949 Letter for US-style letters
2952 \begin_layout Standard
2953 There are also some non-standard classes, which \SpecialChar LyX
2954 only uses if you have installed
2955 the corresponding \SpecialChar LaTeX
2956 class files, though most \SpecialChar LaTeX
2957 distributions will include
2959 Here are some of the classes.
2960 The full list with detailed explanations can be found in chapter
2962 Special Document Classes
2971 \begin_layout Description
2972 A&A Journal articles in the style and format used in Astronomy & Astrophysics
2975 \begin_layout Description
2976 ACS For submissions to the journals published by the American Chemistry
2980 \begin_layout Description
2981 AGU For submissions to the journals published by the American Geophysical
2985 \begin_layout Description
2986 AMS Layouts for articles and books in the style and format used by the American
2987 Mathematical Society (AMS).
2988 There are three article layouts available.
2989 The standard one uses a typical numbering scheme for theorems etc., that
2990 prepends the section number to the number of the result.
2991 All result-type statements (propositions, corollaries, and so on) are sequenced
2992 together, but definitions, examples, and the like have their own sequence.
2994 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2997 sequential numbering
2998 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3001 scheme does not place the section number with each result, but numbers
3002 them throughout the article in a single sequence.
3003 Each type of result gets its own sequence.
3004 There is also a layout that dispenses with numbering of statements altogether.
3007 \begin_layout Description
3008 Beamer Layout for presentations
3011 \begin_layout Description
3012 Broadway Layout for writing plays.
3013 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
3014 document class, but a new one that is distributed
3015 with \SpecialChar LyX
3019 \begin_layout Description
3020 Chess Layout to write about chess games
3023 \begin_layout Description
3025 \begin_inset space ~
3028 vitae classes to create curriculum vitae
3031 \begin_layout Description
3032 Elsarticle Layout for journals of the Elsevier publishing group
3035 \begin_layout Description
3036 Foils Used to make transparencies
3039 \begin_layout Description
3040 Hollywood Used to type spec scripts for the US film industry.
3041 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
3042 document class, but a new one that is distributed
3043 with \SpecialChar LyX
3047 \begin_layout Description
3048 IEEEtran Layout for the journals published by the Institute of Electrical
3049 and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
3052 \begin_layout Description
3053 IOP Layout for journals of the Institute of Physics publishing group
3056 \begin_layout Description
3057 Kluwer Layout for journals of the Kluwer publishing group
3060 \begin_layout Description
3061 KOMA-Script a replacement for the standard classes, offers many useful features
3062 like caption formatting, automatic print space calculation etc.
3063 (Is used by this document.)
3066 \begin_layout Description
3067 Memoir another replacement for the standard classes
3070 \begin_layout Description
3071 Powerdot Layout for presentations
3074 \begin_layout Description
3079 is used to write articles for the publications of the American Physical
3080 Society (APS), American Institute of Physics (AIP), and Optical Society
3082 This class is not completely compatible with all \SpecialChar LyX
3086 \begin_layout Description
3087 Slides Used to make transparencies
3090 \begin_layout Description
3092 \begin_inset space ~
3095 Proceedings Layout for the journals published by The International Society
3096 for Optical Engineering (SPIE)
3099 \begin_layout Description
3100 Springer Layouts for journals of the Springer publishing group
3103 \begin_layout Standard
3104 We will not go into detail about how to use these different document classes
3106 You can find details about the non-standard classes in chapter
3108 Special Document Classes
3115 Here, we will settle for a list of some of the common properties of all
3116 of the document classes.
3119 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3123 \begin_layout Standard
3124 You will probably find that many of the document classes listed under
3126 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3127 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
3129 \begin_inset Index idx
3132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3141 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3145 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3149 If you open a document that uses such a class, you will receive a warning
3150 saying that there are files that are required to produce output that are
3152 So it may seem that something is wrong.
3155 \begin_layout Standard
3158 includes many more document classes than you will ever need to use, and
3163 , are highly specialized.
3165 tries to support as many different types of documents as possible, and
3166 it includes almost one hundred different layout files, with a growing number.
3167 No \SpecialChar LaTeX
3168 distribution will install by default all files that might be needed
3169 by some document class.
3170 There are just too many of them.
3171 That is why some of the document classes are unavailable.
3174 \begin_layout Standard
3175 If there is a document class you would like to use that is marked as
3176 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3180 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3183 , you just need to install the appropriate package files.
3184 The easiest way to find out which files you need to install is to use that
3185 document class for a new file.
3187 will display a dialog that will list the missing files.
3190 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3197 manual for information on how to install them.
3198 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
3204 \begin_layout Standard
3205 Although \SpecialChar LyX
3206 provides support for many different sorts of documents, it does
3207 not include support for every document class people might want to use.
3208 For example, many universities provide \SpecialChar LaTeX
3209 class files to be used for dissertation
3210 s submitted to those universities.
3211 The \SpecialChar LyX
3212 team cannot write layout files to support every one of these.
3214 Fortunately, users can write their own layout files, and many users have
3218 Installing New Document Classes, Layouts, and Templates
3224 manual contains information on how to create layout files.
3227 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3229 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3231 name "subsec:Modules"
3236 \begin_inset Index idx
3239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3248 \begin_layout Standard
3249 Modules load additional features that are not by default available in the
3250 chosen document class.
3251 For example you might want to write Braille (embossed printing) in a document.
3252 This is not available in any document class, so you have to load the correspond
3259 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3263 \begin_inset Index idx
3266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3273 Highlighting a module in the dialog will bring up a description of what
3277 \begin_layout Standard
3278 Some modules require \SpecialChar LaTeX
3279 packages or file format converters that are not always
3280 installed by default.
3282 will warn you if you do not have a required package or converter, and
3283 it will tell you what exactly you are missing.
3284 You can still use the module while editing your file, but you will not
3285 be able to export to PDF or print your document, since \SpecialChar LyX
3287 to compile the \SpecialChar LaTeX
3288 file without the missing prerequisites.
3289 If you want to be able to produce this kind of output, then you need to
3290 install the missing prerequisites and then reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
3293 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
3297 \begin_inset Index idx
3300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3301 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
3307 See section Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3312 manual for more information on installing required packages.
3315 \begin_layout Standard
3316 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
3319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3324 Some modules require other modules, and some pairs of modules are incompatible.
3326 will advise you about these things.
3334 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3336 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3338 name "subsec:Local-Layout"
3343 \begin_inset Index idx
3346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3347 Document ! Local Layout
3355 \begin_layout Standard
3356 Modules are to \SpecialChar LyX
3357 much as packages are to \SpecialChar LaTeX
3358 : They are intended to be used in
3359 a variety of different documents.
3360 If you often find yourself needing the same sort of thing in different
3361 documents, you should consider writing a module for this purpose.
3362 Sometimes, however, a particular document has very special needs, but you
3363 need a specific inset or character style only that one time.
3364 You want something that is like a document's own \SpecialChar LaTeX
3366 What you want is \SpecialChar LyX
3368 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3372 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3384 manual for information on how to use it.
3387 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3391 \begin_layout Standard
3392 Each class has a default set of options.
3393 Here's a quick table describing them:
3396 \begin_layout Standard
3397 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3403 \begin_layout Standard
3405 \begin_inset Tabular
3406 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="5">
3407 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
3408 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3409 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3410 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3411 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3412 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3414 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3423 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3426 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3441 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3459 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3477 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3480 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3497 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3514 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3517 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3532 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3550 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3568 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3588 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3605 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3623 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3641 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3659 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3679 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3696 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3714 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3732 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3750 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3770 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3787 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3805 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3823 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3841 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3866 \begin_layout Standard
3867 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3873 \begin_layout Standard
3874 You're probably also wondering what
3875 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3879 \begin_inset space ~
3883 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3887 There are several paragraph environments used to create section headings.
3888 Different document classes allow different types of section headings.
3893 heading; the rest do not and begin instead with the
3898 Some document classes, such as the ones for letters, don't use any section
3908 headings, there are also
3916 headings, and so on.
3917 We will describe these headings fully in section
3918 \begin_inset space ~
3922 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3924 reference "subsec:Headings"
3931 \begin_layout Subsection
3933 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3935 name "subsec:Document-Layout"
3940 \begin_inset Index idx
3943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3950 \begin_inset Index idx
3953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3962 \begin_layout Standard
3963 The most important properties of document classes are set in the menu
3965 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3972 \begin_inset space ~
3980 \begin_inset space ~
3985 , you can enter special options for your document class in a comma-separated
3987 This is only necessary if \SpecialChar LyX
3988 doesn't support special options you want to
3989 use for your document.
3990 To learn more about your favorite \SpecialChar LaTeX
3991 -class and its options, you have to read
3995 \begin_layout Standard
3999 \begin_inset space ~
4006 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4012 \begin_inset space ~
4017 controls what sorts of headings and page numbers go on a page.
4018 You can choose between the following five options:
4021 \begin_layout Labeling
4022 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4027 Use default page style of current class.
4030 \begin_layout Labeling
4031 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4036 No page numbers or headings.
4039 \begin_layout Labeling
4040 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4048 \begin_layout Labeling
4049 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4054 Page numbers and either the current chapter or section title and number.
4055 Whether \SpecialChar LyX
4056 uses the current chapter or the current section depends on the
4057 maximum sectioning level of the class.
4060 \begin_layout Labeling
4061 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4066 This allows you to define fully customizable headers and footers if you
4067 have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4073 \begin_inset Index idx
4076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4084 How they are defined is explained in section
4085 \begin_inset space ~
4089 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4091 reference "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
4098 \begin_layout Standard
4099 The separation of paragraphs is described in section
4100 \begin_inset space ~
4104 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4106 reference "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4113 \begin_layout Subsection
4114 Paper Size and Orientation
4115 \begin_inset Index idx
4118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4119 Document ! Paper size
4125 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4127 name "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
4134 \begin_layout Standard
4135 You can find the following options in the menu
4138 \begin_inset space ~
4145 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4149 \begin_inset Index idx
4152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4161 \begin_layout Labeling
4162 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4166 \begin_inset space ~
4171 What size paper to print on.
4176 \begin_layout Itemize
4182 \begin_layout Itemize
4188 \begin_layout Itemize
4194 \begin_layout Itemize
4200 \begin_layout Itemize
4203 US letter, US legal, US executive
4206 \begin_layout Itemize
4212 \begin_layout Itemize
4219 \begin_layout Labeling
4220 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4225 To choose whether to output as
4236 \begin_layout Labeling
4237 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4241 \begin_inset space ~
4246 Adjusts the print space to print both sides of paper.
4247 That means that the print space for odd- and even-numbered pages is different.
4250 \begin_layout Subsection
4252 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4254 name "subsec:Margins"
4259 \begin_inset Index idx
4262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4269 \begin_inset Index idx
4272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4281 \begin_layout Standard
4282 Paper margins are set in the menu
4284 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4288 \begin_inset Index idx
4291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4300 \begin_layout Standard
4301 If you use a KOMA-Script document class, you can use the default settings
4302 because KOMA-Script calculates the print space automatically by taking
4303 the paper format and the font size into account.
4306 \begin_layout Subsection
4310 \begin_layout Standard
4311 If you change a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4317 That includes the paragraph environments.
4318 Some paragraph environments are standard, in so far as all of the document
4319 classes have them; but some classes have special paragraph environments.
4320 If this is the case, and you change the document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4322 paragraphs whose styles it no longer understands as
4323 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4327 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4331 The name of the style is retained, in case you should want to go back to
4333 But these paragraphs will be output with no special formatting, so you
4334 will either need to create a new style yourself or else convert these paragraph
4335 s manually to a style present in your new document class.
4338 \begin_layout Section
4339 Paragraph Indentation and Separation
4340 \begin_inset Index idx
4343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4344 Paragraph ! Indentation
4352 \begin_layout Subsection
4354 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4356 name "sec:Par-indent-intro"
4363 \begin_layout Standard
4364 Before describing all of the various paragraph environments, we'd like to
4365 say a word or two about paragraph indentation.
4368 \begin_layout Standard
4369 Everyone seems to have their own convention for separating paragraphs.
4370 Most Americans indent the first line of a paragraph.
4371 Others don't indent but put extra space between the paragraphs.
4372 If you choose indentation for paragraphs the
4376 paragraph of a section, or after a figure, an equation, a table, a list,
4382 Only a paragraph following another paragraph gets indented.
4383 Note that the indentation behavior is different when you use another document
4384 language than English.
4386 takes care that the indentation follows the rules of the language used.
4389 \begin_layout Standard
4390 The space between paragraphs, like the line spacing, the space between headings
4391 and text — in fact, all the spacing for just about everything —is pre-coded
4392 into \SpecialChar LyX
4394 As we said, you don't worry about how much space to add between what.
4397 In fact, these pre-coded vertical spacings aren't a single number but a
4399 That way, \SpecialChar LyX
4400 can squish or stretch the space between lines to make sure figures
4401 fit on a page with text, so that sections don't start at the bottom of
4406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4408 does this when \SpecialChar LyX
4409 goes to produce a printable file.
4414 However, pre-coded doesn't mean you can't change them.
4416 gives you the ability globally to change
4420 these pre-coded spacings.
4421 We will explain more later.
4424 \begin_layout Subsection
4425 Paragraph Separation
4426 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4428 name "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4433 \begin_inset Index idx
4436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4437 Paragraph ! Separation
4445 \begin_layout Standard
4453 \begin_inset space ~
4461 \begin_inset space ~
4468 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4472 \begin_inset Index idx
4475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4481 to indent paragraphs or to add extra space between paragraphs, respectively.
4484 \begin_layout Subsection
4488 \begin_layout Standard
4489 You can also change the separation method of a single paragraph.
4492 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4494 \begin_inset space ~
4499 dialog and toggle the
4502 \begin_inset space ~
4507 option to change the state of the current paragraph (shortcut
4510 arg "paragraph-params \\indent-toggle"
4514 If paragraphs have no indentation but use extra space for separation, this
4515 button will be ignored (you can't indent a single paragraph by toggling
4519 \begin_layout Standard
4520 You should only need to change the indentation method for a single paragraph
4521 if you need to do some fine-tuning.
4524 \begin_layout Subsection
4526 \begin_inset Index idx
4529 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4530 Paragraph ! Line spacing
4538 \begin_layout Standard
4541 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4545 \begin_inset Index idx
4548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4557 dialog you can set the line spacing for the whole document in the submenu
4561 \begin_inset space ~
4570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4571 You need to have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4577 \begin_inset Index idx
4580 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4587 installed to use this feature.
4592 You can set it for a single paragraph in the
4594 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4596 \begin_inset space ~
4601 dialog but this should be used very exceptionally because vertical spacing
4602 is normally defined in the environment's style.
4605 \begin_layout Section
4606 Paragraph Environments
4607 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4609 name "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
4614 \begin_inset Index idx
4617 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4618 Paragraph ! Environments
4624 \begin_inset Index idx
4627 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4628 Paragraph environments|(
4636 \begin_layout Subsection
4640 \begin_layout Standard
4641 Paragraph environments correspond to the
4644 \begin_layout Standard
4653 } \SpecialChar ldots
4663 \begin_inset Newline newline
4666 command sequence in \SpecialChar LaTeX
4668 If you don't know \SpecialChar LaTeX
4669 , or the concept of a paragraph environment is totally
4670 alien to you, we urge you to read the
4679 also contains many more examples than this section does.
4682 \begin_layout Standard
4683 A paragraph environment is simply a
4684 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4688 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4691 for a paragraph which gives that paragraph certain properties.
4692 This can include a particular style of font, different margins, a numbering
4693 scheme, labels, and so on.
4694 Additionally, you can
4695 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4699 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4702 the different environments inside one another, allowing one environment
4703 to inherit some of the properties of another.
4704 The different paragraph environments totally replace the need for messy
4705 tab stops, on the fly margin adjustment, and other hangovers from the days
4707 There are several paragraph environments that are specific to a particular
4709 We will only be covering the most common ones here.
4712 \begin_layout Standard
4713 To choose a new paragraph environment, use the pull-down box
4714 \begin_inset Graphics
4715 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
4721 at the left end of the toolbar.
4723 will change the environment of the
4727 paragraph in which the cursor sits.
4728 You can also change the environment of an entire group of paragraphs if
4729 you select them before choosing the new environment.
4733 \begin_layout Standard
4742 create a new paragraph using the
4746 paragraph environment.
4748 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4752 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4755 because if you are in one of these environments:
4758 \begin_layout Itemize
4764 \begin_layout Itemize
4770 \begin_layout Itemize
4776 \begin_layout Itemize
4782 \begin_layout Itemize
4788 \begin_layout Itemize
4794 \begin_layout Itemize
4800 \begin_layout Standard
4802 keeps the old paragraph environment when you enter
4806 , rather than resetting it to
4811 Also the nesting depth is preserved (for more on nesting see section
4812 \begin_inset space ~
4816 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4818 reference "sec:Nesting"
4825 \begin_layout Subsection
4829 \begin_layout Standard
4830 The default paragraph environment is
4835 It creates a plain paragraph.
4837 resets the paragraph environment, this is the one it chooses.
4838 In fact, the paragraph you're reading right now (and most of the ones in
4839 this manual) are in the
4846 \begin_layout Standard
4847 You can nest a paragraph using the
4851 environment in just about anything else, but you can't really nest anything
4859 \begin_layout Subsection
4861 \begin_inset Index idx
4864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4873 \begin_layout Standard
4874 A \SpecialChar LaTeX
4875 title page has three parts: the title itself, the name(s) of the author(s)
4877 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4881 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4884 for thanks or contact information.
4885 For certain types of documents, \SpecialChar LaTeX
4886 places all of this on a separate page
4887 along with today's date.
4888 For other types of documents, the title
4889 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4893 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4896 goes at the top of the first page of the document.
4900 \begin_layout Standard
4902 provides an interface to the title page commands through the paragraph
4916 Here's how you use them:
4919 \begin_layout Itemize
4920 Put the title of your document in the
4927 \begin_layout Itemize
4928 Put the author name in the
4935 \begin_layout Itemize
4936 If you want the date to have a certain appearance, want to use a fixed date,
4937 or want other text to appear in place of today's date, put that text in
4943 Note that using this environment is optional.
4944 If you don't provide any, \SpecialChar LaTeX
4945 will automatically insert today's date.
4946 If you don't want a date, use the option
4948 Suppress default date on front page
4952 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4953 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
4955 \begin_inset space ~
4963 \begin_layout Standard
4964 You can use footnotes to insert
4965 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4969 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4972 or contact information.
4975 \begin_layout Subsection
4977 \begin_inset Index idx
4980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4987 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4989 name "subsec:Headings"
4996 \begin_layout Standard
4997 There are several paragraph environments for producing section headings.
4999 takes care of the numbering for you.
5002 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5004 \begin_inset Index idx
5007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5008 Section headings ! Numbered
5016 \begin_layout Standard
5017 There are 7 numbered types of section headings.
5021 \begin_layout Enumerate
5027 \begin_layout Enumerate
5033 \begin_layout Enumerate
5039 \begin_layout Enumerate
5045 \begin_layout Enumerate
5051 \begin_layout Enumerate
5057 \begin_layout Enumerate
5063 \begin_layout Standard
5065 labels each heading with a series of numbers, separated by periods.
5066 The numbers describe where in the document you are.
5067 Unlike the other headings, parts are numbered with Latin letters.
5070 \begin_layout Standard
5071 Headings all subdivide your document into different pieces of text.
5072 For example, suppose you're writing a book.
5073 You group the book into chapters.
5075 does a similar grouping:
5078 \begin_layout Itemize
5083 is divided into either
5094 \begin_layout Itemize
5106 \begin_layout Itemize
5118 \begin_layout Itemize
5130 \begin_layout Itemize
5142 \begin_layout Itemize
5154 \begin_layout Standard
5155 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
5158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5163 Not all document types use the
5167 heading as the maximum sectioning level.
5172 is the top-level heading.
5180 \begin_layout Standard
5185 environment to label a new sub-subsection, \SpecialChar LyX
5186 labels it with its number,
5187 along with the number of the subsection, section and, if applicable, chapter
5189 For example: the fifth section of the second chapter of this book has the
5191 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5195 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5201 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5203 \begin_inset Index idx
5206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5207 Section headings ! Unnumbered
5215 \begin_layout Standard
5216 The unnumbered section headings have a
5217 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5221 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5224 at the end of their name.
5225 They work the same as their numbered counterparts but will not appear in
5226 the table of contents, see section
5227 \begin_inset space ~
5231 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5240 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5241 Changing the Numbering
5242 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5244 name "subsec:Numbering-depth"
5251 \begin_layout Standard
5252 You can also alter which sectioning levels get numbered and which ones appear
5253 in the Table of Contents.
5254 Now, this doesn't remove any of the levels; that's preset in the document
5256 Just as certain classes start with
5270 Similarly, not all document classes number all sectioning levels.
5280 This is something you can change.
5283 \begin_layout Standard
5286 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5290 \begin_inset Index idx
5293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5302 \begin_inset space ~
5306 \begin_inset space ~
5311 you will see two counters.
5316 controls how far down in the sectioning hierarchy \SpecialChar LyX
5317 numbers a section heading.
5318 The other one controls the appearance of the section headings in the table
5322 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5323 Short Titles of Headings
5324 \begin_inset Index idx
5327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5328 Section headings ! Short titles
5334 \begin_inset Argument 1
5337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5344 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5346 name "sec:Short-Titles"
5353 \begin_layout Standard
5354 Some section or chapter titles, such as this one, can get quite long.
5355 This can cause trouble when there is limited horizontal space.
5356 For example, if the header of the page is set to show the current section
5357 title, a long title will protrude over the page margins and look awful.
5360 \begin_layout Standard
5362 allows you to specify a short title for section headings.
5363 This short title is used in the header and in the actual table of contents,
5364 avoiding the problem mentioned.
5365 To specify a short title, set the cursor behind the title and use the menu
5368 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
5370 \begin_inset space ~
5376 This will insert a box labeled
5377 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5381 \begin_inset space ~
5385 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5388 which you can use to enter the short title text.
5389 This also works for captions inside floats.
5390 There can only be one short title per title.
5393 \begin_layout Standard
5394 The title of this section is a good example of using this feature.
5397 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5401 \begin_layout Standard
5402 The following information applies to all section headings:
5405 \begin_layout Itemize
5406 You cannot do any nesting with these environments.
5409 \begin_layout Itemize
5410 You cannot use a margin note in any of these environments.
5413 \begin_layout Itemize
5414 You can only use inline math in these environments.
5417 \begin_layout Itemize
5418 You can use labels and cross-references to refer to their numbers.
5421 \begin_layout Subsection
5425 \begin_layout Standard
5427 has three paragraph environments for writing poetry and quotations.
5441 Forget the days of changing line spacing and twiddling with margins.
5442 These three paragraph environments already have those changes built-in.
5443 They all widen the left margin and add a bit of extra space above and below
5444 the text they contain.
5445 They also allow nesting, so you can put a
5453 , as well as in some other paragraph environments.
5456 \begin_layout Standard
5457 There is another feature of these three paragraph environments: they do
5466 when you start a new paragraph.
5467 So, you can type in that poem and merrily enter
5471 without worrying about the paragraph environment changing on you.
5472 Of course, that means that, once you are done typing in that poem, you
5473 have to change back to the
5477 environment yourself.
5480 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5482 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5489 \begin_inset Index idx
5492 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5501 \begin_layout Standard
5502 Now that we've described the similarities of these three environments, it's
5503 time for the differences.
5512 are identical except for one difference:
5516 uses extra spacing to separate paragraphs and never indents the first line.
5525 indents the first line of a paragraph and uses the same line spacing throughout.
5528 \begin_layout Standard
5529 Here's an example of the
5542 I can keep writing, extending this line out further and further until it
5544 See – no indentation!
5548 Here's the second paragraph of this quote.
5549 Again, there's no indentation, but there is extra space between me and
5550 the other paragraph.
5553 \begin_layout Standard
5554 Here's another example, this time in the
5561 \begin_layout Quotation
5567 If I keep writing, you will see the indentation.
5568 If your country uses a writing style that indicates new paragraphs by indenting
5569 the first line, then
5573 is the environment for you! Well, you'd use it
5577 you were quoting other text.
5580 \begin_layout Quotation
5581 Here's a new paragraph.
5582 I could ramble on and on, like a politician at election time.
5583 If I did that, though, you'd get bored.
5586 \begin_layout Standard
5587 As the examples show,
5591 is for those people who use extra space to separate paragraphs.
5592 They should put quotes in the
5597 Those who use indentation to mark a new paragraph should use the
5601 paragraph environment for quoted text.
5604 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5606 \begin_inset Index idx
5609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5616 \begin_inset Index idx
5619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5626 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5635 \begin_layout Standard
5640 is a paragraph environment for poetry, rhymes, verses, and so on.
5646 \begin_inset Newline newline
5649 Which I did not rehearse!
5653 It could be much worse.
5654 This line could be long, very long, oh so long, so very long that it wraps
5656 It looks okay on screen, but in the printed version, the extra lines are
5657 indented a bit more than the first.
5658 Okay, so it's turned to prose and doesn't rhyme anymore.
5664 \begin_inset Newline newline
5667 And make things look fine
5668 \begin_inset Newline newline
5674 arg "newline-insert newline"
5680 \begin_layout Standard
5685 does not indent both margins.
5686 Each stanza of the verse or poem is in its own paragraph.
5687 To separate the individual lines of a stanza, use the shortcut
5690 arg "newline-insert newline"
5696 \begin_layout Subsection
5698 \begin_inset Index idx
5701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5708 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5717 \begin_layout Standard
5719 has four different paragraph environments for creating different kinds
5729 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5730 labels your list items with bullets or numbers, respectively.
5739 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5740 lets you provide your own label.
5741 We will present the individual details of each type of list next after
5742 describing some general features of all four of them.
5745 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5749 \begin_layout Standard
5750 The four paragraph environments for lists differ from the other environments
5752 First, \SpecialChar LyX
5753 treats each paragraph as a list item.
5762 reset the environment to
5766 but keeps the current environment and creates a new list item.
5767 The nesting depth is thereby kept.
5768 If you want to keep the paragraph environment but reset the current nesting
5772 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
5776 If you do this at the top level of a list, it returns you to the
5783 \begin_layout Standard
5784 You can nest lists of any type inside one another.
5785 In fact, \SpecialChar LyX
5786 changes the labels on some list items depending on how it is
5788 If you intend to use any of the list paragraph environments, we suggest
5789 you read all of section
5790 \begin_inset space ~
5794 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5796 reference "sec:Nesting"
5803 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5805 \begin_inset Index idx
5808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5815 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5824 \begin_layout Standard
5825 The first type of list we will describe in detail is the
5829 paragraph environment.
5830 It has the following properties:
5833 \begin_layout Itemize
5834 Each item has a particular bullet or symbol as its label.
5838 \begin_layout Itemize
5840 uses the same symbol for all of the items in a given nesting level.
5843 \begin_layout Itemize
5844 The symbol appears at the beginning of the first line.
5848 \begin_layout Itemize
5849 The items can have any length.
5851 automatically offsets the left margin of each item.
5852 The offset is always relative to whatever environment the
5859 \begin_layout Itemize
5864 environment inside another
5868 environment, the label changes to a new symbol.
5872 \begin_layout Itemize
5873 There are four different symbols for up to a four-fold nesting.
5876 \begin_layout Itemize
5878 always shows the same symbol on screen.
5881 \begin_layout Itemize
5883 \begin_inset space ~
5887 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5889 reference "sec:Nesting"
5893 for a full explanation of nesting.
5897 \begin_layout Standard
5898 Of course, that explanation was also an example of an
5907 environment is best suited for lists where the order doesn't matter.
5910 \begin_layout Standard
5911 We said that different levels use different symbols as their label.
5912 Here's an example of all four possible symbols.
5915 \begin_layout Itemize
5916 The label for the first level
5920 is a large black dot, or bullet.
5924 \begin_layout Itemize
5925 The label for the second level is a dash.
5929 \begin_layout Itemize
5930 The label for the third is an asterisk.
5934 \begin_layout Itemize
5935 The label for the fourth is a centered dot.
5939 \begin_layout Itemize
5940 Back out to the third level.
5944 \begin_layout Itemize
5945 Back to the second level.
5949 \begin_layout Itemize
5950 Back to the outermost level.
5953 \begin_layout Standard
5954 These are the default labels for an
5959 You can customize how these labels are displayed in the output in the
5961 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5964 dialog in the submenu
5969 \begin_inset Index idx
5972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5978 These customizations are not displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
5982 \begin_layout Standard
5983 Notice how the space between items decreases with increasing depth.
5984 We will explain nesting and all the tricks you can do with different depths
5986 \begin_inset space ~
5990 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5992 reference "sec:Nesting"
5999 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6001 \begin_inset Index idx
6004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6011 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6013 name "sec:Enumerate"
6020 \begin_layout Standard
6025 environment is used to create numbered lists and outlines.
6026 It has these properties:
6029 \begin_layout Enumerate
6030 Each item has a numeral as its label.
6034 \begin_layout Enumerate
6035 The label type depends on the nesting depth.
6039 \begin_layout Enumerate
6041 automatically counts the items for you and updates the label as appropriate.
6044 \begin_layout Enumerate
6049 environment resets the counter to one.
6052 \begin_layout Enumerate
6065 \begin_layout Enumerate
6066 Offsets the items relative to the left margin.
6067 Items can have any length.
6070 \begin_layout Enumerate
6071 Reduces the space between items as the nesting depth increases.
6074 \begin_layout Enumerate
6075 Uses different types of labels depending on the nesting depth.
6078 \begin_layout Enumerate
6079 Allows up to a four-fold nesting.
6083 \begin_layout Standard
6092 shows the different labels for each item in \SpecialChar LyX
6094 Here is how \SpecialChar LyX
6095 labels the four different levels in an
6102 \begin_layout Enumerate
6103 The first level of an
6107 uses Arabic numerals followed by a period.
6111 \begin_layout Enumerate
6112 The second level uses lower case letters surrounded by parentheses.
6116 \begin_layout Enumerate
6117 The third level uses lower-case Roman numerals followed by a period.
6121 \begin_layout Enumerate
6122 The fourth level uses capital letters followed by a period.
6125 \begin_layout Enumerate
6126 Again, notice the decrease in the spacing between items as the nesting depth
6131 \begin_layout Enumerate
6132 Back to the third level
6136 \begin_layout Enumerate
6137 Back to the second level.
6141 \begin_layout Enumerate
6142 Back to the outermost level.
6145 \begin_layout Standard
6146 You can customize the type of numbering used in the
6150 environment, see section
6151 \begin_inset space ~
6155 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6157 reference "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6162 Such customization only shows up in the printed version, not in \SpecialChar LyX
6166 \begin_layout Standard
6167 There is more to nesting
6171 environments than we've stated here.
6172 You should read section
6173 \begin_inset space ~
6177 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6179 reference "sec:Nesting"
6183 to learn more about nesting.
6186 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6188 \begin_inset Index idx
6191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6200 \begin_layout Standard
6201 Unlike the previous two environments, the
6205 list has no fixed label.
6206 Instead, \SpecialChar LyX
6208 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6212 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6215 of the first line as the label.
6219 \begin_layout Description
6220 Example: This is an example of the
6227 \begin_layout Standard
6229 typesets the label in boldface and puts extra space between it and the
6233 \begin_layout Standard
6235 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6239 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6242 it is meant that the first usage of the
6246 key ends the label if you are at the beginning of the first line of an
6248 If you need to use more than one word in a label use a
6256 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
6261 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6262 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
6264 \begin_inset space ~
6270 \begin_inset space ~
6274 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6276 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
6280 for more information.) Here is an example:
6283 \begin_layout Description
6285 \begin_inset space ~
6288 Example: This one shows how to use a
6291 \begin_inset space ~
6303 \begin_layout Description
6304 Usage: You should use the
6308 environment for things like definitions and theorems.
6309 Use it when you need to make one word in particular stand out in the text
6311 It's not a good idea to use a
6315 environment when you have an entire sentence that you want to describe.
6316 You're better off using
6328 paragraphs into them.
6331 \begin_layout Description
6332 Nesting: You can nest
6336 environments inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and
6340 \begin_layout Standard
6341 Notice that after the first line, \SpecialChar LyX
6342 indents subsequent lines, offsetting
6343 them from the first line.
6346 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6348 \begin_inset Index idx
6351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6360 \begin_layout Standard
6365 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
6366 extension to \SpecialChar LaTeX
6370 \begin_layout Standard
6379 list has user-defined labels for each list item but it provides some additional
6381 Here are its properties:
6384 \begin_layout Labeling
6385 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6387 \begin_inset space ~
6390 labels \SpecialChar LyX
6392 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6396 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6399 of each line as the item label.
6404 after the beginning of the first line of an item marks the end of the label.
6405 If you need to use more than one word in an item label, use a protected
6406 space as described above.
6409 \begin_layout Labeling
6410 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6411 margins As you can see, \SpecialChar LyX
6412 uses different margins for the item label and the
6413 body of the item text.
6414 The body of the text has a larger left margin, which is equal to the default
6415 label width plus a little extra space.
6419 \begin_layout Labeling
6420 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6422 \begin_inset space ~
6425 width \SpecialChar LyX
6426 uses the width of the label, or the default width, whatever is larger.
6427 If the label width is larger, the label
6428 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6432 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6435 into the first line.
6436 In other words, the text of the first line isn't aligned with the left
6437 margin of the rest of the item text.
6440 \begin_layout Labeling
6441 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6443 \begin_inset space ~
6446 width You can set the default label width to ensure that the text of all
6451 environment has the same left margin.
6452 \begin_inset Newline newline
6455 To change the default width, select all items in the list.
6458 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
6460 \begin_inset space ~
6465 dialog (toolbar button
6468 arg "layout-paragraph"
6475 \begin_inset space ~
6480 determines the default label width.
6481 You can use the text of your largest label here, but you can also use the
6483 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6487 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6490 multiple times instead.
6491 M is the widest character and is a standard unit of widths in \SpecialChar LaTeX
6494 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6498 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6501 as the unit of width you don't need to keep changing the contents of
6504 \begin_inset space ~
6509 every time you alter a label in a
6514 \begin_inset Newline newline
6517 The predefined default width is the length of
6518 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6522 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6526 \begin_inset space ~
6532 \begin_layout Standard
6537 list the same way as the
6541 list: When you need one word to stand out from the text that describes
6547 environment gives you another way to do this, using a different overall
6551 \begin_layout Standard
6556 lists inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and so on.
6557 They work just like the other list paragraph environments.
6559 \begin_inset space ~
6563 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6565 reference "sec:Nesting"
6569 to learn about nesting.
6572 \begin_layout Standard
6573 There is yet another feature of the
6577 list: As you can see in the examples, \SpecialChar LyX
6578 left-justifies the item labels by
6580 You can use additional
6584 to change how \SpecialChar LyX
6585 justifies the item label.
6590 are documented in section
6591 \begin_inset space ~
6595 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6597 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
6602 Here are some examples:
6605 \begin_layout Labeling
6606 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6607 Left The default for
6614 \begin_layout Labeling
6615 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6616 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6623 at the beginning of the label right justifies it.
6626 \begin_layout Labeling
6627 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6628 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6632 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6639 at the beginning of the label and one at the end centers it.
6642 \begin_layout Subsection
6644 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6646 name "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6651 \begin_inset Index idx
6654 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6663 \begin_layout Standard
6664 The features described in this section require that the module
6666 Customisable Lists (enumitem)
6668 is loaded in the document settings.
6669 The module uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
6675 \begin_inset Index idx
6678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6688 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6689 Custom Enumerate Lists
6690 \begin_inset Index idx
6693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6694 Lists ! Enumerate ! Custom
6702 \begin_layout Standard
6704 The default numbering of numbered lists can be changed by adding an optional
6707 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6710 ) to the first item of each level in the list.
6711 There you add the command
6714 \begin_layout Standard
6722 \begin_layout Standard
6734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6735 For more about \SpecialChar TeX
6736 Code, look at section
6737 \begin_inset space ~
6741 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6743 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
6756 is hereby the first level counter of the enumeration.
6763 outputs the counter as a small Roman numeral.
6764 For capital Roman numerals replace
6776 in the command above.
6777 For Arabic numerals use
6785 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6789 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6792 items with capital or small Latin letters use
6807 \begin_layout Standard
6809 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6817 You can only number 26
6818 \begin_inset space ~
6821 items with Latin letters, because this numbering is limited to single letters.
6829 \begin_layout Standard
6830 To change the numbering for the list sublevels, replace the 'i' in the command
6831 by the small Roman numeral of the level (enumi, enumii, enumiii, enumiv).
6834 \begin_layout Standard
6835 Here is a list with custom numbering:
6838 \begin_layout Enumerate
6839 \begin_inset Argument 1
6842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6868 \begin_layout Enumerate
6869 \begin_inset Argument 1
6872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6895 \begin_layout Enumerate
6900 \begin_layout Enumerate
6901 \begin_inset Argument 1
6904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6928 \begin_layout Enumerate
6929 \begin_inset Argument 1
6932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6958 \begin_layout Standard
6959 For this list these commands were used:
6962 \begin_layout Standard
6973 \begin_inset Newline newline
6981 \begin_inset Newline newline
6989 \begin_inset Newline newline
6999 \begin_layout Standard
7006 makes the label emphasized and
7015 \begin_layout Standard
7016 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7024 When you change the label of a list level, it will be used for all following
7025 lists until you change the definition.
7033 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7035 \begin_inset Index idx
7038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7039 Lists ! Enumerate ! Resumed
7047 \begin_layout Standard
7048 Enumerations can be resumed after intermediate paragraphs:
7051 \begin_layout Enumerate
7052 \begin_inset Argument 1
7055 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7074 \begin_inset Note Note
7077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7078 goes back to default numbering
7086 \begin_layout Enumerate
7090 \begin_layout Standard
7094 \begin_layout Enumerate-Resume
7098 \begin_layout Standard
7099 To resume an enumeration, use the style
7104 Its numbering appears in blue within \SpecialChar LyX
7105 to indicate that it is a resumed
7106 list and that the numbering will not be correct in \SpecialChar LyX
7107 , but in the output.
7110 \begin_layout Standard
7111 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7119 If there is no previous enumeration to resume, you will get a \SpecialChar LaTeX
7128 \begin_layout Standard
7129 Perhaps you might want to resume the list with a different number from the
7131 Or you want to start a new enumeration with a defined number.
7132 This is possible by adding an optional argument to the first list item
7133 of a normal enumeration.
7134 There, insert the command
7137 \begin_layout Standard
7143 \begin_layout Standard
7148 is the number with which you want to resume the list.
7152 \begin_layout Enumerate
7156 \begin_layout Enumerate
7160 \begin_layout Standard
7161 Enumeration starting at a given value:
7164 \begin_layout Enumerate
7165 \begin_inset Argument 1
7168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7184 This enumeration starts at 4
7187 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7189 \begin_inset Index idx
7192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7201 \begin_layout Standard
7202 In some cases you might want less or more vertical space between the items
7204 For example if the default space is too much in your opinion in this case:
7207 \begin_layout Itemize
7211 \begin_layout Itemize
7212 with standard spacing
7215 \begin_layout Standard
7216 You can decrease the space by adding an optional argument to the first item
7218 Add there the command
7222 to get no additional list space like in this example:
7225 \begin_layout Itemize
7226 \begin_inset Argument 1
7229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7248 \begin_layout Itemize
7252 \begin_layout Itemize
7256 \begin_layout Standard
7257 To add space you can use several other commands provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7264 \begin_inset Index idx
7267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7275 For more information see its documentation,
7276 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7286 \begin_layout Standard
7287 There are also many commands available to change the horizontal spacing
7289 Here is an example where the indentation was changed to that of the paragraphs
7290 in the document and the label separation was set to 2
7291 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
7294 cm so that the number is in the page margin:
7297 \begin_layout Enumerate
7298 \begin_inset Argument 1
7301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7309 parindent, labelsep=2cm
7322 \begin_layout Enumerate
7323 with negative indentation
7326 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7327 Further Customization
7328 \begin_inset Index idx
7331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7332 Lists ! Customization
7340 \begin_layout Standard
7341 You can also change the style of description lists.
7345 \begin_layout Standard
7351 \begin_layout Standard
7352 changes the description label font, the command
7355 \begin_layout Standard
7361 \begin_layout Standard
7362 sets the list style.
7365 \begin_layout Standard
7366 An example where the command
7369 \begin_layout Standard
7374 itshape, style=nextline
7377 \begin_layout Standard
7381 \begin_layout Description
7383 \begin_inset space ~
7387 \begin_inset Argument 1
7390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7396 labelindent=0pt, labelsep=1cm, font=
7398 itshape, style=nextline
7408 Ionizing radiation consists of particles or electromagnetic waves that are
7409 energetic enough to detach electrons from atoms or molecules, therefore
7413 \begin_layout Description
7415 \begin_inset space ~
7418 counting: In computer science, reference counting is a technique of storing
7419 the number of references, pointers, or handles to a resource such as an
7420 object, block of memory, disk space or other resource.
7423 \begin_layout Standard
7424 There are many more commands and features provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7430 \begin_inset Index idx
7433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7441 For more information see its documentation
7442 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7452 \begin_layout Subsection
7454 \begin_inset Index idx
7457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7466 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7468 \begin_inset space ~
7471 Address: An Overview
7474 \begin_layout Standard
7475 Although \SpecialChar LyX
7476 has document classes for letters, we've also created two paragraph
7484 \begin_inset space ~
7490 To use the letter class, you need to use specific paragraph environments
7491 in a specific order, otherwise \SpecialChar LaTeX
7492 gags on the document.
7493 In contrast, you can use the
7500 \begin_inset space ~
7505 paragraph environments anywhere with no problem.
7506 You can even nest them inside other environments, though you can't nest
7510 \begin_layout Standard
7511 Of course, you're not limited to using
7518 \begin_inset space ~
7527 \begin_inset space ~
7532 , in particular, is useful for creating article titles like those used in
7533 some European academic papers.
7536 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7538 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7540 name "sec:Address-Usage"
7547 \begin_layout Standard
7552 environment formats text in the style of an address, which is also used
7553 for the opening and signature in some countries.
7557 \begin_inset space ~
7562 environment formats text in the style of a right-justified address, which
7563 is used for the sender's address and today's date in some countries.
7564 Here's an example of each:
7567 \begin_layout Right Address
7569 \begin_inset Newline newline
7573 \begin_inset Newline newline
7577 \begin_inset Newline newline
7580 When is it? What is today?
7583 \begin_layout Standard
7587 \begin_inset space ~
7593 Notice that the lines all have the same left margin, which \SpecialChar LyX
7595 the largest block of text on a single line.
7596 Here's an example of the
7603 \begin_layout Address
7605 \begin_inset Newline newline
7608 Where do I send this
7609 \begin_inset Newline newline
7612 Your post office and country
7615 \begin_layout Standard
7616 As you can see, both
7623 \begin_inset space ~
7628 add extra space between themselves and the next paragraph.
7633 in either of these environments, \SpecialChar LyX
7634 resets the nesting depth and sets the
7640 This makes sense, since
7648 function, and the individual lines of an address are not paragraphs.
7649 Thus, you have to use
7656 arg "newline-insert newline"
7661 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
7662 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
7664 \begin_inset space ~
7668 \begin_inset space ~
7673 ) to start a new line in an
7680 \begin_inset space ~
7688 \begin_layout Subsection
7692 \begin_layout Standard
7693 Most academic writing begins with an abstract and ends with a bibliography
7694 or list of references.
7696 contains paragraph environments for both of these.
7699 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7701 \begin_inset Index idx
7704 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7713 \begin_layout Standard
7718 environment is used for the abstract of an article.
7719 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7720 only use it at the beginning of the document, after the title.
7721 Also, don't bother trying to nest
7735 environment is only useful in the article and report document classes.
7736 The book document classes ignores the
7740 completely, and it's utterly silly to use
7744 in a letter document class.
7747 \begin_layout Standard
7752 environment does several things for you.
7753 First, it puts the centered label
7754 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7758 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7762 The label and the text of the abstract are separated by some extra vertical
7764 Second, it typesets everything in a smaller font, just as you'd expect.
7765 Lastly, it adds a bit of extra vertical space between the abstract and
7766 the subsequent text.
7767 Well, that's how it will appear on the \SpecialChar LyX
7769 The actual appearance in the output depends on the document class you are
7773 \begin_layout Standard
7774 Starting a new paragraph by entering
7778 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7779 The new paragraph will still be in the
7784 So, you will have to change the paragraph environment yourself when you
7785 finish entering the abstract of your document.
7788 \begin_layout Standard
7789 \begin_inset Float figure
7794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7796 \begin_inset Graphics
7797 filename clipart/Abstract.pdf
7804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7805 \begin_inset Caption Standard
7807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7808 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7810 name "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7831 \begin_layout Standard
7832 We would love to demonstrate the
7836 environment, but since this document is in the
7837 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7841 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7844 class, we can't do this.
7845 We inserted it therefore as figure
7846 \begin_inset space ~
7850 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7852 reference "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7857 If you have never heard of an
7858 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7862 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7865 before, you can safely ignore this environment.
7868 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7870 \begin_inset Index idx
7873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7880 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7882 name "subsec:Biblio_environment"
7889 \begin_layout Standard
7894 environment is used to list references.
7895 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7896 only use it at the end of the document.
7908 \begin_layout Standard
7909 When you first open a
7913 environment, \SpecialChar LyX
7914 adds a large vertical space, followed by the heading
7915 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7919 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7923 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7927 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7930 depending on the document class.
7931 The heading is in a large boldface font.
7932 Each paragraph of the
7936 environment is a bibliography entry.
7941 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7942 Each new paragraph is still in the
7949 \begin_layout Standard
7950 There is another, usually better way to include references in your document
7951 by using a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
7953 For more information on that, and for a detailed description of \SpecialChar LyX
7955 handling, have a look at section
7956 \begin_inset space ~
7960 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7962 reference "sec:Bibliography"
7969 \begin_layout Subsection
7970 Special Environments
7973 \begin_layout Standard
7975 provides two environments that can be used to emulate the behavior of a
7976 computer console/terminal and a typewriter.
7979 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7984 \begin_inset Index idx
7987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7995 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7997 name "subsec:LyX-Code"
8004 \begin_layout Standard
8010 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
8012 It type-sets text in a typewriter-style font.
8017 key as a fixed whitespace.
8021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8034 \begin_inset space ~
8039 instead of an end-of-word marker.
8057 * are the only environments in which you can type multiple whitespaces in
8060 If you need to insert blank lines, you will still need to use
8063 arg "newline-insert newline"
8080 does not reset the paragraph environment.
8081 So, when you finish using the
8086 environment, you will need to change the paragraph environment yourself.
8087 Also, you can nest the
8092 environment inside of others.
8095 \begin_layout Standard
8096 There are a few quirks with this environment:
8099 \begin_layout Itemize
8103 arg "newline-insert newline"
8106 at the beginning of a new paragraph (i.
8107 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
8111 \begin_inset space \space{}
8121 arg "newline-insert newline"
8127 \begin_layout Itemize
8131 arg "newline-insert newline"
8141 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
8147 \begin_layout Itemize
8148 You cannot have an empty paragraph or an empty line.
8149 You must put at least one
8153 in any line you want blank.
8154 Otherwise, \SpecialChar LaTeX
8158 \begin_layout Itemize
8159 You cannot get the typewriter double quotes by typing
8163 since that will insert
8168 You get the typewriter double quotes with
8171 arg "self-insert \""
8177 \begin_layout Standard
8181 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8185 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8189 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8193 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8197 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8198 printf("Hello World!
8203 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8207 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8211 \begin_layout Standard
8212 This is just the standard
8213 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8217 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8224 \begin_layout Standard
8230 has one purpose: to typeset code, such as program source, shell scripts
8232 Use it only in those very special cases where you need to generate text
8233 as if you used a typewriter.
8234 \begin_inset Index idx
8237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8238 Paragraph environments|)
8243 For longer parts of programming code, use the listings inset that is described
8246 Program Code Listings
8251 \begin_inset space ~
8259 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8263 \begin_inset Index idx
8266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8275 \begin_layout Standard
8280 environment is similar to the
8285 environment with the difference that its content will be treated like a
8286 computer console text.
8291 does therefore not have paragraphs so that
8305 key is treated like a normal space in text (not as a protected space) and
8306 you can have empty lines.
8319 \begin_layout Itemize
8320 have a certain language and a text style
8323 \begin_layout Itemize
8324 contain hyperlinks, boxes, foot- and margin notes, notes, math, citations,
8325 index- and nomenclature entries, labels, tables, graphics, listings, floats
8326 and \SpecialChar TeX
8330 \begin_layout Standard
8331 Because of these properties
8335 works like a typewriter.
8339 \begin_layout Verbatim
8344 \begin_layout Verbatim
8348 The following 2 lines are empty:
8351 \begin_layout Verbatim
8355 \begin_layout Verbatim
8359 \begin_layout Verbatim
8361 Almost everything is allowed in Verbatim:"%&$§#~'`
8366 \begin_layout Standard
8371 environment is identical to
8375 with the difference that spaces appear in the output as the character '
8376 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
8383 \begin_layout Verbatim*
8388 \begin_layout Section
8389 Nesting Environments
8390 \begin_inset Index idx
8393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8394 Nesting ! Environments
8400 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8409 \begin_layout Subsection
8413 \begin_layout Standard
8415 treats text as a unified block with a particular context and specific propertie
8417 This allows you to create blocks that inherit some of the properties of
8419 For example you have three main points in an outline, but point #2 also
8421 In other words, you have a list inside of another list, with the inner
8423 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8427 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8433 \begin_layout Enumerate
8437 \begin_layout Enumerate
8442 \begin_layout Enumerate
8446 \begin_layout Enumerate
8451 \begin_layout Enumerate
8455 \begin_layout Standard
8456 You put a list inside a list by nesting one list inside the other.
8457 Nesting an environment is quite simple: Select
8459 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
8461 \begin_inset space ~
8465 \begin_inset space ~
8473 \begin_inset space ~
8477 \begin_inset space ~
8482 to change the nesting depth (the status bar will tell you how far you are
8484 Instead of the menu, you can also use the toolbar buttons
8487 arg "depth-increment"
8493 arg "depth-decrement"
8507 arg "depth-increment"
8513 arg "depth-decrement"
8517 The change will work on the current selection, if you have made one (allowing
8518 you to change the nesting of several paragraphs at once), or the current
8522 \begin_layout Standard
8523 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
8524 only changes the nesting depth if it can.
8525 If it is invalid to do so, nothing happens if you try to change the depth.
8526 Additionally, if you change the depth of one paragraph, it affects the
8527 depth of every paragraph nested inside of it.
8530 \begin_layout Standard
8531 Nesting isn't limited to lists.
8533 , you can nest just about anything inside anything else, as you're about
8535 This is the real power of nesting paragraph environments.
8538 \begin_layout Subsection
8539 What You Can and Can't Nest
8542 \begin_layout Standard
8543 Before we fire a list of paragraph environments at you, we need to tell
8544 you a little bit more about how nesting works.
8547 \begin_layout Standard
8548 The question of nesting a paragraph environment is a bit more complicated
8549 than a simple yes or no.
8550 There are three types of paragraph environments:
8553 \begin_layout Itemize
8554 Completely unnestable
8557 \begin_layout Itemize
8558 Fully nestable, you can nest them inside things and you can also nest other
8562 \begin_layout Itemize
8563 A third type, you can nest them into other environments, but you can't nest
8567 \begin_layout Standard
8568 Here's a list of the three types of nesting behavior, and which paragraph
8569 environments have them:
8572 \begin_layout Description
8573 Unnestable Can't nest them.
8574 Can't nest into them.
8578 \begin_layout Itemize
8584 \begin_layout Itemize
8590 \begin_layout Itemize
8596 \begin_layout Itemize
8602 \begin_layout Itemize
8609 \begin_layout Description
8611 \begin_inset space ~
8614 Nestable You can nest them.
8615 You can nest other things into them.
8619 \begin_layout Itemize
8625 \begin_layout Itemize
8631 \begin_layout Itemize
8637 \begin_layout Itemize
8643 \begin_layout Itemize
8649 \begin_layout Itemize
8655 \begin_layout Itemize
8661 \begin_layout Itemize
8668 \begin_layout Itemize
8674 \begin_layout Itemize
8681 \begin_layout Description
8682 Nestable-Inside You can nest them inside other things.
8683 You can't nest anything into them.
8687 \begin_layout Itemize
8693 \begin_layout Itemize
8699 \begin_layout Itemize
8705 \begin_layout Itemize
8711 \begin_layout Itemize
8717 \begin_layout Itemize
8723 \begin_layout Itemize
8729 \begin_layout Itemize
8735 \begin_layout Itemize
8741 \begin_layout Itemize
8747 \begin_layout Itemize
8753 \begin_layout Itemize
8759 \begin_layout Itemize
8765 \begin_layout Itemize
8769 \begin_inset space ~
8775 \begin_layout Itemize
8782 \begin_layout Standard
8783 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8791 Although it is possible, for example, to nest numbered section headings
8801 \begin_inset space ~
8804 into lists, it is highly recommended not to do this because the aim is to
8805 create well-structured documents following typesetting guidelines whereas
8806 nested section headings violate this.
8814 \begin_layout Subsection
8815 Nesting Other Things: Tables, Math, Floats, etc.
8816 \begin_inset Index idx
8819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8820 Nesting ! Tables etc.
8828 \begin_layout Standard
8829 There are several things that aren't paragraph environments, but which are
8830 affected by nesting anyhow.
8834 \begin_layout Itemize
8838 \begin_layout Itemize
8842 \begin_layout Itemize
8846 \begin_layout Standard
8848 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8856 Figures and tables in
8860 are not affected by this.
8865 Have a look at section
8866 \begin_inset space ~
8870 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8872 reference "sec:Floats"
8876 for more information about
8883 \begin_layout Standard
8885 can treat these three objects as either a word or as a paragraph.
8886 If a figure, table, or an equation is inline, it goes wherever the paragraph
8890 \begin_layout Standard
8891 On the other hand, if you have an equation, figure or table in a
8892 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8896 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8899 of its own, it behaves just like a
8900 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8904 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8907 paragraph environment.
8908 You can nest it into any environment, but you obviously can't nest anything
8912 \begin_layout Standard
8913 Here's an example with a table:
8916 \begin_layout Enumerate
8921 \begin_layout Enumerate
8922 This is (a) and it's nested.
8926 \begin_layout Standard
8927 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8933 \begin_layout Standard
8935 \begin_inset Tabular
8936 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
8937 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
8938 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8939 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8941 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8959 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8979 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8997 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9023 \begin_layout Standard
9024 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9031 \begin_layout Enumerate
9033 The table is actually nested inside (a).
9037 \begin_layout Enumerate
9041 \begin_layout Standard
9042 If we hadn't nested the table at all, the list would look like this:
9045 \begin_layout Enumerate
9050 \begin_layout Enumerate
9051 This is (a) and it's nested.
9055 \begin_layout Standard
9056 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9062 \begin_layout Standard
9064 \begin_inset Tabular
9065 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9066 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9067 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9068 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9070 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9088 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9108 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9126 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9129 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9152 \begin_layout Standard
9153 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9159 \begin_layout Enumerate
9166 In fact, it's not nested at all.
9169 \begin_layout Enumerate
9173 \begin_layout Standard
9174 Notice how item (b) is not only no longer nested, but is also the first
9178 \begin_layout Standard
9179 There's another trap you can fall into: Nesting the table, but not going
9182 then turns anything after the table into a new sublist.
9185 \begin_layout Enumerate
9190 \begin_layout Enumerate
9191 This is (a) and it's nested.
9194 \begin_layout Standard
9195 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9201 \begin_layout Standard
9203 \begin_inset Tabular
9204 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9205 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9206 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9207 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9209 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9227 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9247 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9250 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9265 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9292 \begin_layout Standard
9293 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9299 \begin_layout Enumerate
9301 The table is actually nested inside Item One, but
9308 \begin_layout Enumerate
9312 \begin_layout Standard
9313 As you can see, item (b) turned into the first item of a new list, but a
9319 The same thing would have happened to a figure or an equation.
9320 So, if you nest tables, figures or equations, make sure you go to the right
9324 \begin_layout Subsection
9325 Usage and General Features
9328 \begin_layout Standard
9329 Speaking of levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9330 can perform up to a six-fold nesting.
9332 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9336 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9339 is the innermost possible depth.
9340 Here's an example to illustrate what we mean:
9343 \begin_layout Enumerate
9344 level #1 – outermost
9348 \begin_layout Enumerate
9353 \begin_layout Enumerate
9358 \begin_layout Enumerate
9363 \begin_layout Itemize
9368 \begin_layout Itemize
9377 \begin_layout Standard
9378 There are two exceptions to the six-fold nesting limit, and you can see
9379 both of them in the example.
9380 Unlike the other fully-nestable environments, you can only perform a four-fold
9390 For example, if we tried to nest another
9395 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9399 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9402 , we would get errors.
9405 \begin_layout Subsection
9407 \begin_inset Index idx
9410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9419 \begin_layout Standard
9420 The best way to explain just what you can do with nesting is by illustration.
9421 We have several examples of nested environments.
9422 In them, we explain how we created the example, so that you can reproduce
9426 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9427 Example 1: The Six-fold Way and Mixed Nesting
9430 \begin_layout Labeling
9431 \labelwidthstring MMM
9432 #1-a This is the outermost level.
9441 \begin_layout Labeling
9442 \labelwidthstring MMM
9443 #2-a This is level #2.
9444 We created it by using
9447 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9453 arg "depth-increment"
9460 \begin_layout Labeling
9461 \labelwidthstring MMM
9462 #3-a This is level #3.
9463 This time, we just enter
9470 arg "depth-increment"
9474 We could have also created it the same way as we did the previous level,
9478 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9484 arg "depth-increment"
9491 \begin_layout Standard
9496 environment, nested inside of
9497 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9501 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9505 So, it's at level #4.
9506 We did this by entering
9509 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9515 arg "depth-increment"
9518 , then changing the paragraph environment to
9523 Do this to create list items with more than one paragraph — it also works
9539 \begin_layout Standard
9544 paragraph, also at level #4, made with just a
9547 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9553 \begin_layout Labeling
9554 \labelwidthstring MMM
9555 #4-a This is level #4.
9559 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9562 and changed the paragraph environment back to
9567 Remember — we can't nest anything inside a
9571 environment, which is why we're still at level #4.
9576 keep nesting things inside
9577 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9581 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9588 \begin_layout Labeling
9589 \labelwidthstring MMM
9590 #5-a This is level #5\SpecialChar ldots
9595 \begin_layout Labeling
9596 \labelwidthstring MMM
9597 #6-a \SpecialChar ldots
9598 and this is level #6.
9599 By now, you should know how we made these two.
9603 \begin_layout Labeling
9604 \labelwidthstring MMM
9605 #5-b Back to level #5.
9609 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9615 arg "depth-decrement"
9622 \begin_layout Labeling
9623 \labelwidthstring MMM
9627 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9633 arg "depth-decrement"
9636 , we're back at level #4.
9640 \begin_layout Labeling
9641 \labelwidthstring MMM
9642 #3-b Back to level #3.
9643 By now it should be obvious how we did this.
9647 \begin_layout Labeling
9648 \labelwidthstring MMM
9649 #2-b Back to level #2.
9654 \begin_layout Labeling
9655 \labelwidthstring MMM
9656 #1-b And last, back to the outermost level, #1.
9657 After this sentence, we will enter
9661 and change the paragraph environment back to
9668 \begin_layout Standard
9669 We could have also used the
9685 environment in place of the
9690 The example would have worked exactly the same.
9693 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9694 Example 2: Inheritance
9697 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9698 This is the LyX-Code environment, at level #1, the outermost
9701 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9710 arg "depth-increment"
9714 \begin_inset Newline newline
9717 which, we will change to the
9725 \begin_layout Enumerate
9730 environment, at level #2.
9733 \begin_layout Enumerate
9734 Notice how the nested
9738 not only inherits its margins from its parent environment (
9742 ), but also inherits its font and spacing!
9746 \begin_layout Standard
9747 We ended this example by entering
9752 After that, we needed to reset the paragraph environment to
9756 and reset the nesting depth by using
9759 arg "depth-decrement"
9765 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9766 Example 3: Labels, Levels, and the
9775 \begin_inset Argument 1
9778 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9779 Example #3: Labels, Levels and other list environments
9787 \begin_layout Enumerate
9788 This is level #1, in an
9792 paragraph environment.
9793 We're actually going to nest a bunch of these.
9797 \begin_layout Enumerate
9802 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9808 arg "depth-increment"
9812 Now, what happens if we nest an
9816 environment inside of this one? It will be at level #3, but what will its
9817 label be? An asterisk?
9821 \begin_layout Itemize
9831 environment, even though it's at level #3.
9832 So, its label is a bullet.
9833 (We got here by using
9836 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9842 arg "depth-increment"
9845 , then changing the environment to
9853 \begin_layout Itemize
9854 Here's level #4, produced using
9857 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9863 arg "depth-increment"
9867 We will do that again\SpecialChar ldots
9872 \begin_layout Enumerate
9875 This time, however, we also changed the paragraph environment back to
9880 Notice the type of numbering, it is
9884 , because we are in the
9892 environment (that is, it is an
9907 \begin_layout Enumerate
9912 change the paragraph environment, but decrease the nesting depth? What
9913 type of numbering does \SpecialChar LyX
9917 \begin_layout Enumerate
9918 Oh, as if you couldn't guess by now, we're just using
9921 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9924 to keep the current environment and depth but create a new item.
9927 \begin_layout Enumerate
9931 arg "depth-decrement"
9934 to decrease the depth after the next
9937 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9944 \begin_layout Enumerate
9946 Look what type of label \SpecialChar LyX
9951 \begin_layout Enumerate
9953 Even though we've changed levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9954 is still using a lowercase Roman numeral
9958 \begin_layout Enumerate
9959 Because, even though the nesting depth has changed, the paragraph is
9968 Notice, however, that \SpecialChar LyX
9973 reset the counter for the label.
9977 \begin_layout Enumerate
9981 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9987 arg "depth-decrement"
9990 sequence, and we're back to level #2.
9991 This time, we not only changed the nesting depth, but we also moved back
9992 into the twofold-nested
10000 \begin_layout Enumerate
10001 The same thing happens if we do another
10004 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10010 arg "depth-decrement"
10013 sequence and return to level #1, the outermost level.
10016 \begin_layout Standard
10017 Lastly, we reset the environment to
10022 As you can see, the level number doesn't correspond to what type of labeling
10033 The number of other
10037 environments surrounding it determines what kind of label \SpecialChar LyX
10044 The same rule applies for the
10048 environment, as well.
10051 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10052 Example 4: Going Bonkers
10055 \begin_layout Enumerate
10056 We're going to go totally nuts now.
10057 We will not nest as deep as in the other examples, nor will we go into
10058 the same detail with how we did it.
10067 \begin_layout Standard
10075 arg "depth-increment"
10082 : level #2) We will stick an encapsulated description of how we created
10083 the example in parentheses someplace.
10084 For example, the two key bindings are how we changed the depth.
10085 The environment name is the name of the current environment.
10086 Either before or after this, we will put in the level.
10090 \begin_layout Enumerate
10095 : level #1) This is the next item in the list.
10099 \begin_layout Verse
10100 Now we will add verse.
10101 \begin_inset Newline newline
10104 It will get much worse.
10105 \begin_inset Newline newline
10115 arg "depth-increment"
10125 \begin_layout Verse
10126 Fiddle dee, Fiddle doo.
10127 \begin_inset Newline newline
10130 Bippitey boppitey boo!
10131 \begin_inset Newline newline
10137 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10145 \begin_layout Verse
10146 Here comes a table:
10150 \begin_layout Standard
10151 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
10157 \begin_layout Standard
10159 \begin_inset Tabular
10160 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
10161 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
10162 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10163 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10165 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
10168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10183 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10203 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
10206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10221 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10248 \begin_layout Verse
10252 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10262 arg "depth-increment"
10268 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10274 \begin_inset Newline newline
10282 arg "depth-decrement"
10289 \begin_layout Enumerate
10294 : level #1) This is another item.
10295 Note that selecting a
10299 resets the nesting depth to level #1, so we increased the nesting depth
10300 3 times to put the table inside the
10308 \begin_layout Quotation
10309 We're now ending the
10313 list and changing to
10318 We're still at level #1.
10319 We want to show you some of the things you can do by mixing environments.
10320 The next set of paragraphs is a
10321 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10325 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10328 We will nest both the
10335 \begin_inset space ~
10340 environments inside of this one, then use another nested
10344 for the letter body.
10348 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10351 to preserve the depth.
10352 Remember that you need to use
10355 arg "newline-insert newline"
10358 to create multiple lines inside the
10365 \begin_inset space ~
10375 \begin_layout Right Address
10377 \begin_inset Newline newline
10380 Moosegroin, MT 00100
10381 \begin_inset Newline newline
10387 \begin_layout Address
10389 \begin_inset space ~
10395 \begin_layout Quotation
10396 We regret to inform you that we cannot fill your order for 50
10397 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10400 L of compressed methane gas due to circumstances beyond our control.
10401 Unfortunately, several of our cows have mysteriously exploded, creating
10402 a backlog in our orders for methane.
10403 We will place your name on the waiting list and try to fill your order
10404 as soon as possible.
10405 In the meantime, we thank you for your patience.
10408 \begin_layout Quotation
10409 We do, however, now have a special on beef.
10410 If you are interested, please return the enclosed pricing and order form
10411 with your order, along with payment.
10414 \begin_layout Quotation
10415 We thank you again for your patience.
10418 \begin_layout Address
10420 \begin_inset Newline newline
10427 \begin_layout Quotation
10428 That ends that example!
10431 \begin_layout Standard
10432 As you can see, nesting environments in \SpecialChar LyX
10433 gives you a lot of power with just
10435 We could have easily nested an
10456 You have a huge variety of options at your disposal.
10459 \begin_layout Subsection
10461 \begin_inset Index idx
10464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10465 Nesting ! Separation
10471 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10473 name "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
10480 \begin_layout Standard
10481 It is sometimes necessary to have two consecutive environments of the same
10483 For example you need two different enumerations:
10486 \begin_layout Enumerate
10491 \begin_layout Enumerate
10496 \begin_layout Enumerate
10500 \begin_layout Standard
10501 \begin_inset Separator plain
10507 \begin_layout Itemize
10513 \begin_layout Standard
10514 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
10520 \begin_layout Enumerate
10524 \begin_layout Enumerate
10528 \begin_layout Enumerate
10532 \begin_layout Standard
10533 To split an existing list into two lists, set the cursor at the end of a
10534 list item and use the menu
10536 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
10537 Start New Environment
10540 This inserts a plain separator (red line in \SpecialChar LyX
10541 ) and behind it the new list.
10544 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
10545 Start New Parent Environment
10547 only appears if the item is nested.
10548 It does not only separate the list but also creates a new one outside the
10552 \begin_layout Standard
10553 By right-clicking on a separator one can change it into a paragraph separator
10554 (red arrow in LyX).
10555 The difference between both separator types is that the plain separator
10556 only splits the list and not the current paragraph.
10559 \begin_layout Standard
10560 In general, you get an environment separator when you press
10563 arg "paragraph-break"
10570 environment immediately after a non-Standard one.
10573 \begin_layout Section
10574 Spacing, pagination and line breaks
10575 \begin_inset Index idx
10578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10587 \begin_layout Standard
10588 What is a space? While you might be used to pressing the space key anytime
10589 you want to separate two words in ordinary word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
10591 more spaces: spaces of different widths and spaces which can or cannot
10592 be broken at the end of a line.
10593 The following sections will show you some examples where those spaces are
10597 \begin_layout Subsection
10599 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10601 name "subsec:Protected-Space"
10606 \begin_inset Index idx
10609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10618 \begin_layout Standard
10619 The protected space: It is used to tell \SpecialChar LyX
10620 (and \SpecialChar LaTeX
10621 ) not to break the line at
10623 This may be necessary to avoid unlucky line breaks, like in:
10626 \begin_layout Quote
10627 Further documentation is given in section
10628 \begin_inset Newline newline
10632 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10634 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10642 \begin_layout Standard
10643 Obviously, it would be a good thing to put a protected space between
10644 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10648 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10652 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10656 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10658 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10663 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10667 A protected space is set with
10669 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10670 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10672 \begin_inset space ~
10680 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
10686 \begin_layout Subsection
10688 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10690 name "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
10695 \begin_inset Index idx
10698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10699 Spacing ! Horizontal
10707 \begin_layout Standard
10708 All horizontal spaces can be inserted with the menu
10710 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10711 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10715 The length units are listed in Appendix
10716 \begin_inset space ~
10720 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10722 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
10729 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10731 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10733 name "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
10738 \begin_inset Index idx
10741 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10742 Spaces ! Inter-word
10750 \begin_layout Standard
10751 With the introduction of typewriters, it became conventional in some countries
10752 to type two spaces after a period to mimic the wider spaces used by typesetters
10753 at the ends of sentences.
10754 There is no need to do this as \SpecialChar LyX
10755 automatically takes care about this.
10756 However, you do not want an end of sentence space after an abbreviation
10757 followed by a period; see section
10758 \begin_inset space ~
10762 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10764 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
10769 To insert a normal space, select
10771 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10772 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10774 \begin_inset space ~
10782 arg "space-insert normal"
10788 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10790 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10792 name "subsec:Thin-Space"
10797 \begin_inset Index idx
10800 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10809 \begin_layout Standard
10811 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10815 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10818 is a blank which has half the size of a normal space (and it is also
10819 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10823 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10827 The typographical conventions in a lot of languages propose the use of
10828 thin spaces in cases where normal spaces would be too wide, for instance,
10829 inside abbreviations:
10832 \begin_layout Quote
10834 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10838 Knuth has developed our beloved typesetting program.
10841 \begin_layout Standard
10842 or between values and units.
10843 Compare for example this:
10844 \begin_inset Newline newline
10848 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10852 \begin_inset Newline newline
10855 10 kg (normal space
10858 \begin_layout Standard
10859 You can insert thin spaces with the menu
10861 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10862 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10864 \begin_inset space ~
10872 arg "space-insert thin"
10878 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10882 \begin_layout Standard
10883 You can also insert the following space types:
10886 \begin_layout Description
10888 \begin_inset space ~
10892 \begin_inset space ~
10895 space A line with a
10896 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10900 \begin_inset space \negthinspace{}
10904 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10907 negative thin space between the arrows.
10910 \begin_layout Description
10912 \begin_inset space ~
10916 \begin_inset space ~
10919 space A line with a
10920 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10924 \begin_inset space \negmedspace{}
10928 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10931 negative medium space between the arrows.
10934 \begin_layout Description
10936 \begin_inset space ~
10940 \begin_inset space ~
10943 space A line with a
10944 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10948 \begin_inset space \negthickspace{}
10952 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10955 negative thick space between the arrows.
10958 \begin_layout Description
10960 \begin_inset space ~
10964 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10968 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10972 \begin_inset space \enskip{}
10976 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10980 \begin_inset space ~
10984 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10987 em) space between the arrows.
10990 \begin_layout Description
10992 \begin_inset space ~
10996 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11000 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11004 \begin_inset space \quad{}
11008 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11012 \begin_inset space ~
11016 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11019 em) space between the arrows.
11022 \begin_layout Description
11024 \begin_inset space ~
11028 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11032 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11036 \begin_inset space \qquad{}
11040 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11044 \begin_inset space ~
11048 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11051 em) space between the arrows.
11054 \begin_layout Description
11056 \begin_inset space ~
11060 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11064 \begin_inset space \hspace{}
11069 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11073 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11076 cm space between the arrows.
11079 \begin_layout Standard
11081 \begin_inset space ~
11085 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11087 reference "tab:Width-of-the"
11091 lists the different space sizes.
11094 \begin_layout Standard
11095 \begin_inset Float table
11100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11101 \begin_inset Caption Standard
11103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11104 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11106 name "tab:Width-of-the"
11110 Width of the different horizontal spaces.
11118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11120 \begin_inset Tabular
11121 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
11122 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
11123 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11124 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11126 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11129 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11137 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11150 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11159 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11164 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11174 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11183 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11188 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11198 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11207 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11212 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11222 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11231 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11236 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11240 \begin_inset Formula $\thinspace=\thinspace$
11244 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11254 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11263 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11268 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11278 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11287 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11292 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11302 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11307 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11315 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11320 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11330 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11335 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11343 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11348 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11358 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11363 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11371 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11376 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11397 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11399 \begin_inset Index idx
11402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11411 \begin_layout Standard
11412 Horizontal fills (HFills) are a special \SpecialChar LyX
11413 feature for adding extra space
11414 in a uniform fashion.
11415 An HFill is actually a variable length space, whose length always equals
11416 the remaining space between the left and right margins.
11417 If there is more than one HFill on a line, they divide the available space
11418 equally between themselves.
11421 \begin_layout Standard
11422 Here are a few examples of what you can do with them:
11425 \begin_layout Quote
11427 This is on the left side
11428 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11431 This is on the right
11434 \begin_layout Quote
11437 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11441 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11447 \begin_layout Quote
11450 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11454 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11458 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11464 \begin_layout Standard
11465 That was an example in the
11471 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11475 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11479 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11482 is one in a standard paragraph.
11483 It may or may not be apparent in the printed text, but it
11487 sitting in-between the two arrows.
11490 \begin_layout Standard
11491 HFills can be made visible when you choose one of the
11494 \begin_inset space ~
11499 s in the space dialog: The following patterns are available:
11502 \begin_layout Standard
11504 \begin_inset space \dotfill{}
11508 \begin_inset space ~
11514 \begin_layout Standard
11516 \begin_inset space \hrulefill{}
11520 \begin_inset space ~
11526 \begin_layout Standard
11528 \begin_inset space \leftarrowfill{}
11532 \begin_inset space ~
11538 \begin_layout Standard
11540 \begin_inset space \rightarrowfill{}
11544 \begin_inset space ~
11550 \begin_layout Standard
11552 \begin_inset space \downbracefill{}
11556 \begin_inset space ~
11562 \begin_layout Standard
11564 \begin_inset space \upbracefill{}
11568 \begin_inset space ~
11574 \begin_layout Standard
11575 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11583 If an HFill is at the beginning of a line, and
11587 in the first line in a paragraph, \SpecialChar LyX
11589 This prevents HFills from accidentally being wrapped onto a new line.
11590 If you need space in this case anyway, set the
11594 option in the space dialog.
11602 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11604 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11606 name "subsec:Phantom-Space"
11611 \begin_inset Index idx
11614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11623 \begin_layout Standard
11624 Sometimes you want to insert space with exactly the length of a phrase.
11625 For example, you want to create the following multiple choice question:
11628 \begin_layout Standard
11629 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11632 What is correct English?:
11633 \begin_inset Newline newline
11637 \begin_inset Newline newline
11641 \begin_inset space ~
11644 Edge would have been jumps the gun.
11645 \begin_inset Newline newline
11649 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11652 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11660 \begin_inset Newline newline
11664 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11675 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11681 \begin_layout Standard
11683 so that the choices appear exactly after the phrase
11684 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11688 \begin_inset space ~
11692 \begin_inset space ~
11696 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11700 To get this, you can use the phantom insets available via the menu
11702 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11703 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11707 In our case insert a horizontal phantom at the beginning of the last two
11709 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11713 \begin_inset space ~
11717 \begin_inset space ~
11721 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11724 into the phantom inset (note the space after
11725 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11729 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11733 A phantom insets prints only the space of its content (like a placeholder).
11734 That is why it is named
11735 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11739 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11743 The normal phantom outputs the width and height of the content as space,
11744 while the horizontal and vertical variant only outputs the corresponding
11748 \begin_layout Subsection
11750 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11752 name "subsec:Vertical-Space"
11757 \begin_inset Index idx
11760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11769 \begin_layout Standard
11770 To add extra vertical space above or below a paragraph, use the
11772 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11773 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11775 \begin_inset space ~
11781 There you find the following sizes:
11784 \begin_layout Standard
11797 are \SpecialChar LaTeX
11798 sizes which depend on the font size of the document.
11803 is the skip adjusted in the dialog
11805 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
11806 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
11808 \begin_inset space ~
11814 \begin_inset Index idx
11817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11818 Document ! Settings
11823 for the paragraph separation.
11824 If you use indentation to separate paragraphs
11835 \begin_layout Standard
11841 \begin_inset Index idx
11844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11850 is a variable space, set so that the space is maximal within one page.
11851 An example: you have only two short paragraphs on one page with a
11856 Then the first paragraph is placed at the top of the page and the second
11857 one at the bottom, because the space between them is then maximal.
11866 s: they fill the remaining vertical space on a page with blank space.
11870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11875 s are described in section
11876 \begin_inset space ~
11880 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11882 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
11891 If there are several
11895 s on a page, they divide the remaining vertical space equally between themselves.
11896 You can therefore use
11900 s to center text on a page, or even place text 2/3 down a page.
11903 \begin_layout Standard
11908 are custom spaces in units explained in Appendix
11909 \begin_inset space ~
11913 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11915 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
11922 \begin_layout Standard
11923 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11933 If the extra vertical space would be in the output at the top/bottom of
11934 a page, the space is only added if you have also checked the option
11946 \begin_layout Subsection
11947 Paragraph Alignment
11948 \begin_inset Index idx
11951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11952 Paragraph ! Alignment
11960 \begin_layout Standard
11961 You can change the paragraph alignment with the
11963 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
11966 dialog (toolbar button
11969 arg "layout-paragraph"
11973 There are five possibilities:
11976 \begin_layout Itemize
11984 arg "paragraph-params \\align block"
11990 \begin_layout Itemize
11998 arg "paragraph-params \\align left"
12004 \begin_layout Itemize
12012 arg "paragraph-params \\align right"
12018 \begin_layout Itemize
12026 arg "paragraph-params \\align center"
12032 \begin_layout Itemize
12040 arg "paragraph-params \\align default"
12046 \begin_layout Standard
12047 The default in most cases is justified alignment, in which the inter-word
12048 spacing is variable and each line of a paragraph fills the region between
12049 the left and right margins.
12050 The other three alignments should be self-explanatory, and look like this:
12053 \begin_layout Standard
12055 This paragraph is right aligned,
12058 \begin_layout Standard
12060 this one is centered,
12063 \begin_layout Standard
12065 this one is left aligned.
12068 \begin_layout Subsection
12070 \begin_inset Index idx
12073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12074 Page breaks ! Forced
12080 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12082 name "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
12089 \begin_layout Standard
12090 If you don't like the way \SpecialChar LaTeX
12091 does the page breaks in your document, you can
12092 force a page break where you want one.
12093 Normally this will not be necessary, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
12094 is good at page breaking.
12095 Only if you use a lot of
12099 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
12100 's page breaking algorithm can fail.
12103 \begin_layout Standard
12104 We recommend you not to use forced page breaks until the text is finished
12105 and you have checked in the preview to see if you
12109 have to change the page breaking.
12112 \begin_layout Standard
12113 There are two types of page breaks: One that ends the page without any special
12115 This can be inserted above or below a paragraph via the menu
12117 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12118 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12120 \begin_inset space ~
12126 The second type, that is inserted via the menu
12128 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12129 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12131 \begin_inset space ~
12136 , ends a page but stretches the content of the page, so that it fills out
12138 This type is useful to avoid whitespace when a page break produces a page
12139 on which only the last few lines are absent.
12142 \begin_layout Standard
12143 You might try to use a page break to ensure that a figure or table appears
12144 at the top of a page.
12145 This is, of course, the wrong way to do it.
12147 gives you a way of automatically ensuring that your figures and tables
12148 appear at the top of a page (or the bottom, or on their own page) without
12149 having to worry about what precedes or follows your figure or table.
12151 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12153 reference "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
12157 to learn more about
12164 \begin_layout Subsubsection
12166 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12168 name "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
12173 \begin_inset Index idx
12176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12177 Page breaks ! Clear
12185 \begin_layout Standard
12186 Rather than forced page breaks where the content behind the break is placed
12187 directly on the next page, you can also clear pages while breaking them.
12188 That means that the current paragraph is terminated and everything, including
12189 unprocessed floats, from the earlier part of the document are placed after
12190 it, if necessary by adding pages.
12193 \begin_layout Standard
12194 You can insert a clear page break with the menu
12196 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12197 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12199 \begin_inset space ~
12205 When you have a two-sided document like a book, you can use the menu
12207 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12208 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12210 \begin_inset space ~
12214 \begin_inset space ~
12219 to insert a clear page break that assures that the next page is a right-hand
12220 page (odd-numbered), if necessary by adding a page.
12223 \begin_layout Subsection
12225 \begin_inset Index idx
12228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12235 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12237 name "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
12244 \begin_layout Standard
12245 Similar to page breaks there are two types of line breaks: one simply breaks
12247 You can force this line break within a paragraph by selecting
12249 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12250 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12252 \begin_inset space ~
12256 \begin_inset space ~
12264 arg "newline-insert newline"
12268 Another type that is inserted via the menu
12270 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12271 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12273 \begin_inset space ~
12277 \begin_inset space ~
12285 arg "newline-insert linebreak"
12288 breaks the line and stretches it so that it fills out the whole space between
12290 This is useful to avoid
12291 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12295 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12298 in justified paragraphs due to possible whitespace introduced by line breaks.
12301 \begin_layout Standard
12302 You shouldn't use forced line breaks to correct \SpecialChar LaTeX
12303 's line breaking, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
12305 very good at line breaking.
12306 There are, however, a number of situations where it is necessary to set
12307 a line break actively, for example, in a poem or for an address (see sections
12308 \begin_inset space ~
12312 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12314 reference "sec:Quote"
12319 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12321 reference "sec:Verse"
12326 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12328 reference "sec:Address-Usage"
12335 \begin_layout Subsection
12337 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12339 name "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
12344 \begin_inset Index idx
12347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12356 \begin_layout Standard
12358 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12369 \begin_layout Standard
12373 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12374 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12376 \begin_inset space ~
12381 you can insert horizontal lines.
12382 The line offset is the vertical distance between the line and the baseline
12383 of the current text line or the paragraph.
12384 The line settings can be changed by left-clicking on the line.
12387 \begin_layout Standard
12389 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12400 \begin_layout Section
12401 Characters and Symbols
12404 \begin_layout Standard
12405 You can directly enter all characters that are available on your keyboard.
12406 You can also use special keyboard maps to be able to enter, for example,
12407 characters needed for French with an English keyboard.
12409 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12413 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12415 reference "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
12419 for information on how this is done.
12422 \begin_layout Standard
12423 For the case where you need a character that is not on your keyboard, you
12428 dialog via the menu
12430 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12431 Special Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
12437 \begin_layout Standard
12438 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12446 Maybe not all symbols inserted with the symbols dialog can be displayed
12447 when you are using a special screen font in \SpecialChar LyX
12449 But the inserted symbols will in every case be displayed in the output.
12457 \begin_layout Section
12458 Fonts and Text Styles
12459 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12461 name "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
12468 \begin_layout Subsection
12470 \begin_inset Index idx
12473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12482 \begin_layout Standard
12483 There are two types of fonts:
12486 \begin_layout Description
12488 \begin_inset space ~
12492 \begin_inset Index idx
12495 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12501 are built from outlines of the single glyphs (e.
12502 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12506 characters) in the font.
12507 This means that each glyph is defined using mathematical curves that are
12508 well suited for scaling to any requested size.
12509 This mathematical definition is interpreted by the font renderer and the
12510 curve is filled out with pixels according to the size and glyph.
12511 This means that vector fonts will look pretty good in all sizes.
12512 Only at very small sizes where each pixel has to be very carefully computed
12513 to provide a good image might it be hard to provide a good rendering.
12514 \begin_inset Newline newline
12517 That could mean that one only needs to define one font size and scale them.
12518 But to achieve a better quality, many fonts define several font sizes.
12519 That improves the appearance because you need more details at large font
12520 sizes than at small ones.
12521 \begin_inset Newline newline
12535 \begin_inset space ~
12543 \begin_layout Description
12545 \begin_inset space ~
12549 \begin_inset Index idx
12552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12558 on the other hand, are defined by bitmap graphics from the start; so they
12559 will look good at all the sizes they are meant for.
12560 However, they don't scale well, because in order to scale a glyph, each
12561 pixel is enlarged into several pixels.
12562 It is the same effect that happens if you try to enlarge a picture in an
12563 image manipulation program.
12564 In order to mitigate this effect, bitmap fonts are typically provided in
12565 several fixed sizes typically from around 8
12566 \begin_inset space ~
12569 pixels high up to 34
12570 \begin_inset space ~
12573 pixels or so high in steps according to what is believed to be useful.
12574 The advantage of bitmap fonts is that no complicated computations are necessary
12575 to display each glyph; so bitmap fonts display therefore more quickly than
12577 The disadvantage is that sizes that don't exist as fixed versions have
12578 to be scaled by doubling pixels, and thus look bad.
12579 \begin_inset Newline newline
12582 Bitmap fonts are named
12585 \begin_inset space ~
12590 in PostScript- and PDF-documents.
12593 \begin_layout Standard
12594 The result of all this is that bitmap fonts are best for the size they are
12595 designed for, while scalable fonts are good for nearly all sizes.
12596 So one needs fewer font size definitions for scalable fonts.
12597 That's the reason why nearly all text rendering and typesetting programs
12598 use scalable fonts.
12601 \begin_layout Standard
12602 To see which fonts are used in a PDF-document, look at its document properties.
12605 \begin_layout Standard
12606 Many modern typesetting and markup languages have begun to move towards
12607 specifying character styles rather than specifying a particular font.
12608 For example, instead of changing to an italicized version of the current
12609 font to emphasize text, you use an
12610 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12614 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12618 This concept fits in perfectly with \SpecialChar LyX
12620 In \SpecialChar LyX
12621 , you do things based on contexts, rather than focusing on typesetting
12625 \begin_layout Subsection
12628 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12630 name "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
12637 \begin_layout Standard
12638 Traditionally, \SpecialChar LaTeX
12639 used its own fonts.
12640 That is to say, you cannot directly access the fonts installed on your
12641 operating system, but you have to use specific fonts provided by your \SpecialChar LaTeX
12644 The reason is that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12645 needs some extra information about the fonts, which
12646 have to be provided by additional files and packages.
12647 The downside of this is that your font choice is somewhat limited compared
12648 to a word processor.
12649 On the other hand this comes with the advantage that the provided fonts
12650 are generally of very good quality, and that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12651 files are very portable across
12652 different machines.
12653 Also, the range of fonts supported by traditional \SpecialChar LaTeX
12654 has increased a lot
12655 in the meantime; so you can find packages for many free and commercial
12658 supports the fonts that are under a free license via the user interface
12660 \begin_inset space ~
12664 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12666 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
12671 Other fonts are available if you enter the relevant \SpecialChar LaTeX
12672 code in the document
12673 preamble (please refer to the documentation of your desired font).
12676 \begin_layout Standard
12677 Recent developments brought some new \SpecialChar LaTeX
12678 engines that are also able directly
12679 to access fonts that are installed for your operating system, namely Xe\SpecialChar TeX
12681 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12683 Both engines are supported by \SpecialChar LyX
12685 By using them, you can theoretically use any OpenType or TrueType font
12686 that is installed on your system.
12687 The next section describes how to use these fonts.
12690 \begin_layout Standard
12691 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12699 In practice, some fonts might fail due to a legacy (non Unicode) font encoding,
12700 bad metrics, and other font deficiencies; so you might have to experiment.
12708 \begin_layout Subsection
12709 Document Font and Font size
12710 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12712 name "subsec:Document-Font"
12717 \begin_inset Index idx
12720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12727 \begin_inset Index idx
12730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12739 \begin_layout Standard
12740 You can set the document fonts in the
12742 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
12746 \begin_inset Index idx
12749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12750 Document ! Settings
12760 section of the dialog, you can specify which font should be used for the
12761 three different font shapes — roman (serif),
12764 \begin_inset space ~
12773 (monospaced) — and you can specify the base font size and scaling factors
12775 \begin_inset space ~
12778 serif and typewriter fonts if this is necessary to fit with the roman font.
12781 \begin_layout Standard
12786 , you will have access to the fonts installed on your operating system.
12787 This requires that you use
12799 as the output format, i.
12800 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12804 \begin_inset space \space{}
12807 you will have to have either Xe\SpecialChar TeX
12808 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12809 installed (see section
12810 \begin_inset space ~
12814 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12816 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
12821 You will then not have access to \SpecialChar TeX
12823 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
12824 then lists all available fonts in each of the three lists (roman,
12826 \begin_inset space ~
12829 serif, and typewriter), since \SpecialChar LyX
12830 cannot determine the family.
12831 Also note that the output might fail with some of the listed fonts, due
12832 to the encoding of the fonts and\SpecialChar breakableslash
12835 cannot determine this in advance, so you might need to experiment.
12838 \begin_layout Standard
12839 If you use \SpecialChar TeX
12840 fonts (which is the default), the possible options for the font
12845 and a list of fonts available with your \SpecialChar LaTeX
12851 the font that is preset by the current document class is used.
12852 With LyX's default font encoding, this is a look-alike of the standard
12855 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12861 \begin_inset space ~
12867 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12875 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12883 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12887 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12892 European Computer Modern
12895 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12903 However, some classes set different default fonts.
12906 \begin_layout Standard
12911 is a bitmap font, it looks pixelated in PDF output, especially when you
12912 read the PDF in a zoomed size.
12916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12917 This problem is less severe if you read PDFs in
12920 \begin_inset space ~
12925 version 6 or later, because this program includes a special bitmap font
12931 To get rid of pixelated fonts, you have to use a vector font.
12932 Depending on how your document should look, you can either:
12935 \begin_layout Itemize
12939 \begin_inset space ~
12944 fonts, which is the recommended choice if you want to keep the look of
12957 \begin_inset space ~
12962 was developed for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
12963 community in order to replace
12967 as the default font.
12968 It covers a huge range of glyphs and several font shapes.
12969 Except for some details, where the appearance was improved,
12972 \begin_inset space ~
12985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12986 One difference is improved kerning.
12994 \begin_layout Itemize
12995 If you do not like the look of
13003 , you can of course select one of the other vector fonts provided, e.
13004 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13008 \begin_inset space ~
13014 \begin_inset space ~
13024 Most roman vector fonts will automatically select matching sans
13025 \begin_inset space ~
13028 serif and typewriter fonts,
13032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13033 These are sometimes just matching other fonts (e.
13034 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13040 \begin_inset space ~
13049 for sans serif text), or different shapes of the same font, i.
13050 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13054 \begin_inset space \space{}
13062 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13066 \begin_inset space \space{}
13072 \begin_inset space ~
13080 \begin_inset space ~
13090 but you can also select your own.
13091 \begin_inset Newline newline
13094 The differences between roman,
13097 \begin_inset space ~
13106 fonts are explained in section
13107 \begin_inset space ~
13111 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13113 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13118 \begin_inset Newline newline
13124 \begin_inset space ~
13129 was originally designed for newspapers.
13130 Its glyphs are thus smaller than glyphs from other fonts in order to fit
13131 into the small newspaper columns.
13135 \begin_inset space ~
13140 is not the optimal choice for larger documents like books.
13143 \begin_layout Standard
13144 For the font size there are generally four possible values:
13157 Some classes provide additional sizes.
13162 depends on the class you are using.
13163 In the standard classes it is equal to the font size 10.
13166 \begin_layout Standard
13167 Note that the font size is the
13172 That means that \SpecialChar LyX
13173 scales all other possible font sizes (such as those used
13174 in footnotes, super-, and subscripts) by this value.
13175 You can fine-tune the font size of text parts via the
13178 \begin_inset space ~
13184 The possible font sizes for text parts are explained in section
13185 \begin_inset space ~
13189 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13191 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13198 \begin_layout Standard
13202 \begin_inset space ~
13207 selection lets you specify whether the base font of your document should
13209 \begin_inset space ~
13212 serif or typewriter.
13217 selection uses what is preset by the class, the other selections override
13227 , but some classes (such as presentation classes) use other defaults.
13230 \begin_layout Standard
13235 LaTeX font encoding
13237 selection is an expert setting which lets you change the value passed to
13238 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13244 \begin_inset Index idx
13247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13255 \begin_inset space ~
13259 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13261 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
13266 Normally, you do not need to change (or even understand) this.
13267 Unless you have specific reasons, use
13274 \begin_layout Standard
13275 With some fonts, the checkboxes
13277 Use Old Style Figures
13281 Use True Small Caps
13284 These are extra features some fonts provide.
13287 Use Old Style Figures
13289 is checked, old style figures (also known as medieval or text figures)
13291 Old style figures are the numerals (0
13292 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13296 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13299 9) with ascenders and descenders, which makes them fit nicely with lowercase
13303 Use True Small Caps
13305 determines that real small caps are used instead of faked small caps made
13306 of scaled capitals.
13307 Real small caps are often part of expert font sets; they generally look
13308 better than faked small caps but might have to be purchased separately.
13311 \begin_layout Standard
13316 allows users of the languages Chinese, Japanese, Korean (CJK) to specify
13317 a font to display the script characters.
13321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13322 The font will be the argument for the commands of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13328 \begin_inset Index idx
13331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13338 So this has no effect for the document language
13352 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
13356 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
13359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13364 When you choose a new font or font size, \SpecialChar LyX
13369 change the screen font! You will only see a difference in the printed output;
13370 this is part of the WYSIWYM concept.
13372 's screen fonts can be adjusted in the
13374 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
13377 dialog, see section
13378 \begin_inset space ~
13382 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13384 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
13396 \begin_layout Subsection
13400 \begin_layout Standard
13401 In \SpecialChar LaTeX
13402 the font used for characters in equations is different from the document
13404 For the case that you use \SpecialChar TeX
13405 fonts for your document, you can explicitly
13406 choose a math font in the dialog
13408 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
13412 \begin_inset Index idx
13415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13416 Document ! Settings
13422 The default setting is that \SpecialChar LyX
13423 automatically selects a math font.
13424 For most cases this will be \SpecialChar LaTeX
13425 's default – the math variant of \SpecialChar LaTeX
13428 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13434 \begin_inset space ~
13440 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13445 will automatically only load another math font if a math variant of the
13446 document font is available.
13449 \begin_layout Standard
13450 Note that the math font will not be used for
13454 (which is inserted with the shortcut
13460 or by the insertion of the command
13467 Also note that some math fonts are sans
13468 \begin_inset space ~
13472 Your document might therefore look strange when the document text has serifs
13473 while the math characters do not.
13475 \begin_inset space ~
13478 serif math fonts make therefore in most cases only sense if you select
13481 \begin_inset space ~
13489 \begin_inset space ~
13494 in the document font settings.
13497 \begin_layout Standard
13498 If you use non-\SpecialChar TeX
13499 fonts for the document, you can only choose for math to
13500 use either the document's class default \SpecialChar TeX
13501 font (in most cases
13502 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13508 \begin_inset space ~
13514 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13517 ) or to use the non-\SpecialChar TeX
13518 variant of the document's class default font (in most
13520 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13526 \begin_inset space ~
13532 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13538 \begin_layout Subsection
13539 Using Different Character Styles
13540 \begin_inset Index idx
13543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13550 \begin_inset Index idx
13553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13562 \begin_layout Standard
13563 As we've already seen, \SpecialChar LyX
13564 automatically changes the character style for certain
13565 paragraph environments.
13567 supports two character styles,
13576 You can activate both of these styles via key bindings, the menus, and
13580 \begin_layout Standard
13585 style, do one of the following:
13588 \begin_layout Itemize
13589 click on the toolbar button
13598 \begin_layout Itemize
13599 use the key binding
13608 \begin_layout Standard
13609 These commands are all toggles.
13614 style is already active, they deactivate it.
13617 \begin_layout Standard
13618 One typically uses the
13622 style for proper names.
13624 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13631 is the original author of \SpecialChar LyX
13633 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13639 \begin_layout Standard
13640 A more widely used character style is the
13645 You can activate (or deactivate — it's also a toggle) the
13652 \begin_layout Itemize
13653 clicking on the toolbar button
13662 \begin_layout Itemize
13663 using the keybindings
13672 \begin_layout Standard
13677 style is equivalent to an italic font but some document classes or \SpecialChar LaTeX
13679 use a different font.
13682 \begin_layout Standard
13683 We've been using the
13687 style all over the place in this document.
13688 Here's one more example:
13691 \begin_layout Quotation
13694 Do not overuse character styles!
13697 \begin_layout Standard
13698 It's also a warning in addition to an example.
13699 One's writing should parallel ordinary conversation.
13700 Since we don't all constantly scream at each other, we should also avoid
13701 the common tendency to overuse character styles.
13705 \begin_layout Standard
13706 You can always reset to the default font using the key binding
13714 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
13716 \begin_inset space ~
13719 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
13725 arg "dialog-show character"
13731 \begin_layout Subsection
13732 Fine-Tuning with the
13737 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13739 name "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13744 \begin_inset Index idx
13747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13756 \begin_layout Standard
13757 There are always occasions when you will need to do some fine-tuning; so
13759 gives you a way to create a custom character style.
13760 For example, an academic journal or a corporation may have a style sheet
13761 requiring a sans-serif font be used in certain situations.
13762 Also, writers sometimes use a different font to offset a character's thoughts
13763 from ordinary dialog.
13766 \begin_layout Standard
13767 Before we document how to use custom character style, we want to issue a
13768 warning yet again: Don't overuse character styles!
13769 \begin_inset Newline newline
13772 Documents that overuse different fonts and sizes are not easy to read and
13773 tend to look as if someone has knocked huge holes in them.
13776 \begin_layout Standard
13777 To use custom character styles, open the
13779 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
13781 \begin_inset space ~
13784 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
13787 dialog or press the toolbar button
13790 arg "dialog-show character"
13794 There are several boxes in this dialog, each corresponding to a different
13795 font property that you can choose.
13796 You can choose an option for one of these properties, or select
13799 \begin_inset space ~
13804 , which keeps the current state of that property.
13809 will reset the property to whatever is the default.
13810 You can use this to reset attributes across a bunch of different paragraph
13811 environments all at once.
13814 \begin_layout Standard
13815 The font properties, and their options (in addition to
13818 \begin_inset space ~
13830 \begin_layout Labeling
13831 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13837 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13841 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13845 The possible options are:
13849 \begin_layout Labeling
13850 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13855 This is the Roman font family.
13856 Normally a serif font.
13857 It's also the default family.
13867 \begin_layout Labeling
13868 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13872 \begin_inset space ~
13879 This is the Sans Serif font family.
13891 \begin_layout Labeling
13892 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13899 This is the Typewriter font family.
13905 arg "font-typewriter"
13914 \begin_layout Labeling
13915 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13920 This corresponds to the print weight.
13925 \begin_layout Labeling
13926 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13931 This is the Medium font series.
13932 It's also the default series.
13935 \begin_layout Labeling
13936 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13943 This is the Bold font series.
13956 \begin_layout Labeling
13957 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13962 As the name implies.
13967 \begin_layout Labeling
13968 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13973 This is the Upright font shape.
13974 It's also the default shape.
13977 \begin_layout Labeling
13978 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13992 s the Italic font shape
13998 \begin_layout Labeling
13999 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14006 This is the Slanted font shape
14008 (although it might not be visible in \SpecialChar LyX
14009 , this is different from italic).
14012 \begin_layout Labeling
14013 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14017 \begin_inset space ~
14024 This is the Small caps font shape
14031 \begin_layout Labeling
14032 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14037 Alters the text color.
14038 Note that not all DVI-viewers are able to display colors.
14042 \begin_inset space ~
14047 , which means that the document default color set in
14049 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
14050 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
14056 \begin_inset space ~
14061 is used, you can choose between
14138 \begin_inset Index idx
14141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14150 \begin_layout Labeling
14151 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14156 This is used to mark regions of text as having a different language from
14157 the language of the document.
14158 Text marked in this way will be underlined in blue to indicate the change
14159 (only within \SpecialChar LyX
14161 \begin_inset Newline newline
14164 If you have for example, an extract of German text in a non-German document,
14166 respects the German hyphenation rules automatically.
14167 When using the spell checking (see section
14168 \begin_inset space ~
14172 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14174 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
14178 ) the German-marked text will be checked according to the German dictionary.
14181 \begin_layout Labeling
14182 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14187 Alters the size of the font.
14188 You will find no numerical values here; all possible sizes are actually
14189 proportional to the document font size.
14190 Once again, you don't feed \SpecialChar LyX
14191 the details, but a general description of what
14197 \begin_layout Labeling
14198 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14206 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14210 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14219 arg "font-size tiny"
14225 \begin_layout Labeling
14226 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14234 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14238 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14247 arg "font-size scriptsize"
14253 \begin_layout Labeling
14254 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14262 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14266 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14275 arg "font-size footnotesize"
14281 \begin_layout Labeling
14282 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14290 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14294 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14303 arg "font-size small"
14309 \begin_layout Labeling
14310 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14316 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14320 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14324 It's also the default size.
14328 arg "font-size normal"
14334 \begin_layout Labeling
14335 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14343 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14347 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14356 arg "font-size large"
14362 \begin_layout Labeling
14363 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14371 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14375 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14384 arg "font-size larger"
14390 \begin_layout Labeling
14391 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14399 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14403 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14412 arg "font-size largest"
14418 \begin_layout Labeling
14419 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14427 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14431 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14440 arg "font-size huge"
14446 \begin_layout Labeling
14447 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14455 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14459 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14468 arg "font-size giant"
14474 \begin_layout Labeling
14475 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14480 This increases the size by one step (for instance, from
14481 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14485 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14489 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14493 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14500 arg "font-size increase"
14506 \begin_layout Labeling
14507 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14512 This decreases the size by one step (for instance, from
14513 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14517 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14521 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14525 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14532 arg "font-size decrease"
14539 \begin_layout Standard
14544 : don't go crazy with this feature.
14545 You should almost never need to change the font size.
14547 automatically changes the font size for different paragraph environments
14548 — use those instead.
14549 This is here for fine-tuning only!
14552 \begin_layout Labeling
14553 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14558 Here you can change a few other things at the character level.
14563 \begin_layout Labeling
14564 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14571 This is text with emphasize on
14574 This might seem like the same as
14578 , but it is actually a bit different.
14584 That means every document class can define its own font used for emphasized
14586 Normally this font is equal to italic.
14589 \begin_layout Labeling
14590 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14597 This is text with Underbar on.
14603 arg "font-underline"
14609 \begin_inset Newline newline
14614 Avoid using underbar if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter days,
14615 when you could not change fonts.
14616 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
14617 This is only possible in \SpecialChar LyX
14618 because some people
14622 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
14625 \begin_layout Labeling
14626 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14630 \begin_inset space ~
14637 This is text with Double underbar on.
14643 arg "font-underunderline"
14647 \begin_inset Newline newline
14650 As we just warned you against using underbar, you can imagine what we think
14651 about double underbar.
14654 \begin_layout Labeling
14655 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14659 \begin_inset space ~
14666 This is text with Wavy underbar on.
14672 arg "font-underwave"
14676 \begin_inset Newline newline
14679 Use this only if a journal absolutely insists on it.
14680 Keep antinausea pills handy.
14683 \begin_layout Labeling
14684 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14691 This is text with Strikeout on.
14697 arg "font-strikeout"
14701 \begin_inset Newline newline
14704 This is frequently used to indicate an older version of text that has been
14705 changed in the meantime.
14708 \begin_layout Labeling
14709 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14716 This is text with Noun on.
14723 , this is a logical attribute.
14724 Normally it's equivalent to
14727 \begin_inset space ~
14736 \begin_layout Standard
14737 So you have a huge number of combinations to choose from.
14738 Once you have chosen a new character style via the
14740 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
14742 \begin_inset space ~
14745 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
14751 arg "dialog-show character"
14754 ) dialog, the settings are saved.
14755 You can activate them by using the toolbar button
14758 arg "textstyle-apply"
14762 The button lets you apply your custom character style even when the dialog
14766 \begin_layout Standard
14767 To completely reset the character style to the default, use
14774 If you want to toggle only those properties that you have just changed
14775 (suppose you just set the shape to
14776 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14780 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14784 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14788 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14794 \begin_inset space ~
14806 \begin_layout Standard
14807 You should also know something about the differences between the three main
14815 \begin_inset space ~
14827 \begin_layout Itemize
14833 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14837 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14840 font, which means every character has the same width; the
14841 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14845 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14849 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14853 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14858 \begin_inset Newline newline
14862 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
14865 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14876 \begin_inset Note Note
14879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14880 For more on phantoms see section
14881 \begin_inset space ~
14885 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14887 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
14897 \begin_inset Newline newline
14903 \begin_layout Itemize
14908 fonts use characters with serifs.
14909 These are the small
14910 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14914 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14917 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
14918 The following example shows the difference:
14919 \begin_inset Newline newline
14923 \begin_inset Newline newline
14928 text without serifs
14931 \begin_inset Newline newline
14934 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
14935 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
14942 \begin_layout Itemize
14947 is not recommended for use as a base type.
14948 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
14949 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
14952 \begin_layout Standard
14953 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14957 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14960 refers to applying or removing font properties.
14961 When a property is marked for toggling in the
14964 \begin_inset space ~
14969 dialog, applying the style to text that already has the property will cause
14970 the property to be removed.
14971 If you, for example, apply a style with properties A, B and C to text that
14972 currently has font properties B, C, F and G, and if B is set to toggle
14973 and C is set not to toggle, the text ends up with properties A, C, F and
14976 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14980 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14984 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14988 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14991 mean that you do not control the toggling behavior.
14992 For the properties on the left side of the dialog (
14993 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14997 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15000 etc.), toggling behavior is up to you.
15004 \begin_inset space ~
15009 is checked, all of the left side properties are toggled; by default, none
15012 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15016 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15020 If you, for example, set
15021 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15025 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15029 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15033 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15039 \begin_inset space ~
15044 , then apply the style to bold face text, the text will revert to the default
15046 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15050 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15053 ), no matter how many times you apply the style.
15056 \begin_layout Standard
15057 We conclude with the same warning once again: Do not overuse the fonts!
15058 They are, more often than not, a kludge and a bad substitute for good writing.
15061 \begin_layout Section
15062 Printing and Previewing
15065 \begin_layout Subsection
15069 \begin_layout Standard
15070 Now that we have covered some of the basic features of document preparation
15071 using \SpecialChar LyX
15072 , you probably want to know how to print out your masterpiece.
15073 Before we tell you that, we want to give you a quick explanation of what
15074 goes on behind-the-scenes.
15075 We cover this information in much greater detail in the
15077 Additional Features
15082 \begin_layout Standard
15084 uses the program \SpecialChar LaTeX
15087 is just a macro package for the \SpecialChar TeX
15088 typesetting system, but to prevent confusion,
15089 we will only refer to \SpecialChar LaTeX
15092 is what you use to do your actual writing.
15093 Then, \SpecialChar LyX
15094 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
15095 to turn your writing into printable output.
15096 This happens in two stages:
15099 \begin_layout Enumerate
15100 First, \SpecialChar LyX
15101 converts your document to a series of text commands for \SpecialChar LaTeX
15103 a file with the extension,
15104 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15112 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15118 \begin_layout Enumerate
15119 Next, \SpecialChar LyX
15120 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
15121 to use the commands in the
15125 file to produce printable output.
15128 \begin_layout Subsection
15129 Output file formats
15130 \begin_inset Index idx
15133 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15140 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15142 name "subsec:Output-file-formats"
15149 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15150 Simple text (ASCII)
15151 \begin_inset Index idx
15154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15155 File formats ! ASCII
15163 \begin_layout Standard
15164 This file type has the extension
15165 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15173 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15177 It contains your document as plain text following the rules of the
15178 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15181 American Standard Code for Information Interchange
15182 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15188 \begin_layout Standard
15189 You can export your document to ASCII with the menu
15191 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15192 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15194 \begin_inset space ~
15200 However, this will not export any externally generated material such as
15201 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
15202 bibliography (section
15203 \begin_inset space ~
15207 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15209 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
15214 If your document includes such material, use
15216 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15217 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15219 \begin_inset space ~
15223 \begin_inset space ~
15227 \begin_inset space ~
15235 \begin_inset space ~
15239 \begin_inset space ~
15245 This will first internally export your document to PostScript (generating
15246 thereby the external material) and then do the conversion to ASCII.
15249 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15252 \begin_inset Index idx
15255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15256 File formats ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
15265 \begin_layout Standard
15266 This file type has the extension
15267 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15275 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15278 and contains all commands that are necessary for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15281 If you know \SpecialChar LaTeX
15282 , you can use it to find out \SpecialChar LaTeX
15283 -Errors or to process it manually
15284 with console commands.
15285 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
15286 -file is automatically created in \SpecialChar LyX
15287 's temporary directory whenever you
15288 view or export your document.
15291 \begin_layout Standard
15292 You can export your document as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
15293 -file using the menu
15295 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15296 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15300 The different \SpecialChar LaTeX
15301 export variants are explained in section
15302 \begin_inset space ~
15306 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15308 reference "subsec:Export"
15315 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15317 \begin_inset Index idx
15320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15329 \begin_layout Standard
15330 This file type has the extension
15331 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15339 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15344 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15348 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15351 (DVI), because it is completely portable; you can move them from one machine
15352 to another without needing to do any sort of conversion.
15353 DVIs are used for quick previews and as a pre-stage for other output formats,
15357 \begin_layout Standard
15358 DVI files do not contain images, they only link to them.
15359 So don't forget to deliver the images together with your DVIs.
15360 Because the DVI-viewer has to convert the images in the background to make
15361 them visible when you scroll the DVI, this can slow down your computer
15362 when you view the DVI.
15363 So we recommend using PDF for files with many images.
15366 \begin_layout Standard
15367 You can export your document to DVI by the menus
15369 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15370 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15375 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15376 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15378 \begin_inset space ~
15384 The latter option uses the program
15386 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15392 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15395 is an engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
15396 font access (see section
15397 \begin_inset space ~
15401 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15403 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15408 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15409 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
15414 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15416 \begin_inset Index idx
15419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15420 File formats ! PostScript
15428 \begin_layout Standard
15429 This file type has the extension
15430 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15438 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15442 PostScript was developed by the company
15446 as a printer language.
15447 The file therefore contains commands that the printer uses to print the
15449 PostScript can be seen as a
15450 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15453 programming language
15454 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15457 ; you can calculate with it and draw diagrams and images.
15461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15462 If you are interested in learning more about this, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15469 \begin_inset Index idx
15472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15474 packages ! pstricks
15484 As a result of this, the files are often bigger than PDFs.
15487 \begin_layout Standard
15488 PostScript can only contain images in the format
15489 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15492 Encapsulated PostScript
15493 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15496 (EPS, file extension
15497 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15505 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15509 As \SpecialChar LyX
15510 allows you to use any known image format in your document, it has to
15511 convert them in the background to EPS.
15512 If, for example, you have 50
15513 \begin_inset space ~
15516 images in your document, \SpecialChar LyX
15518 \begin_inset space ~
15521 conversions when you view or export your document the first time.
15522 This might slow down your workflow with \SpecialChar LyX
15524 So if you plan to use PostScript, you can insert your images directly as
15525 EPS to avoid this problem.
15528 \begin_layout Standard
15529 You can export to PostScript using the menu
15531 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15532 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15538 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15540 \begin_inset Index idx
15543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15550 \begin_inset Index idx
15553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15562 \begin_layout Standard
15563 This file type has the extension
15564 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15572 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15577 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15580 Portable Document Format
15581 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15588 was derived from PostScript.
15589 It is more compressed and it uses fewer commands than PostScript.
15591 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15595 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15598 implies, it can be processed on any computer system and the printed output
15599 looks exactly the same.
15602 \begin_layout Standard
15603 PDF can contain images in its own PDF format and in the formats
15604 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15607 Joint Photographic Experts Group
15608 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15611 (JPG, file extension
15612 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15620 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15624 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15632 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15636 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15639 Portable Network Graphics
15640 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15643 (PNG, file extension
15644 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15652 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15656 You can also use any other image format, because \SpecialChar LyX
15657 converts them in the
15658 background to one of these formats.
15659 But as described in the section about PostScript, the image conversion
15660 will slow down your workflow.
15661 So we recommend using images in one of the three formats mentioned above.
15664 \begin_layout Standard
15665 You can export your document to PDF via the menu
15667 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15673 \begin_layout Description
15675 \begin_inset space ~
15678 (pdflatex) This uses the program
15682 which converts your file directly to PDF.
15685 \begin_layout Description
15687 \begin_inset space ~
15694 ) This uses the program
15696 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15699 which converts your file directly to PDF.
15702 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15705 is a new engine, derived from
15709 , that also provides direct Unicode support and support for direct font
15710 access (see section
15711 \begin_inset space ~
15715 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15717 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15722 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15723 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
15728 \begin_layout Description
15730 \begin_inset space ~
15737 ) This uses the program
15742 that converts your file directly to PDF.
15748 is a new engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
15749 font access (see section
15750 \begin_inset space ~
15754 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15756 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15761 It is particularly good at typesetting different scripts, for example,
15762 vertically written Japanese.
15765 \begin_layout Description
15767 \begin_inset space ~
15770 (cropped) This is the same as
15773 \begin_inset space ~
15778 but the result is a PDF with cropped page margins.
15779 This is for example useful if you want to use \SpecialChar LyX
15780 to generate good-looking
15781 formulas to use them in other programs like for presentations.
15784 \begin_layout Description
15786 \begin_inset space ~
15789 (dvipdfm) This uses the program
15793 that converts your file in the background to DVI and in a second step to
15797 \begin_layout Description
15799 \begin_inset space ~
15802 (ps2pdf) This uses the program
15806 that creates a PDF from a PostScript-version of your file.
15807 The PostScript-version is produced by the program
15811 which uses a DVI-version as intermediate step.
15812 So this export variant consists of three conversions.
15815 \begin_layout Standard
15819 \begin_inset space ~
15828 supports all the features of actual PDF-versions, is quick, stable, and
15829 works without problems.
15830 If you rely on multiscript support and\SpecialChar breakableslash
15831 or specific OpenType fonts, you might
15835 \begin_inset space ~
15843 \begin_inset space ~
15848 instead, bearing in mind that these two programs are not yet as mature
15856 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15858 \begin_inset Index idx
15861 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15862 FileFormats ! XHTML
15868 \begin_inset Index idx
15871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15880 \begin_layout Standard
15881 This file type has the extension
15882 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15890 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15894 It is a file suitable for viewing in web browsers.
15895 It does not itself contain images and the like but only links to them.
15896 When \SpecialChar LyX
15897 produces XHTML, it also generates corresponding images in formats
15898 suitable for the purpose.
15899 For the math output you can choose in the menu
15901 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
15902 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
15905 between different formats, which are described in section
15907 Math Output in XHTML
15912 \begin_inset space ~
15920 \begin_layout Standard
15921 XHTML output remains
15922 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15926 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15929 , and not all \SpecialChar LyX
15930 features are supported yet.
15934 and the World Wide Web
15938 Additional Features
15940 manual, for more information.
15943 \begin_layout Standard
15944 You can export your document as an XHTML file using the menu item
15946 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15947 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15953 \begin_layout Subsection
15955 \begin_inset Index idx
15958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15967 \begin_layout Standard
15968 To get a look at the final version of your document, with all of the page
15969 breaks in place, the footnotes correctly numbered, and so on, use the menu
15978 or use the toolbar button
15985 A viewing program will pop up showing the output in the defined default
15986 output format, which is globally set in the preferences (see section
15987 \begin_inset space ~
15991 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15993 reference "sec:File-Formats"
15997 ) and can also be altered for single documents in the document settings
15999 \begin_inset space ~
16003 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16005 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
16010 Further output formats can be selected via
16012 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16013 View (Other Formats)
16015 or the toolbar button
16024 \begin_layout Standard
16025 If you have changed your document, you can refresh the output in the same
16026 viewer window using the menu
16028 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16033 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16034 Update (Other Formats)
16039 \begin_layout Standard
16040 When you preview a file, the output file is only generated in \SpecialChar LyX
16043 To have a real output, export your document.
16046 \begin_layout Section
16047 A few Words about Typography
16048 \begin_inset Index idx
16051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16060 \begin_layout Subsection
16061 Hyphens, Dashes and Minus Signs
16062 \begin_inset Index idx
16065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16072 \begin_inset Index idx
16075 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16084 \begin_layout Standard
16085 In \SpecialChar LyX
16087 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16095 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16098 character comes in four variants: the
16115 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
16121 \begin_layout Standard
16122 \begin_inset Box Frameless
16132 height_special "totalheight"
16137 backgroundcolor "none"
16140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16141 \begin_inset Tabular
16142 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
16143 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
16144 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
16145 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16146 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16147 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16148 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16157 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16166 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16176 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16177 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16186 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16195 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16199 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16207 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16216 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16217 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16226 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16235 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16239 system key combination
16243 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16244 On Mac and Linux, the en dash is entered with
16248 and the em dash with
16250 Shift-Option-hyphen
16256 is the Mac label for the right
16265 Alternatively, dashes can be inserted with
16267 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16269 \begin_inset space ~
16272 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
16276 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16280 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16284 function with the Unicode code as argument (2013 for the em dash and 2014
16291 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16295 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16304 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16305 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16314 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16323 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16327 system key combination or
16328 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16332 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16342 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16351 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16355 \begin_inset Formula $-$
16363 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16367 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16375 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16394 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
16400 \begin_layout Standard
16401 Hyphen and dashes are distinct from the minus sign, which appears in math
16402 mode and has a length of its own.
16403 Here are some examples:
16406 \begin_layout Enumerate
16407 line- and page-breaks
16408 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16418 \begin_layout Enumerate
16420 \begin_inset space ~
16424 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16434 \begin_layout Enumerate
16435 Dashes indicate interruptions, performing a function related to – but subtly
16436 different from – parentheses.
16437 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16448 \begin_layout Standard
16449 The em dash is used without spaces: Oh—there's a dash.
16450 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16461 \begin_layout Enumerate
16462 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}-y^{2}=z^{2}$
16466 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16476 \begin_layout Standard
16478 \begin_inset CommandInset href
16480 name "Wikipedia entry on dashes"
16481 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Dash"
16489 \begin_layout Subsection
16490 Dashes and line breaks
16491 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16493 name "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
16500 \begin_layout Standard
16501 Whether line breaks before or after dashes are allowed depends on the use
16505 \begin_layout Itemize
16506 No line breaks are allowed in ranges of values like A–Z or 1975–1982.
16509 \begin_layout Itemize
16510 In English, lines may break after dashes used to set off parenthetical statement
16514 \begin_layout Itemize
16515 In French and Spanish, dashes around parenthetical statements are treated
16516 similar to quote signs and line breaks are not allowed on the left side.
16519 \begin_layout Standard
16520 When using spaced en dashes
16521 \begin_inset space ~
16524 - common in British English
16525 \begin_inset space ~
16528 - line breaks before the dash with protected spaces are not allowed.
16531 \begin_layout Standard
16532 When using em dashes without spaces—\SpecialChar allowbreak
16533 common in American English—\SpecialChar allowbreak
16535 optional line breaks with the menu
16537 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16538 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
16539 Optional line break
16544 \begin_layout Standard
16545 For documents containing many em dashes, you may consider to select the
16548 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16549 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
16550 Fonts\SpecialChar menuseparator
16551 Output en- and em-dashes as ligatures.
16554 This forces the output of dashes as
16555 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16559 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16563 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16567 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16570 when exporting to \SpecialChar LaTeX
16572 The \SpecialChar TeX
16573 font ligature mechanism converts them to dash characters followed
16574 by an optional line break.
16577 \begin_layout Standard
16581 \begin_layout Enumerate
16582 This results in optional line breaks after
16587 Incorrect line breaks must be prevented by wrapping in a makebox
16591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16594 Prevent Hyphenation
16599 \begin_inset space ~
16615 in \SpecialChar TeX
16620 \begin_layout Quote
16622 \begin_inset space ~
16626 \begin_inset Box Frameless
16636 height_special "totalheight"
16641 backgroundcolor "none"
16644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16654 \begin_layout Standard
16658 \begin_inset Box Frameless
16668 height_special "totalheight"
16673 backgroundcolor "none"
16676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16680 \begin_inset space ~
16688 si tout le monde ne les aime pas
16689 \begin_inset space ~
16692 – sont très utiles.
16696 \begin_layout Quote
16703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16712 —un inciso con rayas— se escribe así.
16715 \begin_layout Standard
16716 An incorrect line break is easily overlooked because
16717 \begin_inset space ~
16720 – in contrast to an overfull line
16721 \begin_inset space ~
16724 – it does not trigger a warning in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
16729 \begin_layout Enumerate
16730 The setting is ignored for documents using non-\SpecialChar TeX
16735 \begin_layout Standard
16741 XeTeXdashbreakstate
16745 \begin_inset Newline newline
16752 XeTeXdashbreakstate=1
16754 causes literal dashes to behave like ligature dashes.
16758 \begin_layout Enumerate
16774 \begin_layout Enumerate
16775 Hyphenation is suppressed in words adjacent to hyphens and ligature dashes.
16776 \change_inserted -1402925745 1504003612
16780 \begin_layout Standard
16782 \change_inserted -1402925745 1504709020
16786 \begin_layout Labeling
16787 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16790 \change_inserted -1402925745 1504711065
16792 \begin_inset space ~
16798 \change_inserted -1402925745 1504711065
16799 utput as -{}- and -{}-{}- to prevent ligation to dashes.
16805 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16806 Up to \SpecialChar LyX
16808 \begin_inset space ~
16811 2.1 -- and --- in \SpecialChar LyX
16812 was output unchanged which led to different look in the
16813 within \SpecialChar LyX
16814 , text export, HTML export and the PDF export.
16820 \change_inserted -1402925745 1504711065
16821 in older documents are converted to literal Unicode dashe
16824 \change_inserted -1402925745 1504711065
16829 \begin_layout Itemize
16831 \change_inserted -1402925745 1504709468
16832 In some cases this leads to different line breaks.
16835 \begin_layout Itemize
16837 \change_inserted -1402925745 1504710005
16838 It is no longer possible to differentiate dashes with/without optional line
16839 break using --- and -- vs.
16841 Either convert one sort t
16845 \change_inserted -1402925745 1504710005
16846 or insert optional line break characters.
16852 \begin_layout Labeling
16853 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16856 \change_inserted -1402925745 1504710385
16858 \begin_inset space ~
16864 \change_inserted -1402925745 1504710385
16867 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16868 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
16869 Fonts\SpecialChar menuseparator
16870 Output en- and em-dashes as ligatures.
16873 It is on by default but unselected when opening documents edited with
16877 \begin_inset space ~
16881 \change_inserted -1402925745 1504710385
16887 \begin_layout Itemize
16889 \change_inserted -1402925745 1504712456
16890 If you used literal em- and en dashes in pre-2.2 documents, you must manually
16891 unselect it to ensure unchanged
16894 \change_inserted -1402925745 1504712456
16898 \begin_layout Itemize
16900 \change_inserted -1402925745 1504712456
16901 ZWSP characters (u200b) following literal em- and en-dashes are deleted
16902 by lyx2lyx when converting to 2.3 format.
16903 If you used them as optional line breaks after dashes, convert them to
16904 space insets before opening your document with
16908 \begin_inset space ~
16912 \change_inserted -1402925745 1504712456
16913 2.3 or the optional line breaks will be lost!
16916 \begin_layout Itemize
16918 \change_inserted -1402925745 1504709574
16919 As with all settings, the default for new documents can be configured via
16924 \begin_layout Subsection
16926 \begin_inset Index idx
16929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16936 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16938 name "subsec:Hyphenation"
16945 \begin_layout Standard
16946 Words are not hyphenated within \SpecialChar LyX
16947 but automatically in the output.
16948 Hyphenation is done by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
16954 \begin_inset Index idx
16957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16964 following the rules of the document language.
16967 \begin_layout Standard
16969 hyphenates almost perfectly; it only has problems with text in the
16973 font and with unusual constructs, like
16974 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16978 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16982 If \SpecialChar LaTeX
16983 cannot break a word correctly, you can set hyphenation points manually.
16984 This is done with the menu
16986 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16987 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
16989 \begin_inset space ~
16995 These extra hyphenation points are only recommendations to \SpecialChar LaTeX
16997 If no hyphenation is necessary, \SpecialChar LaTeX
17001 \begin_layout Standard
17002 Sometimes you want to prevent words or constructs from being hyphenated.
17003 Imagine that you are describing keybindings/shortcuts in your document
17005 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17009 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17014 would then see the hyphen
17015 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17019 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17022 as a hyphenation possibility.
17023 Hyphenating at this point would look ugly.
17024 To prevent the shortcut from being hyphenated, you can use a protected
17027 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17028 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
17031 ) or put it into a makebox as described in section
17033 Prevent Hyphenation
17038 \begin_inset space ~
17046 \begin_layout Subsection
17048 \begin_inset Index idx
17051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17060 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17061 Abbreviations and End of Sentence
17062 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17064 name "subsec:Abbreviations"
17071 \begin_layout Standard
17072 When \SpecialChar LyX
17073 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
17074 to generate the final version of your document, \SpecialChar LaTeX
17076 distinguishes between words, sentences, and abbreviations.
17079 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17082 appropriate amount of space.
17083 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17086 That means sentences get a little bit more space between the period and
17088 Abbreviations get the same amount of space after the period that a word
17089 gets after another word.
17092 \begin_layout Standard
17093 Unfortunately, the algorithm for figuring out what's an abbreviation does
17094 not work in all cases.
17096 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17104 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17107 is at the end of a lowercase letter, it's the end of a sentence; if it's
17108 at the end of a capitalized letter, it's an abbreviation.
17111 \begin_layout Standard
17112 Here are some examples of
17116 abbreviations and of the end of a sentence:
17119 \begin_layout Itemize
17124 \begin_layout Itemize
17129 \begin_layout Standard
17130 And here is an example of the algorithm going wrong:
17133 \begin_layout Itemize
17135 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17139 this is too much space!
17142 \begin_layout Itemize
17147 \begin_layout Standard
17148 You will not see anything wrong until you view a final version of your document.
17151 \begin_layout Standard
17152 To fix this problem, use one of the following:
17155 \begin_layout Enumerate
17159 \begin_inset space ~
17164 after lowercase abbreviations (see section
17165 \begin_inset space ~
17169 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17171 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
17176 \begin_inset Index idx
17179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17180 Spaces ! inter-word
17188 \begin_layout Enumerate
17192 \begin_inset space ~
17197 between two tokens of an abbreviation (see section
17198 \begin_inset space ~
17202 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17204 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
17209 \begin_inset Index idx
17212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17221 \begin_layout Enumerate
17225 \begin_inset space ~
17229 \begin_inset space ~
17233 \begin_inset space ~
17240 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17242 \begin_inset space ~
17247 menu to force the use of inter-sentence spacing.
17248 This function is also bound to
17251 arg "specialchar-insert end-of-sentence"
17257 \begin_layout Standard
17258 With the corrections, our earlier examples look like this:
17261 \begin_layout Itemize
17263 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17267 \begin_inset space \space{}
17270 this is too much space!
17273 \begin_layout Itemize
17274 This is I\SpecialChar endofsentence
17278 \begin_layout Standard
17279 Some languages don't use extra spacing between sentences.
17280 If your language is such a language, you don't need to worry, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
17282 will take care of this.
17285 \begin_layout Standard
17286 For those that do need to bother, there is help to catch those sneaky errors:
17290 \begin_inset space ~
17296 feature described in the section
17298 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
17303 Additional Features
17308 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17310 \begin_inset Index idx
17313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17314 Typography ! Quotation marks
17320 \begin_inset Index idx
17323 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17324 Quotation marks | see
17328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17354 \begin_layout Standard
17356 usually sets quotation marks correctly.
17357 Specifically, it will insert an opening mark at the beginning of quoted
17358 text, and use a closing mark at the end.
17360 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17364 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17368 The keyboard character,
17372 , generates this automatically.
17375 \begin_layout Standard
17376 You can specify what character the
17380 key produces by using the submenu
17386 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17390 \begin_inset Index idx
17393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17394 Document ! Settings
17399 dialog and switching the
17403 (note that \SpecialChar LyX
17404 makes a sensible proposal for the selected main language).
17406 \begin_inset space ~
17412 \begin_layout Labeling
17413 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17417 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17421 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17425 \begin_inset space ~
17429 \begin_inset space ~
17433 \begin_inset Quotes els
17437 \begin_inset Quotes ers
17443 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17447 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17451 \begin_inset Quotes els
17455 \begin_inset Quotes ers
17458 quotation marks (as common, e.
17459 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17465 \begin_layout Labeling
17466 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17469 \begin_inset Quotes sld
17473 \begin_inset Quotes sld
17477 \begin_inset space ~
17481 \begin_inset space ~
17485 \begin_inset Quotes sls
17489 \begin_inset Quotes srs
17495 \begin_inset Quotes sld
17499 \begin_inset Quotes sld
17503 \begin_inset Quotes sls
17507 \begin_inset Quotes srs
17510 quotation marks (as common, e.
17511 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17517 \begin_layout Labeling
17518 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17521 \begin_inset Quotes gld
17525 \begin_inset Quotes grd
17529 \begin_inset space ~
17533 \begin_inset space ~
17537 \begin_inset Quotes gls
17541 \begin_inset Quotes grs
17547 \begin_inset Quotes gld
17551 \begin_inset Quotes grd
17555 \begin_inset Quotes gls
17559 \begin_inset Quotes grs
17562 quotation marks (as common, e.
17563 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17569 \begin_layout Labeling
17570 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17573 \begin_inset Quotes pld
17577 \begin_inset Quotes prd
17581 \begin_inset space ~
17585 \begin_inset space ~
17589 \begin_inset Quotes pls
17593 \begin_inset Quotes prs
17599 \begin_inset Quotes pld
17603 \begin_inset Quotes prd
17607 \begin_inset Quotes pls
17611 \begin_inset Quotes prs
17614 quotation marks (as common, e.
17615 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17621 \begin_layout Labeling
17622 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17625 \begin_inset Quotes cld
17629 \begin_inset Quotes crd
17633 \begin_inset space ~
17637 \begin_inset space ~
17641 \begin_inset Quotes cls
17645 \begin_inset Quotes crs
17651 \begin_inset Quotes cld
17655 \begin_inset Quotes crd
17659 \begin_inset Quotes cls
17663 \begin_inset Quotes crs
17666 quotation marks (as common, e.
17667 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17670 g., in Switzerland)
17673 \begin_layout Labeling
17674 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17677 \begin_inset Quotes ald
17681 \begin_inset Quotes ard
17685 \begin_inset space ~
17689 \begin_inset space ~
17693 \begin_inset Quotes als
17697 \begin_inset Quotes ars
17703 \begin_inset Quotes ald
17707 \begin_inset Quotes ard
17711 \begin_inset Quotes als
17715 \begin_inset Quotes ars
17718 quotation marks (as common, e.
17719 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17725 \begin_layout Labeling
17726 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17729 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
17733 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
17737 \begin_inset space ~
17741 \begin_inset space ~
17745 \begin_inset Quotes qls
17749 \begin_inset Quotes qls
17755 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
17759 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
17763 \begin_inset Quotes qls
17767 \begin_inset Quotes qls
17770 quotation marks (so-called plain or non-typographical quotation marks)
17773 \begin_layout Labeling
17774 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17777 \begin_inset Quotes bld
17781 \begin_inset Quotes brd
17785 \begin_inset space ~
17789 \begin_inset space ~
17793 \begin_inset Quotes bls
17797 \begin_inset Quotes brs
17803 \begin_inset Quotes bld
17807 \begin_inset Quotes brd
17811 \begin_inset Quotes bls
17815 \begin_inset Quotes brs
17818 quotation marks (as common, e.
17819 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17822 g., in Great Britain)
17825 \begin_layout Labeling
17826 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17829 \begin_inset Quotes fld
17833 \begin_inset Quotes frd
17837 \begin_inset space ~
17841 \begin_inset space ~
17845 \begin_inset Quotes fls
17849 \begin_inset Quotes frs
17855 \begin_inset Quotes fld
17859 \begin_inset Quotes frd
17863 \begin_inset Quotes fls
17867 \begin_inset Quotes frs
17870 quotation marks (as common, e.
17871 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17877 \begin_layout Labeling
17878 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17881 \begin_inset Quotes ild
17885 \begin_inset Quotes ird
17889 \begin_inset space ~
17893 \begin_inset space ~
17897 \begin_inset Quotes ils
17901 \begin_inset Quotes irs
17907 \begin_inset Quotes ild
17911 \begin_inset Quotes ird
17915 \begin_inset Quotes ils
17919 \begin_inset Quotes irs
17922 quotation marks (another style common in France)
17926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17927 Maybe you wonder why one does not simply use only outer marks in this case,
17928 since these look identical to the inner marks.
17929 The answer is that you cannot easily switch to another style then (where
17930 the inner marks differ).
17938 \begin_layout Labeling
17939 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17942 \begin_inset Quotes rld
17946 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
17950 \begin_inset space ~
17954 \begin_inset space ~
17958 \begin_inset Quotes rls
17962 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
17968 \begin_inset Quotes rld
17972 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
17976 \begin_inset Quotes rls
17980 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
17983 quotation marks (as common, e.
17984 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17990 \begin_layout Labeling
17991 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17994 \begin_inset Quotes wld
17998 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
18002 \begin_inset space ~
18006 \begin_inset space ~
18010 \begin_inset Quotes wls
18014 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
18020 \begin_inset Quotes wld
18024 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
18028 \begin_inset Quotes wls
18032 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
18035 quotation marks (another style common in Sweden)
18038 \begin_layout Labeling
18039 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18040 \begin_inset Quotes jld
18048 \begin_inset Quotes jrd
18054 \begin_inset space ~
18058 \begin_inset space ~
18064 \begin_inset Quotes jls
18072 \begin_inset Quotes jrs
18076 \begin_inset Quotes jld
18080 \begin_inset Quotes jrd
18084 \begin_inset Quotes jls
18088 \begin_inset Quotes jrs
18091 quotation marks (as common, e.
18092 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18100 Note that these characters are just emulated with similar-looking math symbols
18101 in many encodings that do not cover these glyphs.
18109 \begin_layout Labeling
18110 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18111 \begin_inset Quotes kld
18119 \begin_inset Quotes krd
18125 \begin_inset space ~
18129 \begin_inset space ~
18135 \begin_inset Quotes kls
18143 \begin_inset Quotes krs
18147 \begin_inset Quotes kld
18151 \begin_inset Quotes krd
18155 \begin_inset Quotes kls
18159 \begin_inset Quotes krs
18162 quotation marks (as common, e.
18163 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18166 g., in North Korea and China)
18170 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18171 Note that these characters are just emulated with similar-looking math symbols
18172 in many encodings that do not cover these glyphs.
18180 \begin_layout Standard
18181 Inner quotation marks
18185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18186 In many writing cultures, these are single quotation marks.
18187 But as the British and French styles show, this is not necessarily the
18188 case (and specifically the British style shows that
18189 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18193 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18196 does not necessarily mean
18197 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18201 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18205 This is why we call them
18206 \begin_inset Quotes els
18210 \begin_inset Quotes ers
18214 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18218 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18226 for quotations inside quotations (and other tasks in some languages, such
18228 \begin_inset Quotes els
18232 \begin_inset Quotes ers
18235 ) can be obtained by means of the shortcut
18238 arg "quote-insert inner"
18243 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18249 \begin_layout Standard
18250 By default, the quotation mark styles are persistent.
18251 That is to say, a quotation mark maintains the style that was current when
18252 it was inserted, even if the document-wide style changes.
18253 This allows you to enter marks of different style.
18254 If you check the setting
18256 Use dynamic quotation marks
18260 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18261 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
18264 , however, special quotation marks will be inserted (in the LyX window,
18265 they appear in a special color).
18266 These marks will automatically adapt to the main style (and its changes).
18267 Such quotation marks make it easy to alter the quotation mark style in
18269 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18272 g., if your publisher requests a different style).
18275 \begin_layout Standard
18276 Individual quotation marks (i.
18277 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18280 e., their level [inner, outer], side [opening, closing], and style) can be
18281 easily switched by a context menu that pops up if you right-click on a
18285 \begin_layout Subsection
18287 \begin_inset Index idx
18290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18291 Typography ! Ligatures
18297 \begin_inset Index idx
18300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18329 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18331 name "subsec:Ligatures"
18338 \begin_layout Standard
18339 It is standard typesetting practice to group certain letters together and
18340 print them as single characters.
18341 These groups are known as
18346 Since \SpecialChar LaTeX
18347 knows about ligatures, your documents will contain them too in the
18349 Here are the standard ligatures:
18352 \begin_layout Itemize
18356 \begin_layout Itemize
18360 \begin_layout Itemize
18364 \begin_layout Itemize
18368 \begin_layout Itemize
18372 \begin_layout Standard
18373 Some languages uses other ligatures if the document font supports them.
18376 \begin_layout Standard
18377 Sometimes, you don't want a ligature in a word.
18378 While a ligature may be okay in the word,
18379 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18383 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18386 it looks really weird in compound words, such as
18387 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18391 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18395 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18399 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18402 To break a ligature, use
18404 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18405 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
18407 \begin_inset space ~
18414 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18418 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18422 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18425 cuff\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
18427 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18431 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18435 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18439 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18442 Dorf\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
18444 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18450 \begin_layout Subsection
18452 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
18454 \begin_inset Index idx
18457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18465 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18467 name "subsec:LyX's-Proper-Names"
18474 \begin_layout Standard
18477 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18478 Special Characters\SpecialChar menuseparator
18482 provides the following program logos with special formatting:
18485 \begin_layout Description
18487 The name of the game.
18490 \begin_layout Description
18492 The typesetting engine used by \SpecialChar LyX
18496 \begin_layout Description
18498 The \SpecialChar TeX
18499 macro collection used by \SpecialChar LyX
18503 \begin_layout Description
18504 \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
18505 The current version of \SpecialChar LaTeX
18509 \begin_layout Standard
18510 You might wonder why the \SpecialChar LaTeX
18512 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18516 \begin_inset Formula $\epsilon$
18520 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18524 It is an old tradition in the \SpecialChar TeX
18525 world to give programs geek version numbers.
18526 For example the version number of \SpecialChar TeX
18527 converges to the number
18528 \begin_inset Formula $\pi$
18531 : The actual version is
18532 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18537 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18540 , the previous one was
18541 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18546 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18552 \begin_layout Subsection
18554 \begin_inset Index idx
18557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18566 \begin_layout Standard
18567 Generally the space between units and the number is smaller than the normal
18568 space between two words.
18569 As you can see in the example below, it looks better when the space is
18572 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18576 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18579 for units use the menu
18581 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18582 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
18584 \begin_inset space ~
18592 arg "space-insert thin"
18598 \begin_layout Standard
18599 Here is an example to show the differences:
18602 \begin_layout Standard
18603 \begin_inset Tabular
18604 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
18605 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
18606 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
18607 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
18609 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18614 \begin_inset space ~
18618 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
18626 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18630 space between number and unit
18637 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18642 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18646 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
18654 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18657 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18658 half space between number and unit
18671 \begin_layout Subsection
18673 \begin_inset Index idx
18676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18677 Typography ! Widows and orphans
18685 \begin_layout Standard
18686 In the early days of word processors, page breaks went wherever the page
18688 There was no regard for what was actually going on in the text.
18689 For example the heading for a new section was printed at the very bottom
18690 of the page, the first line of a new paragraph all alone at the bottom
18691 of a page, or the last line of a paragraph at the top of a new page.
18692 These bits of text became known as
18703 \begin_layout Standard
18704 Clearly, \SpecialChar LyX
18705 can avoid breaking pages after a section heading.
18706 That's part of the advantage of paragraph environments.
18707 But what about widows and orphans, where the page breaks leave one line
18708 of a paragraph all alone at the top or bottom of a page? There are rules
18709 built into \SpecialChar LaTeX
18710 governing page breaks, and some of those rules are there specifical
18711 ly to prevent widows and orphans.
18712 If they appear nevertheless and you don't like them, you can add the commands
18713 \begin_inset Newline newline
18721 \begin_inset Newline newline
18729 \begin_inset Newline newline
18732 to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
18733 preamble of your document to avoid them.
18734 Some \SpecialChar LaTeX
18736 \begin_inset space ~
18740 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
18742 key "latexcompanion"
18748 \begin_inset space ~
18752 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
18759 ) have more information about the technical details of \SpecialChar LaTeX
18760 's page break mechanism.
18763 \begin_layout Chapter
18764 Notes, Graphics, Tables and Floats
18765 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18767 name "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
18774 \begin_layout Standard
18775 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
18778 \begin_inset space ~
18784 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
18787 \begin_layout Section
18789 \begin_inset Index idx
18792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18799 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18808 \begin_layout Standard
18810 offers you a few types of notes to add to your document:
18813 \begin_layout Description
18816 \begin_inset space ~
18819 Note This note type is for internal notes that will not appear in the output.
18820 \begin_inset Newline newline
18824 \begin_inset Note Note
18827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18828 This is text in a note box that doesn't appear in the output.
18836 \begin_layout Description
18837 Comment This note also doesn't appear in the output but it does appear as
18838 a \SpecialChar LaTeX
18839 -comment when you export the document to \SpecialChar LaTeX
18842 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
18843 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
18845 \begin_inset space ~
18851 \begin_inset Newline newline
18855 \begin_inset Note Comment
18858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18859 This is text in a note box that only appears as a comment in \SpecialChar LaTeX
18868 \begin_layout Description
18870 \begin_inset space ~
18873 Out This note will appear in the output as text in a color which you can
18874 set in the document settings under
18876 Colors\SpecialChar menuseparator
18878 \begin_inset space ~
18884 \begin_inset Newline newline
18888 \begin_inset Newline newline
18892 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
18895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18901 This is an example footnote within a greyed out note.
18902 In this document the color of this note type is set to blue.
18907 of a comment that appears in the output.
18913 \begin_inset Newline newline
18917 \begin_inset Newline newline
18920 As you can see in the example, greyed out notes can have footnotes.
18923 \begin_layout Standard
18924 Notes are inserted with the toolbar button
18932 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18936 Right-click on the note box that appears to select the note type.
18939 \begin_layout Section
18941 \begin_inset Index idx
18944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18951 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18953 name "sec:Footnotes"
18960 \begin_layout Standard
18962 uses boxes to display footnotes: When you insert a footnote using the menu
18965 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18968 or the toolbar button
18971 arg "footnote-insert"
18983 \begin_inset Graphics
18984 filename clipart/footnote.png
18993 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
18994 's representation of your footnote.
19004 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19012 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19023 label, the box will
19027 be opened and you can enter the footnote text into it.
19028 Clicking on the box label again will close
19041 If you want to turn existing text into a footnote, simply highlight it
19042 and click on the footnote
19057 \begin_layout Standard
19058 Here is an example footnote:
19066 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19067 To close a footnote, click on the footnote box label.
19075 \begin_layout Standard
19076 The footnote will appear in the output as a superscript number at the text
19077 position where the footnote box is placed.
19078 The footnote text is placed at the bottom of the current page.
19079 The footnote number is calculated by \SpecialChar LyX
19080 according to the document class.
19082 does not yet support a particular numbering scheme, but you can get other
19083 schemes using special \SpecialChar LaTeX
19089 ey are described in the
19092 \begin_inset space ~
19100 \begin_layout Section
19102 \begin_inset Index idx
19105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19112 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19114 name "sec:Marginal-Notes"
19121 \begin_layout Standard
19122 Marginal notes look and behave just like footnotes in \SpecialChar LyX
19124 When you insert a margin note via the menu
19126 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19128 \begin_inset space ~
19133 or the toolbar button
19136 arg "marginalnote-insert"
19155 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19159 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19162 appearing within your text.
19163 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
19164 's representation of your margin
19173 \begin_layout Standard
19174 At the side of this sentence is an example marginal note.
19178 \begin_inset Marginal
19181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19183 This is a marginal note.
19191 \begin_layout Standard
19192 Marginal notes appear at the right side in single-sided documents.
19193 In double-sided documents they appear in the outer margin – left on even
19194 pages, right on odd pages.
19197 \begin_layout Standard
19198 For further information about marginal notes see the section
19201 \begin_inset space ~
19209 \begin_inset space ~
19217 \begin_layout Section
19218 Graphics and Images
19219 \begin_inset Index idx
19222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19229 \begin_inset Index idx
19232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19239 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19241 name "sec:Graphics"
19248 \begin_layout Standard
19249 To insert an image in your document, place the cursor at the text position
19250 you want and click on the toolbar icon
19253 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
19258 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19262 Then a dialog will appear to choose the file to load.
19265 \begin_layout Standard
19266 This dialog has numerous mostly self-explanatory parameters.
19271 tab allows you to choose your image file.
19272 The image can be transformed by setting a rotation angle and a scaling
19274 The scaling units are explained in Appendix
19275 \begin_inset space ~
19279 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19281 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
19288 \begin_layout Standard
19293 it is possible to set image coordinates to adjust the height and width
19294 of the image in the output.
19295 The coordinates can also be calculated automatically by pressing the button
19299 \begin_inset space ~
19303 \begin_inset space ~
19312 \begin_inset space ~
19316 \begin_inset space ~
19320 \begin_inset space ~
19325 will only print the image region within the given coordinates.
19326 Normally you don't need to take care about image coordinates and can ignore
19334 \begin_layout Standard
19338 \begin_inset space ~
19342 \begin_inset space ~
19347 tab \SpecialChar LaTeX
19348 experts can specify additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
19350 In this tab you can also specify the appearance of the image inside \SpecialChar LyX
19355 \begin_inset space ~
19360 has the effect that the image doesn't appear in the output, only a frame
19361 with the image size is printed.
19364 \begin_layout Standard
19365 The graphics dialog can be called at any time by clicking on an image.
19366 Images will appear in the output exactly at the position where they are
19368 This is an example image within a separate, horizontally centered paragraph:
19371 \begin_layout Standard
19373 \begin_inset Graphics
19374 filename clipart/mobius.eps
19382 \begin_layout Standard
19383 If you need image captions or want to reference images, you have to put
19384 the image into a float, see section
19385 \begin_inset space ~
19389 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19391 reference "subsec:Figure-Floats"
19398 \begin_layout Subsection
19400 \begin_inset Index idx
19403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19410 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19412 name "subsec:Image-Formats"
19419 \begin_layout Standard
19420 You can insert images in any known file format.
19421 But as we explained in section
19422 \begin_inset space ~
19426 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19428 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
19432 , every output document format allows only a few image formats.
19434 therefore uses the program
19438 in the background to convert the images to the right format.
19439 To increase your workflow by avoiding these conversions in the background,
19440 use only the image formats listed in the subsections of section
19441 \begin_inset space ~
19445 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19447 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
19454 \begin_layout Standard
19455 Similar to fonts there are two types of image formats:
19458 \begin_layout Description
19460 \begin_inset space ~
19463 images consist of pixel values, often in a compressed form.
19464 They are therefore not fully scalable and look pixelated in large zooms.
19465 Well-known bitmap image formats are
19466 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19469 Graphics Interchange Format
19470 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19473 (GIF, file extension
19474 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19482 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19486 \begin_inset Index idx
19489 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19494 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19505 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19518 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19521 Portable Network Graphics
19522 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19525 (PNG, file extension
19526 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19534 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19538 \begin_inset Index idx
19541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19570 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19573 Joint Photographic Experts Group
19574 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19577 (JPG, file extension
19578 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19586 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19590 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19598 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19602 \begin_inset Index idx
19605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19636 \begin_layout Description
19638 \begin_inset space ~
19641 images consist of vectors and can therefore be scaled to any size without
19643 The scaling ability is desired if you want to create presentations, because
19644 presentations are always scaled by the beamer.
19645 Scaling is also useful for online documents to let the user zoom into diagrams.
19646 \begin_inset Newline newline
19649 Scalable image formats can be
19650 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19653 Scalable Vector Graphics
19654 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19657 (SVG, file extension
19658 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19666 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19670 \begin_inset Index idx
19673 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19689 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19702 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19705 Encapsulated PostScript
19706 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19709 (EPS, file extension
19710 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19718 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19722 \begin_inset Index idx
19725 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19741 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19754 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19757 Portable Document Format
19758 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19761 (PDF, file extension
19762 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19770 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19774 \begin_inset Index idx
19777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19785 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19789 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19792 , because you can convert any bitmap image format to PDF or EPS and the
19793 result will not be scalable.
19794 In this case only a header with the image properties is added to the original
19799 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19800 In the case of PDF, the original image is additionally compressed.
19808 \begin_layout Standard
19809 Normally one cannot convert a bitmap image into a scalable one, only
19816 \begin_layout Subsection
19817 Grouping of Image Settings
19818 \begin_inset Index idx
19821 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19822 Images ! Settings grouping
19830 \begin_layout Standard
19831 Each image can define a new group of image settings or join an existing
19833 Images within such a group share their settings, so adjusting one image
19834 of the group automatically also adjusts all other images of the group in
19836 So you can for example change the size for a bunch of images without the
19837 need to manually change each of them.
19841 \begin_layout Standard
19842 A new group can be set by pressing the button
19845 \begin_inset space ~
19849 \begin_inset space ~
19861 \begin_inset space ~
19865 \begin_inset space ~
19871 Joining an existing group can be done using the context menu of the image
19872 and checking the name of the desired group.
19875 \begin_layout Section
19877 \begin_inset Index idx
19880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19887 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19896 \begin_layout Standard
19897 You can insert a table using either the toolbar button
19900 arg "tabular-insert"
19905 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19909 A dialog will appear, asking you for the number of rows and columns.
19910 The default table has lines around any cell and the first row appears separated
19911 from the rest of the table.
19912 This separation appears due to a double line: The cells of the first row
19913 have a line below them and the cells of the second row have a line above
19915 Here is an example table:
19918 \begin_layout Standard
19920 \begin_inset Tabular
19921 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="4">
19922 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
19923 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19924 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19925 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
19926 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19928 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19937 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19955 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19964 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19975 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19993 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20002 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20011 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20014 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20022 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20025 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20040 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20043 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20049 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20062 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20073 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20091 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20100 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20109 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20126 \begin_layout Subsection
20130 \begin_layout Standard
20131 You can alter a table by clicking on it with the right mouse button and
20134 More\SpecialChar menuseparator
20138 This brings up the table dialog.
20139 Here you can adjust the settings of the cell, row and/or column where the
20140 cursor is placed currently.
20141 Most of the dialog options also work on selections.
20142 This means that if you select more cells, columns or rows the action is
20143 done on all of your selection.
20146 \begin_layout Standard
20147 In addition to the table dialog, the
20150 \begin_inset space ~
20155 helps you in setting table properties.
20156 It appears if the cursor is inside a table.
20159 \begin_layout Standard
20163 \begin_inset space ~
20168 of the table dialog you can set the alignment for the current row.
20169 If you add a row or column, it will be inserted right beside or below the
20170 current cell respectively.
20171 The vertical alignment of a column can only be adjusted when a column width
20173 A given width will allow the cell to have line breaks and multiple paragraphs
20174 of text, see section
20175 \begin_inset space ~
20179 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20181 reference "subsec:Table-Cells"
20188 \begin_layout Standard
20189 You can mark multiple cells of one row/column as a multicolumn/row cell
20190 using the check box
20199 This will merge the cells to
20203 cell, spread over more than one column/row.
20204 Multicolumn cells are treated as own rows, so that the alignment, width,
20205 and border settings affect only the multicolumn cell.
20206 Here is an example table with a multicolumn cell in the first row and one
20207 in the last row without the upper border:
20210 \begin_layout Standard
20212 \begin_inset Tabular
20213 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="4">
20214 <features firstHeadTopDL="true" firstHeadBottomDL="true" tabularvalignment="middle">
20215 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
20216 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle">
20217 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
20218 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
20220 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20229 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="middle" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20238 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20247 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20250 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20258 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20276 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20285 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20294 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20297 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20305 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20314 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20323 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20332 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20349 \begin_layout Standard
20350 Adept users can declare special \SpecialChar LaTeX
20351 -arguments for the table.
20352 They are necessary for special table formatting, such as the multirow cells,
20353 explained in the chapter
20360 \begin_inset space ~
20366 You can also rotate the current cell or the whole table.
20367 These rotations are not visible in \SpecialChar LyX
20368 but are visible in the output.
20371 \begin_layout Standard
20372 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
20375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20380 Most DVI-viewers are
20384 able to display rotations.
20392 \begin_layout Standard
20397 tab allows you to add and delete border lines for the current row/column.
20402 adds lines for all cell borders.
20405 \begin_layout Subsection
20407 \begin_inset Index idx
20410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20411 Tables ! Multi-page
20417 \begin_inset Index idx
20420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20429 \begin_layout Standard
20430 If the table is too long to fit on one page, you can use the option
20433 \begin_inset space ~
20437 \begin_inset space ~
20445 \begin_inset space ~
20450 of the table dialog to split the table automatically over more pages.
20451 Doing this enables some check boxes and you can now define:
20454 \begin_layout Description
20459 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
20460 defined, are defined to be the header rows of all pages of the longtable.
20461 Except for the first page, if
20464 \begin_inset space ~
20472 \begin_layout Description
20476 \begin_inset space ~
20481 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
20482 defined, are defined to be the header rows of the first page of the longtable.
20485 \begin_layout Description
20490 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
20491 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of all pages of the longtable,
20492 except for the last page, if
20495 \begin_inset space ~
20503 \begin_layout Description
20507 \begin_inset space ~
20512 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
20513 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of the last page of the longtable.
20516 \begin_layout Description
20517 Caption: The first row is reset as a single column.
20518 You can now insert there the table caption via the menu
20520 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20524 More about multi-page table captions can be found in the
20527 \begin_inset space ~
20535 \begin_layout Standard
20536 You can also specify a row where the table is split.
20537 If you set more than one option in the same table row, you should be aware
20538 that then only the first option is used; the others will be defined as
20544 In this context, first means first in this order:
20547 \begin_inset space ~
20559 \begin_inset space ~
20564 ; see the following longtable to see how it works:
20567 \begin_layout Standard
20569 \begin_inset Tabular
20570 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="69" columns="3">
20571 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
20572 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="5cm">
20573 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
20574 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="0pt">
20575 <row endfirsthead="true">
20576 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20582 Example Phone List (ignore the names)
20587 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20590 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20596 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20599 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20606 <row endfirsthead="true">
20607 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20618 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20627 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20639 <row endhead="true">
20640 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20651 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20654 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20660 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20670 <row endhead="true">
20671 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20674 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20682 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20691 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20703 <row endfoot="true">
20704 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20715 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20724 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20727 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20735 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20746 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20755 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20758 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20766 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20769 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20777 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20786 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20797 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20800 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20808 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20817 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20820 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20828 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20839 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20848 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20859 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20870 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20879 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20890 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20901 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20910 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20913 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20921 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20932 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20941 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20952 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20963 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20966 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20972 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20983 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20994 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21003 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21006 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21014 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21017 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21025 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21034 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21045 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21056 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21065 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21076 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21079 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21087 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21096 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21107 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21118 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21127 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21130 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21138 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21149 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21158 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21169 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21180 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21189 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21200 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21211 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21220 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21231 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21242 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21245 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21251 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21262 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21273 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21282 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21293 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21304 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21313 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21324 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21335 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21344 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21355 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21366 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21375 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21386 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21389 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21397 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21406 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21417 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21428 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21437 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21448 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21459 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21468 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21479 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21482 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21490 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21499 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21510 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21513 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21521 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21530 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21541 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21544 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21552 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21561 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21572 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21583 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21592 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21603 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21614 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21617 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21623 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21634 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21645 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21648 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21654 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21657 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21665 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21676 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21679 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21685 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21688 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21696 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21705 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
21708 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21714 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21725 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21736 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21745 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21756 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21759 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21767 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21770 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21776 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21779 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21787 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21798 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21807 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21818 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21821 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21829 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21832 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21838 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21849 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21860 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21869 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21880 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21891 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21894 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21900 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21911 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21922 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21931 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21942 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21953 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21962 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21965 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21973 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21984 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21993 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22004 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22015 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22024 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22035 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22046 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22055 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22066 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22069 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22077 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22080 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22086 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22097 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22108 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22117 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22120 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22128 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22139 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22148 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22159 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22170 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22179 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22190 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22201 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22210 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22221 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22232 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22235 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22241 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22252 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22263 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22272 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22283 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22294 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22297 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22303 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22314 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22325 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22334 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22345 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22356 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22365 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22376 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22387 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22396 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22407 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22418 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22427 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22438 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22449 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22452 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22458 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22469 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22480 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22483 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22489 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22492 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22500 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22503 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22511 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22520 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22523 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22531 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22542 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22551 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22554 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22562 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22573 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22582 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22593 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22596 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22604 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22613 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22624 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22627 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22635 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22644 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22655 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22666 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22675 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22685 <row endlastfoot="true">
22686 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="block" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22689 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22697 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
22700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22706 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22709 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22723 \begin_layout Subsection
22725 \begin_inset Index idx
22728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22735 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22737 name "subsec:Table-Cells"
22744 \begin_layout Standard
22745 A table cell can contain text, inline equations, a figure, or another table.
22746 All these kinds of objects can be placed in the same cell.
22747 Font sizes and shapes can also be altered.
22748 But you can't put a special environment in a cell (like
22752 , etc.), nor set spacing options for the cell's paragraph.
22755 \begin_layout Standard
22756 To have multi-line entries in table cells, you have to declare a fixed width
22757 for the column in the table dialog.
22758 Your text is then automatically split into multiple lines and the cell
22759 is enlarged vertically when the length of the text exceeds the given width.
22763 \begin_layout Standard
22765 \begin_inset Tabular
22766 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="3">
22767 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
22768 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22769 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="3cm">
22770 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22772 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22790 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22808 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22828 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22846 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22859 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
22864 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22884 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22902 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22915 This is longer now.
22920 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22940 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22958 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22971 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
22972 This is longer now.
22977 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23003 \begin_layout Standard
23004 Cutting and pasting between tables and table cells works reasonably well.
23005 You can even cut and paste more than one row.
23009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23010 Note that you cannot paste into a multicell selection because it would not
23011 be clear what to do when pasting a single word in a selected 2×3.
23017 Selection with the mouse or with
23021 plus the arrow keys works as usual.
23022 You can also copy and paste the entire table as a single unit by starting
23023 the selection from outside the table.
23026 \begin_layout Section
23028 \begin_inset Index idx
23031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23038 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23047 \begin_layout Subsection
23051 \begin_layout Standard
23052 A float is a block of text associated with some sort of label, which doesn't
23053 have a fixed location.
23055 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23059 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23062 forward or backward a page or two, to wherever it fits best.
23070 \begin_inset space ~
23075 are also floats, because they can float to the next page when there are
23076 too many notes on the current page.
23079 \begin_layout Standard
23080 Floats make it possible to get a high quality layout.
23081 Images and tables can be distributed evenly over the pages to avoid whitespace
23082 and pages without text.
23083 As the floating often destroys the spatial context between the text and
23084 the image/table, every float can be referenced in the text.
23085 Floats are therefore numbered.
23086 Referencing is described in section
23087 \begin_inset space ~
23091 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23093 reference "sec:Cross-References"
23100 \begin_layout Standard
23101 To insert a float, use the menu
23103 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23107 A box with a caption will be inserted into your document.
23108 The label will automatically be translated to the document language in
23110 After the label you can insert the caption text.
23111 \begin_inset Index idx
23114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23120 The image or table is inserted above or below the caption in a separate
23121 paragraph within the float.
23122 To keep your \SpecialChar LyX
23123 -document readable, you can open and close the float box by
23124 left-clicking on the box label.
23125 A closed float box looks like this:
23126 \begin_inset Graphics
23127 filename clipart/float.png
23132 – a gray button with a red label.
23135 \begin_layout Standard
23136 You should insert floats in a separate paragraph to avoid possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
23138 that can occur when the surrounding text is specially formatted.
23141 \begin_layout Subsection
23143 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23145 name "subsec:Figure-Floats"
23150 \begin_inset Index idx
23153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23154 Floats ! Figure floats
23162 \begin_layout Standard
23164 \begin_inset space ~
23168 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23170 reference "fig:Platypus-distorted"
23174 was created using the menu
23176 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23177 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
23183 arg "float-insert figure"
23187 The image was inserted by setting the cursor above the caption label and
23190 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23196 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
23200 The image in the float was horizontally centered by putting the cursor
23201 to the left or right of the image and using the menu
23203 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
23205 \begin_inset space ~
23213 arg "layout-paragraph"
23219 \begin_layout Standard
23220 \begin_inset Float figure
23225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23227 \begin_inset Graphics
23228 filename clipart/platypus.eps
23237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23238 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23241 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23243 name "fig:Platypus-distorted"
23247 A severely distorted platypus in a float.
23260 \begin_layout Standard
23261 This figure float also shows how to set a label and create a cross-reference
23262 to it: Insert a label into the caption using the menu
23264 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23273 ) and refer to it using the menu
23275 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23281 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
23285 It is important to use cross-references to figure floats rather than using
23286 vague references like
23287 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23291 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23294 , because, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
23295 will reposition the floats in the final document, it might
23297 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23301 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23305 For more about cross-references, see section
23306 \begin_inset space ~
23310 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23312 reference "sec:Cross-References"
23319 \begin_layout Standard
23320 Normally only one image is inserted in a figure float, but sometimes you
23321 might want to use two images with separate subcaptions.
23322 This can be done by inserting image floats into existing image floats.
23323 Note that only the main caption of the float is added to the List of Figures
23324 as described in section
23325 \begin_inset space ~
23329 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23331 reference "subsec:List-of-Figures"
23337 \begin_inset space ~
23341 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23343 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
23347 is an example of a figure float with two images set side by side.
23348 You can also set the images one below the other.
23350 \begin_inset space ~
23354 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23356 reference "fig:Undefinable"
23361 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23363 reference "fig:Platypus"
23367 are the subfigures.
23370 \begin_layout Standard
23371 \begin_inset Float figure
23376 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23377 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
23381 \begin_inset Float figure
23386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23387 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23389 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23390 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23392 name "fig:Undefinable"
23404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23405 \begin_inset Graphics
23406 filename clipart/escher-lsd.eps
23417 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
23421 \begin_inset Float figure
23426 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23427 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23429 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23430 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23432 name "fig:Platypus"
23444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23445 \begin_inset Graphics
23446 filename clipart/platypus.eps
23458 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
23464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23465 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23468 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23470 name "fig:Two-distorted-images"
23474 Two distorted images.
23487 \begin_layout Subsection
23489 \begin_inset Index idx
23492 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23493 Floats ! Table floats
23501 \begin_layout Standard
23502 Table floats can be inserted using the menu
23504 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23505 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
23508 or the toolbar button
23511 arg "float-insert table"
23515 They have the same properties as figure floats except that the table in
23516 the float is normally placed below the caption and not above like for figures
23517 and that the label begins with “tab:”.
23519 \begin_inset space ~
23523 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23525 reference "tab:Table-float"
23532 \begin_layout Standard
23533 \begin_inset Float table
23538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23539 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23542 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23544 name "tab:Table-float"
23556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23558 \begin_inset Tabular
23559 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="3">
23560 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
23561 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23562 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23563 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23565 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23583 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23601 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23621 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23639 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23642 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23657 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23677 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23680 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23690 \begin_inset Formula $\int x^{2}dx$
23698 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23711 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
23714 \end{array}\right]$
23722 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23725 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23735 \begin_inset Formula $1+1=2$
23756 \begin_layout Subsection
23758 \begin_inset Index idx
23761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23770 \begin_layout Standard
23772 offers you further float types as well as rotated floats.
23773 It also allows you to change the float numbering scheme, to control the
23774 float placement and to change the formatting and placement of the float
23776 All these features are explained in detail with many examples in the chapter
23784 \begin_inset space ~
23792 \begin_layout Section
23794 \begin_inset Index idx
23797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23806 \begin_layout Standard
23808 provides a mechanism essentially to produce a page within a page, called
23810 Within a minipage, all the usual rules of indentation, line wrapping, etc.
23811 \begin_inset space \space{}
23818 \begin_layout Standard
23819 Minipages in \SpecialChar LyX
23820 have their own collapsible box inserted via the menu
23822 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23826 Right-clicking on the box label allows you to alter the width of the minipage
23827 and its alignment within the page.
23830 \begin_layout Standard
23832 \begin_inset Box Frameless
23842 height_special "totalheight"
23847 backgroundcolor "none"
23850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23853 This is a minipage.
23854 The text is set in an italic style.
23857 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23860 Minipages are often used for text in another language or text that needs
23861 another formatting.
23869 \begin_layout Standard
23870 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
23873 If you place two minipages side-by-side, you can use
23877 as described in section
23878 \begin_inset space ~
23882 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23884 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
23889 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
23895 \begin_layout Standard
23896 \begin_inset Box Frameless
23906 height_special "totalheight"
23911 backgroundcolor "none"
23914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23915 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
23916 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
23922 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
23926 \begin_inset Box Frameless
23936 height_special "totalheight"
23941 backgroundcolor "none"
23944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23945 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
23946 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
23954 \begin_layout Standard
23955 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
23961 \begin_layout Standard
23962 When you right-click on a minipage box, you can transform the box to another
23964 All box types and their settings are explained in detail in chapter
23971 \begin_inset space ~
23979 \begin_layout Chapter
23980 Mathematical Formulas
23981 \begin_inset Index idx
23984 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23991 \begin_inset Index idx
23994 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24010 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24023 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24025 name "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
24032 \begin_layout Standard
24033 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
24038 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
24041 \begin_layout Section
24043 \begin_inset Index idx
24046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24055 \begin_layout Standard
24056 To create a math formula, you can just click on the toolbar icon
24069 That will create a little blue rectangle, with purple markers around its
24071 That blue rectangle is the formula itself; the purple markers indicate
24072 what level of nesting within the formula you are at.
24073 You can also choose a particular formula type to insert via the
24075 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24081 \begin_layout Standard
24082 Editing the parameters of a formula and adding math constructs can be done
24086 \begin_inset space ~
24091 , that appears if the cursor is in a formula.
24094 \begin_layout Standard
24095 There are two main types of formulas, inline formulas and display formulas.
24096 Inline formulas appear within a text line, like this one:
24099 \begin_layout Standard
24100 This is a line with an inline formula
24101 \begin_inset Formula $A=B$
24107 \begin_layout Standard
24108 Displayed formulas appear outside the text like if they were in a separate
24109 paragraph, like this one:
24110 \begin_inset Formula
24117 You can only number and reference displayed formulas.
24120 \begin_layout Standard
24122 also supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
24124 For example, typing
24125 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24135 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24138 , followed by a space, in a formula will create the Greek letter
24139 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha$
24143 Typing commands might sometimes be faster than using the
24146 \begin_inset space ~
24154 \begin_layout Subsection
24155 Navigating in Formulas
24156 \begin_inset Index idx
24159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24168 \begin_layout Standard
24169 The best control over the cursor position within an existing formula is
24170 achieved with the arrow keys.
24172 uses small rectangles to indicate places where something can be inserted.
24173 The arrow keys can be used to navigate between parts of a formula.
24178 will leave a formula construct (a square root
24179 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2}$
24183 \begin_inset Formula $\left(f\right)$
24187 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
24190 \end{array}\right]$
24198 will leave the formula, placing the cursor after the formula.
24203 can be used to move horizontally in a formula; for example, through the
24204 cells of a matrix or the positions in a multi-line equation.
24207 \begin_layout Standard
24212 , printed in this document as
24213 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24217 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24221 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24224 , seems to do nothing in a formula, since it does not add a space between
24225 characters, but it does exit a nested structure.
24226 For this reason, you have to be careful about using
24231 For example, if you want
24232 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x+1}$
24240 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24250 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24254 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24259 , since in the latter case only the
24262 \begin_inset Formula $2x$
24267 will be under the square root sign:
24268 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x}+1$
24274 \begin_layout Standard
24275 You can leave many parts of a formula, like this matrix, partially filled
24277 \begin_inset Formula
24279 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
24288 If you leave a fraction only partially filled in, or a subscript with nothing
24289 in it, the results will be unpredictable, but most constructs don't mind.
24292 \begin_layout Subsection
24296 \begin_layout Standard
24297 You can select text within a formula in two different ways.
24298 Place the cursor at one end of the string of text you want, and press
24302 and a cursor movement key to select text.
24303 It will be highlighted as with regular text selection.
24304 Alternatively, you can select text with the mouse in the usual way.
24305 That text can then be cut or copied, and then pasted within any formula,
24306 but not in a normal text region in \SpecialChar LyX
24310 \begin_layout Subsection
24311 Exponents and Subscripts
24312 \begin_inset Index idx
24315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24322 \begin_inset Index idx
24325 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24334 \begin_layout Standard
24335 You can use the math panel to add super- or subscripts (buttons
24338 arg "math-superscript"
24344 arg "math-subscript"
24347 ), but it is often much easier to use a command.
24349 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
24352 , type in a formula
24355 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24365 puts the cursor back down on the base line of the expression.
24371 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2y}$
24375 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}y$
24381 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24387 If you use characters in the superscript, that could be accented with the
24389 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24393 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24396 , you have to use an extra
24400 to separate the circumflex and the character.
24401 For example, if you want
24402 \begin_inset Formula $x^{a}$
24408 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24414 Subscripts are similar: To get
24415 \begin_inset Formula $a_{1}$
24421 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24429 \begin_layout Subsection
24431 \begin_inset Index idx
24434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24443 \begin_layout Standard
24444 Create a fraction either with the command
24450 or by using the icon
24453 arg "math-insert \\frac"
24459 \begin_inset space ~
24465 You will be presented with an empty fraction.
24466 The cursor is above the fraction line.
24467 To move it to the bottom, simply press
24472 To move back up, press
24477 Any math structure can be placed in a fraction, as this example shows:
24478 \begin_inset Formula
24480 \left[\frac{1}{\left(\begin{array}{cc}
24483 \end{array}\right)}\right]
24491 \begin_layout Subsection
24493 \begin_inset Index idx
24496 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24505 \begin_layout Standard
24506 Roots can be created using the
24509 \begin_inset space ~
24517 arg "math-insert \\sqrt"
24523 arg "math-insert \\root"
24545 you can produce roots of higher orders, like cube roots, while
24551 always produces a square root.
24554 \begin_layout Subsection
24555 Operators with Limits
24556 \begin_inset Index idx
24559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24566 \begin_inset Index idx
24569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24576 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24578 name "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
24585 \begin_layout Standard
24587 \begin_inset Formula $\sum$
24591 \begin_inset Formula $\int$
24594 ) operators are very often decorated with limits.
24595 These limits can be entered in \SpecialChar LyX
24596 by entering them as you would enter a super-
24597 or subscript, directly after the symbol.
24598 The sum operator will automatically place its
24599 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24603 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24606 over and under the symbol in displayed formulas, and to the side in inline
24608 \begin_inset Formula $\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e$
24612 \begin_inset Formula
24614 \sum\nolimits _{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e
24619 Integral signs, however, will place the limits to the side in both formula
24623 \begin_layout Standard
24624 All operators with limits will be automatically re-sized when placed in
24626 The placement of the limits can be changed by placing the cursor directly
24627 behind the operator and using the menu
24629 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
24630 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
24632 \begin_inset space ~
24636 \begin_inset space ~
24650 \begin_layout Standard
24651 Certain other mathematical expressions also have this
24652 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24656 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24660 \begin_inset Index idx
24663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24670 \begin_inset Formula
24672 \lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x),
24677 which will place the
24678 \begin_inset Formula $x\rightarrow\infty$
24682 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24686 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24690 In inline formulas it looks like this:
24691 \begin_inset Formula $\lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x)$
24697 \begin_layout Standard
24698 Note that the lim-function was entered as the function macro
24705 Have a look at section
24706 \begin_inset space ~
24710 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24712 reference "subsec:Functions"
24716 for an explanation of function macros.
24719 \begin_layout Subsection
24721 \begin_inset Index idx
24724 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24733 \begin_layout Standard
24734 Most math symbols can be found in the
24737 \begin_inset space ~
24742 under one of several categories; including
24759 There are also the additional symbols provided by the American Mathematical
24763 \begin_layout Standard
24764 If you know the \SpecialChar LaTeX
24765 -command for a construct or symbol you wish to use, you
24766 don't have to use the
24769 \begin_inset space ~
24774 ; you can type the command directly into the formula.
24776 will convert it to the corresponding symbol or construct.
24779 \begin_layout Subsection
24781 \begin_inset Index idx
24784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24793 \begin_layout Standard
24794 You may want to create spaces that differ from the standard spacing that
24800 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
24806 \begin_inset space ~
24814 arg "math-insert \\space"
24818 This generates a small space, and shows a small marker on the screen.
24819 For example, the sequence
24824 \begin_inset Formula $a\,b$
24827 appears in \SpecialChar LyX
24829 \begin_inset Graphics
24830 filename clipart/SpaceMarker.png
24835 You can change the space to different sizes when you set the cursor behind
24836 the space marker and enter space again several times.
24837 With every space enter the size will be changed.
24838 Some markers for the space size appear red in \SpecialChar LyX
24839 , because they are negative
24841 Here are two examples:
24844 \begin_layout Standard
24854 \begin_inset Formula $a\quad b$
24860 \begin_layout Standard
24870 \begin_inset Formula $a\!b$
24876 \begin_layout Subsection
24878 \begin_inset Index idx
24881 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24888 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24890 name "subsec:Functions"
24897 \begin_layout Standard
24901 \begin_inset space ~
24906 contains under the button
24909 arg "math-insert \\functions"
24912 a number of function macros, such as
24913 \begin_inset Formula $\sin$
24917 \begin_inset Formula $\lim$
24925 (you can also insert them in a formula by typing
24932 Standard mathematical practice is that functions are printed upright to
24933 avoid confusions, because
24934 \begin_inset Formula $sin$
24938 \begin_inset Formula $s\cdot i\cdot n$
24944 \begin_layout Standard
24945 Using the function macros will also produce correct spacing around the function:
24947 \begin_inset Formula $a\sin x$
24951 \begin_inset Formula $asinx$
24957 \begin_layout Standard
24958 For some mathematical objects, like limits, the macro changes where subscripts
24959 are placed, as described in section
24960 \begin_inset space ~
24964 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24966 reference "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
24973 \begin_layout Subsection
24975 \begin_inset Index idx
24978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24987 \begin_layout Standard
24988 In a formula you can insert accented characters in the same way as in text
24990 This may depend on your keyboard, or the bindings file you use.
24991 You can also use \SpecialChar LaTeX
24992 commands, for example, to enter
24993 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
24996 even if your keyboard doesn't have the circumflex enabled.
24997 Our example is entered by typing
25002 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
25009 \begin_inset space ~
25013 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25015 reference "tab:Accent-names-and"
25019 shows the equivalences between the accent names and the commands.
25022 \begin_layout Standard
25023 \begin_inset Float table
25028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25029 \begin_inset Caption Standard
25031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25032 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25034 name "tab:Accent-names-and"
25038 Accent names and the corresponding commands.
25046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25048 \begin_inset Tabular
25049 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="3">
25050 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
25051 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25052 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25053 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25055 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25064 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25073 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25093 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25111 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25124 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25137 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
25147 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25165 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25178 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25191 \begin_inset Formula $\grave{a}$
25201 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25219 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25232 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25235 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25245 \begin_inset Formula $\acute{a}$
25255 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25273 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25286 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25299 \begin_inset Formula $\ddot{a}$
25309 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25327 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25340 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25353 \begin_inset Formula $\tilde{a}$
25363 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25381 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25384 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25394 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25407 \begin_inset Formula $\dot{a}$
25417 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25435 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25448 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25461 \begin_inset Formula $\breve{a}$
25471 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25489 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25492 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25502 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25505 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25515 \begin_inset Formula $\check{a}$
25525 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25543 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25556 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25569 \begin_inset Formula $\bar{a}$
25579 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25588 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25601 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25614 \begin_inset Formula $\vec{a}$
25635 \begin_layout Standard
25636 You can choose one of the accents by selecting an item from the
25639 \begin_inset space ~
25647 arg "math-insert \\hat"
25650 in the math panel; this will apply to any selection you have made within
25654 \begin_layout Section
25655 Brackets and Delimiters
25656 \begin_inset Index idx
25659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25666 \begin_inset Index idx
25669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25676 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25678 name "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
25685 \begin_layout Standard
25686 There are several brackets available through \SpecialChar LyX
25688 For some purposes, using just the keys
25693 But if you want to surround a large structure, like a matrix or a fraction,
25694 or if you have several layers of brackets, it is better to use the math
25695 toolbar delimiter icon
25698 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
25702 For example, if you construct the brackets around a matrix in this way:
25703 \begin_inset Formula
25705 \left[\begin{array}{cc}
25713 it makes it easier to see the layers of parentheses.
25714 Below, the expression on the left was entered using the delimiter icon
25718 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
25721 and the expression on the right was entered using the
25727 \begin_inset Formula
25729 \frac{1}{\left(1+\left(\frac{1}{1+\left(\frac{1}{1+x}\right)}\right)\right)}\qquad\qquad\frac{1}{(1+(\frac{1}{1+(\frac{1}{1+x})}))}
25737 \begin_layout Standard
25738 If you use the delimiter icon, the parentheses, and other brackets from
25739 that menu will automatically re-size to accommodate the size of what is
25743 \begin_layout Standard
25744 To construct brackets click on the button for the bracket you want on the
25745 left side and right side.
25746 If you use the option
25749 \begin_inset space ~
25754 , the selected bracket type will be used for the left and the right side.
25755 The selection will be shown as \SpecialChar TeX
25757 If you want one side not to have a bracket, use
25762 It will appear in \SpecialChar LyX
25763 with a dotted line, but nothing will be printed.
25766 \begin_layout Standard
25767 If you want to place brackets around existing math structures, like a square
25768 root, you can do so by first highlighting (selecting) the structure that
25769 is to go inside the brackets.
25770 Then choose the appropriate brackets for left and right and click on
25775 The most common bracket combinations (parentheses, square brackets, and
25776 braces, on both sides) can be entered more quickly using keyboard shortcuts.
25777 For example, to insert a pair of parentheses, select the structure and
25781 arg "math-delim ( )"
25787 \begin_layout Section
25788 Arrays and Multi-line Equations
25789 \begin_inset Index idx
25792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25799 \begin_inset Index idx
25802 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25809 \begin_inset Index idx
25812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25813 Math ! Multi-line Equations
25821 \begin_layout Standard
25822 Matrices are entered in \SpecialChar LyX
25826 \begin_inset space ~
25834 arg "dialog-show mathmatrix"
25838 It will open a dialog for you to choose the number of rows/columns.
25839 Here is an example:
25840 \begin_inset Formula
25842 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
25851 The parentheses aren't automatic, but you can add them as described in section
25852 \begin_inset space ~
25856 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25858 reference "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
25863 When you construct the matrix, you can decide whether the column entries
25864 will be left-, right-, or center-justified.
25865 This alignment is set in the box
25870 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25878 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25882 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25890 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25894 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25902 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25908 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25916 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25919 for every column as default.
25920 For example, the sequence
25921 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25929 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25932 means that the first column will be left-justified, the second will be
25933 centered, and the third column will be right-justified, because each letter
25934 corresponds to the relevant column.
25935 The result will look like this:
25936 \begin_inset Formula
25939 this & this\,column & this\,column\\
25940 column & has & has\,right\\
25941 has\,left\,alignment & center\,alignment & alignment
25950 \begin_layout Standard
25951 You can add more rows to an existing matrix by entering
25954 arg "newline-insert newline"
25957 while the cursor is in the matrix.
25958 Adding or deleting columns can be done via the menu
25960 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
25963 or the math toolbar.
25966 \begin_layout Standard
25967 There are other arrays used in formulas, such as distinctions of cases.
25968 It can be created with the menu
25970 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25971 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
25973 \begin_inset space ~
25985 Here is an example:
25986 \begin_inset Formula
26000 \begin_layout Standard
26001 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
26004 Multi-line formulas are created when you press
26007 arg "newline-insert newline"
26011 In an empty formula you can see that three blue boxes appear, one for each
26016 arg "newline-insert newline"
26019 in a non-empty formula, the part before the relation sign (equal sign
26020 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26024 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26027 etc.) will be inserted automatically in the first column, the relation sign
26028 is in the second column, and the rest in the third column.
26029 A new row is created by every further entry of
26032 arg "newline-insert newline"
26036 Multi-line formulas are always displayed formulas.
26037 Here is an example:
26038 \begin_inset Formula
26040 a^{2} & = & (b^{2}+c^{2})(b^{2}-c^{2})\nonumber \\
26041 a & = & \sqrt{b^{4}-c^{4}}\label{eq:asquared}
26046 Note that the middle column is designed for relation signs so structures
26047 in this column will be printed in a smaller size:
26048 \begin_inset Formula
26050 \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B}
26058 \begin_layout Standard
26059 The multi-line formula type described here is called
26066 There are other multi-line types more suitable for certain situations,
26067 for example if you want a better inter-line spacing than in formula
26068 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26070 reference "eq:asquared"
26075 The other types are described in section
26076 \begin_inset space ~
26080 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26082 reference "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
26089 \begin_layout Section
26090 Formula Numbering and Referencing
26091 \begin_inset Index idx
26094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26095 Math ! Formula numbering
26101 \begin_inset Index idx
26104 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26105 Math ! Referencing formulas
26111 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26113 name "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
26120 \begin_layout Standard
26121 To number a formula, set the cursor in the formula and use the menu
26123 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26124 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
26126 \begin_inset space ~
26130 \begin_inset space ~
26138 arg "math-number-toggle"
26142 The formula number appears in \SpecialChar LyX
26143 within parentheses.
26144 The number shown is temporary and may be different when the output is generated.
26145 The placement and format of the formula number in the output depends on
26146 the document class.
26147 In this document the number is printed together with the chapter number,
26148 separated by a dot:
26149 \begin_inset Formula
26159 arg "math-number-toggle"
26162 in a numbered formula will switch off the numbering.
26163 You can only number displayed formulas.
26166 \begin_layout Standard
26167 Multi-line formulas can be numbered line by line: Using the menu
26169 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26170 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
26172 \begin_inset space ~
26176 \begin_inset space ~
26184 arg "math-number-line-toggle"
26187 will only toggle the numbering of the line where the cursor is:
26188 \begin_inset Formula
26191 2 & = & 4-2\nonumber \\
26197 To number all lines use the shortcut
26200 arg "math-number-toggle"
26206 \begin_layout Standard
26207 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
26210 Every displayed formula can be referenced by its number using a label.
26211 A label is inserted with the menu
26213 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26222 ) when the cursor is in the formula.
26223 This opens a dialog to enter the label.
26224 It is recommended that you use the suggested
26225 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26233 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26236 as the first part of the label, because this helps later to identify the
26237 label type when you have many labels in your document.
26238 We inserted in the following example the label
26239 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26243 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26246 in the second line:
26247 \begin_inset Formula
26249 \tanh(x) & = & \frac{\sinh(x)}{\cosh(x)}\nonumber \\
26250 & = & \frac{\mathrm{e}^{2x}-1}{\mathrm{e}^{2x}+1}\label{eq:tanhExp}
26255 Every labeled line is automatically numbered.
26256 Therefore the label is shown behind the formula number.
26257 You can reference a labeled formula using the menu
26259 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26261 \begin_inset space ~
26269 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
26273 A dialog appears to choose a label you want to refer to.
26274 The reference appears in \SpecialChar LyX
26275 as a gray cross-reference box and in the output
26276 as the formula number:
26279 \begin_layout Standard
26280 This is a cross-reference to equation (
26281 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26283 reference "eq:tanhExp"
26290 \begin_layout Standard
26291 The properties of \SpecialChar LyX
26292 's cross-reference box are described in section
26293 \begin_inset space ~
26297 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26299 reference "sec:Cross-References"
26304 To delete a label, set the cursor at the end in the labeled formula and
26312 \begin_layout Section
26313 User defined math macros
26314 \begin_inset Index idx
26317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26326 \begin_layout Standard
26328 allows you to define macros for formulas which is very useful when you
26329 have equations of the same form in a document several times.
26330 Math macros are explained in section
26333 \begin_inset space ~
26345 \begin_layout Section
26349 \begin_layout Subsection
26351 \begin_inset Index idx
26354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26363 \begin_layout Standard
26364 The standard font for text is italic, for numbers the standard is roman.
26365 To set a font in a formula, use the
26368 \begin_inset space ~
26376 arg "math-insert \\font"
26379 , or enter its command, listed in table
26380 \begin_inset space ~
26384 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26386 reference "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
26393 \begin_layout Standard
26394 \begin_inset Float table
26399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26400 \begin_inset Caption Standard
26402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26403 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26405 name "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
26409 Typefaces and the corresponding commands.
26417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26419 \begin_inset Tabular
26420 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="9" columns="2">
26421 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
26422 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26423 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26425 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26434 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26445 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26448 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26455 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{Roman}$
26463 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26466 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26478 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26482 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbf{Bold}}$
26490 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26505 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26508 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26509 \begin_inset Formula $\mathit{Italic}$
26517 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26520 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26532 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26542 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{Typewriter}$
26550 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26565 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26569 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbb{BLACKBOARD}}$
26577 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26580 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26592 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26596 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{Fraktur}$
26604 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26619 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26630 \begin_inset Formula $\mathcal{CALLIGRAPHIC}$
26638 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26653 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26657 \begin_inset Formula $\mathsf{SansSerif}$
26665 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26691 \begin_layout Standard
26692 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
26695 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26700 You can only print capital letters in the typefaces
26716 \begin_layout Standard
26717 When you use a typeface, a blue box is inserted in the formula.
26718 Every character in this box will be printed in this typeface.
26723 within the box will set the cursor outside, so that you have to use a protected
26724 space when you need a space in the box.
26725 Here is an example where
26726 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26730 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26737 denotes the set of numbers:
26738 \begin_inset Formula
26740 f(x)=\sqrt{x}\:;\:x\in\mathbb{N}
26748 \begin_layout Standard
26749 The typefaces are nestable, which can cause confusion.
26750 You can, for example, put a character in
26759 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{abc\mathfrak{d}e}$
26763 \begin_inset Newline newline
26766 So it is better not to use this feature.
26769 \begin_layout Standard
26770 The typefaces have no effect on Greek letters:
26771 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{abc\delta e}$
26775 \begin_inset Newline newline
26778 You can only print them emboldened using the command
26784 , which works like the other typeface commands:
26785 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha\beta\gamma\boldsymbol{\alpha\beta\gamma}$
26791 \begin_layout Standard
26798 works for all symbols, letters, and numbers.
26801 \begin_layout Standard
26802 A number of other font options are available as well, in the menu
26804 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26805 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
26807 \begin_inset space ~
26815 \begin_layout Subsection
26817 \begin_inset Index idx
26820 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26829 \begin_layout Standard
26830 Typefaces are useful for entering some characters in some given font, but
26832 For typing longer pieces of text use the math text, which is obtained using
26836 \begin_inset space ~
26840 \begin_inset space ~
26848 \begin_inset space ~
26856 arg "math-insert \\font"
26860 Math text appears in \SpecialChar LyX
26861 in black instead of blue.
26862 You can use spaces and accents in math text as in normal text.
26863 Here is an example:
26864 \begin_inset Formula
26867 x & \mbox{if I say so}\\
26868 -x & \mbox{under Umständen}
26877 \begin_layout Subsection
26879 \begin_inset Index idx
26882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26891 \begin_layout Standard
26892 There are four font styles (relative sizes) used in math-mode, which are
26893 automatically chosen in most situations.
26911 For most characters,
26919 are actually the same size, but fractions, superscripts and subscripts,
26920 and certain other structures, are set larger in
26925 Except for some operators, which resize themselves to accommodate various
26926 situations, all text will be set in the styles that \SpecialChar LaTeX
26927 thinks are appropriate.
26928 These choices can be overridden by using the math panel button
26931 arg "math-insert \\style"
26935 A box for the size will be created in which you can insert the math structure.
26936 For example, you can set
26937 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{1}{2}$
26940 , which is normally in
26949 \begin_inset Formula ${\displaystyle \frac{1}{2}}$
26953 The four styles are used in the following example:
26956 \begin_layout Standard
26957 \begin_inset Formula $displaystyle$
26961 \begin_inset Formula ${\textstyle textstyle}$
26965 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptstyle scriptstyle}$
26969 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptscriptstyle scriptscriptstyle}$
26975 \begin_layout Standard
26976 All these math-mode font sizes are relative so that if the whole math inset
26977 is set in a particular size with the menu
26979 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26981 \begin_inset space ~
26986 , all sizes in the formula will be adjusted relative to this size.
26987 Similarly, if the base font size of the document is changed, all fonts
26988 will be adjusted to correspond.
26989 As an example here is a formula in the font size
26990 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26994 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27000 \begin_layout Standard
27004 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{e}=\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}$
27010 \begin_layout Section
27011 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
27013 \begin_inset Index idx
27016 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27023 \begin_inset Index idx
27026 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27035 \begin_layout Standard
27037 supports the packages provided by the American Mathematical Society (AMS)
27038 that are in common use.
27041 \begin_layout Subsection
27042 Enabling AMS-Support
27045 \begin_layout Standard
27046 You can make the facilities of the AMS-packages explicitly available in
27047 the document by selecting the checkbox
27050 \begin_inset space ~
27054 \begin_inset space ~
27058 \begin_inset space ~
27065 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27069 \begin_inset Index idx
27072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27073 Document ! Settings
27081 \begin_inset space ~
27087 AMS is needed for many math-constructs; so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
27088 -errors in formulas,
27089 ensure that you have enabled AMS.
27092 \begin_layout Subsection
27094 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27096 name "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
27101 \begin_inset Index idx
27104 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27105 Math ! Multi-line Equations
27113 \begin_layout Standard
27114 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
27115 provides a selection of different formula types.
27117 allows you to choose between
27138 We refer you to the AMS-documentation,
27139 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27146 , for an explanation of these formula types.
27149 \begin_layout Chapter
27153 \begin_layout Section
27155 \begin_inset Index idx
27158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27165 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27167 name "sec:Cross-References"
27174 \begin_layout Standard
27175 One of \SpecialChar LyX
27176 's strengths is cross-references.
27177 You can reference every section, float, footnote, formula, and list in
27179 To reference a document part, you have to insert a label into it.
27180 The label is used as an anchor and a name for the reference.
27181 We want for example to refer to the second item of the following list:
27184 \begin_layout Enumerate
27188 \begin_layout Enumerate
27189 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27191 name "enu:Second-item"
27198 \begin_layout Enumerate
27202 \begin_layout Standard
27203 First we insert a label into the second item with the menu
27205 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27208 or by pressing the toolbar button
27215 A gray label box like this:
27216 \begin_inset Graphics
27217 filename clipart/label.png
27221 is inserted and the label window pops up asking for the label text.
27223 offers as text the first words of the item with a prefix, in our case
27225 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27233 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27238 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27246 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27250 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27254 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27258 The prefix depends on the document part where the label is inserted; for
27259 example, if you insert a label into a section heading, the suggested prefix
27261 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27269 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27275 \begin_layout Standard
27276 To reference the item, we refer to its label using the menu
27278 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27281 or the toolbar button
27284 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
27288 A gray cross-reference box like this:
27289 \begin_inset Graphics
27290 filename clipart/reference.png
27294 is inserted and the cross-reference window appears showing all the labels
27296 We can now sort the labels alphabetically and then choose the entry
27297 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27305 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27309 At the position of the cross-reference box the item number will appear
27313 \begin_layout Standard
27314 As an alternative to
27316 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27319 , you can right-click on a label and in the popup menu select
27324 The cross-reference to this label is now in the clipboard and can be pasted
27325 to the actual cursor position via the menu
27327 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
27339 \begin_layout Standard
27340 Here is our cross-reference: Item
27341 \begin_inset space ~
27345 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27347 reference "enu:Second-item"
27354 \begin_layout Standard
27355 It is recommended to use a protected space
27359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27360 described in section
27361 \begin_inset space ~
27365 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27367 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
27376 between the cross-reference name and the cross-reference to avoid ugly
27377 line breaks between them.
27380 \begin_layout Standard
27381 There are eight formats of cross-references:
27384 \begin_layout Description
27385 <reference>: prints the number, this is the default:
27386 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27388 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
27395 \begin_layout Description
27396 (<reference>): prints the number within two parentheses, this is the style
27397 normally used to reference formulas, especially when the reference name
27399 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27403 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27407 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27409 reference "eq:tanhExp"
27416 \begin_layout Description
27417 <page>: prints the page number: Page
27418 \begin_inset space ~
27422 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27423 LatexCommand pageref
27424 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
27431 \begin_layout Description
27433 \begin_inset space ~
27437 \begin_inset space ~
27440 <page>: prints the text “on page” and the page number:
27441 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27442 LatexCommand vpageref
27443 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
27448 \begin_inset Newline newline
27451 If the label is on the same page, it prints “on this page”; if the label
27452 is on a facing page in a two-sided document, it prints “on the facing page”;
27453 if it is on the previous page which is not a facing page, it prints “on
27454 the previous page”; if it is on the next page which is not a facing page,
27455 it prints “on the next page”.
27456 The wording of the printed text also depends on the used document class.
27459 \begin_layout Description
27461 \begin_inset space ~
27465 \begin_inset space ~
27469 \begin_inset space ~
27472 <page>: prints the number, the text “on page” and the page number:
27473 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27475 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
27480 \begin_inset Newline newline
27483 If the label is on the same page, this format behaves like
27489 ; otherwise it behaves like
27493 \begin_inset space ~
27497 \begin_inset space ~
27506 \begin_layout Description
27508 \begin_inset space ~
27511 reference: prints a self defined cross-reference format.
27512 \begin_inset Newline newline
27516 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
27519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27524 This feature is only available when you have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27534 \begin_inset Index idx
27537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27539 packages ! prettyref
27545 \begin_inset Index idx
27548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27550 packages ! refstyle
27561 \begin_inset Newline newline
27564 You can select which \SpecialChar LaTeX
27565 -package should be used for this feature by setting
27568 Use refstyle (not prettyref) for cross-references
27572 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27573 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
27581 is the default and preferred because
27585 supports only English documents.
27586 The format is specified by using the command
27598 (refstyle) in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27599 preamble of the document.
27600 For example redefining all references to figures (which have the label
27602 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27610 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27618 \begin_inset Newline newline
27625 newref{fig}{refcmd={Image on page
27630 \begin_inset Newline newline
27641 predefines reference formats for all available types.
27642 This is especially true for the wide variety of mathematical `theorem'
27644 So if you want to make formatted references to, say, Propositions, then
27645 you will need to define the relevant format yourself.
27650 , you might do so as follows:
27651 \begin_inset Newline newline
27658 newrefformat{prop}{Proposition
27663 \begin_inset Newline newline
27666 For more information about defining formatted references, have a look at
27667 the package documentation
27668 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27670 key "prettyref,refstyle"
27676 \begin_inset Newline newline
27687 will be available with formatted references only if you are using the
27694 \begin_layout Description
27696 \begin_inset space ~
27699 reference: prints the caption or the name of the reference:
27700 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27701 LatexCommand nameref
27702 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
27709 \begin_layout Description
27711 \begin_inset space ~
27714 only: prints only the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27715 label for the reference:
27716 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27717 LatexCommand labelonly
27718 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
27723 \begin_inset Newline newline
27726 This allows for customization, using \SpecialChar TeX
27727 Code, if you want to issue a command
27728 that \SpecialChar LyX
27734 , then you may want to use the
27737 \begin_inset space ~
27742 option, which will output only the part of the reference following the
27744 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27748 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27752 This is the form needed for e.
27753 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
27757 \begin_inset space \space{}
27764 's range commands.The number and current page of the referenced document
27765 part in the output is automatically calculated by \SpecialChar LaTeX
27767 The varieties are adjusted in the field
27771 of the cross-reference window, that appears when you click on the cross-referen
27775 \begin_layout Standard
27776 You can only use the style
27780 to reference numbered document parts, while the reference style
27784 is always possible.
27787 \begin_layout Standard
27788 If you want to reference a section, put the label in the section heading;
27789 for floats put the label in the caption; for footnotes put the label in
27791 Referencing formulas is explained in section
27792 \begin_inset space ~
27796 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27798 reference "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
27805 \begin_layout Standard
27806 Right-clicking on a cross-reference opens a context menu.
27810 \begin_inset space ~
27814 \begin_inset space ~
27819 sets the cursor before the referenced label.
27820 This entry will be renamed in the context menu of the label to
27823 \begin_inset space ~
27828 so that you can use it to set the cursor back to the cross-reference.
27829 You can also go back with the toolbar button
27832 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
27838 \begin_layout Standard
27839 You can change labels at any time.
27840 References to the changed label will automatically be updated so that you
27841 do not need to think about this.
27844 \begin_layout Standard
27845 If a cross-reference refers to a non-existent label, you will see in \SpecialChar LyX
27847 in the cross-reference label and two question marks in the output instead
27851 \begin_layout Standard
27852 References are described in detail in the section
27853 \begin_inset space ~
27863 \begin_inset space ~
27871 \begin_layout Section
27872 Table of Contents and other Listings
27873 \begin_inset Index idx
27876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27883 \begin_inset Index idx
27886 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27887 Navigating ! Outline
27893 \begin_inset Index idx
27896 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27903 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27912 \begin_layout Subsection
27914 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27916 name "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
27923 \begin_layout Standard
27924 The Table of Contents (TOC) is inserted with the menu
27926 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27927 List/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
27929 \begin_inset space ~
27933 \begin_inset space ~
27939 It is displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
27941 If you click on it, the
27945 window appears, showing you the TOC entries as outline, which allows you
27946 to move and rearrange sections in your documents.
27947 So this operation is an alternative to the menu
27949 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
27951 \begin_inset space ~
27956 that is described in section
27957 \begin_inset space ~
27961 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27963 reference "subsec:The-Outliner"
27970 \begin_layout Standard
27971 The TOC in the document output lists every numbered section automatically.
27972 If you have declared a short title for a section heading, as described
27974 \begin_inset space ~
27978 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27980 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
27984 , it will be used in the TOC instead of the section heading.
27986 \begin_inset space ~
27990 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27992 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
27996 describes how the level is adjusted that defines which section types are
27998 Unnumbered sections are not listed in the TOC.
28001 \begin_layout Subsection
28002 List of Figures, Tables, Listings and Algorithms
28003 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28005 name "subsec:List-of-Figures"
28012 \begin_layout Standard
28013 Table, figure, listings and algorithm lists are very much like the table
28015 You can insert them via the
28017 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28021 The list entries are the float captions and the float number.
28024 \begin_layout Section
28025 URLs and Hyperlinks
28026 \begin_inset Index idx
28029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28036 \begin_inset Index idx
28039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28048 \begin_layout Subsection
28050 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28059 \begin_layout Standard
28060 Links to web pages or email addresses can be inserted via the menu
28062 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28068 \begin_layout Standard
28069 Here is an example URL: \SpecialChar LyX
28071 \begin_inset Flex URL
28074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28084 \begin_layout Standard
28085 You cannot change the style of the link text, the URL text will always be
28091 To be able to format the URL text, use hyperlinks as explained in the next
28095 \begin_layout Standard
28096 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
28099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28104 URLs must not end with a backslash, otherwise you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
28113 \begin_layout Subsection
28115 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28117 name "subsec:Hyperlinks"
28124 \begin_layout Standard
28125 Hyperlinks can be inserted with the menu
28127 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28130 or with the toolbar button
28137 The appearing dialog has two fields:
28146 The name is the printed text for the hyperlink.
28147 The hyperlink type can be a weblink like this:
28148 \begin_inset CommandInset href
28150 name "LyX's homepage"
28151 target "http://www.lyx.org"
28156 , an Email address like this:
28157 \begin_inset CommandInset href
28159 name "lyx-docs mailing list"
28160 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org?subject=LyX's documentation"
28166 , or a link to a file.
28169 \begin_layout Standard
28170 You can start applications via a hyperlink when you insert a weblink by
28172 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28180 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28183 to the link target.
28186 \begin_layout Standard
28187 Hyperlinks will automatically be hyphenated if necessary in the PDF output,
28188 and become clickable in the DVI and PDF-output.
28189 To set the format of the link text, highlight the hyperlink inset and use
28190 the text style dialog.
28191 This is for example a hyperlink with bold sans serif text:
28195 \begin_inset CommandInset href
28197 name "LyX's homepage"
28198 target "http://www.lyx.org"
28206 \begin_layout Standard
28207 The link text color can be changed, when the option
28211 is set in the PDF Properties dialog (menu
28213 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28214 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
28218 The link text is for example set in this document to blue by adding the
28220 \begin_inset Newline newline
28228 \begin_inset Newline newline
28235 in the PDF Properties dialog.
28238 \begin_layout Section
28240 \begin_inset Index idx
28243 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28250 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28252 name "sec:Appendices"
28259 \begin_layout Standard
28260 Appendices are created with the menu
28262 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28264 \begin_inset space ~
28268 \begin_inset space ~
28274 This menu sets the document from the current cursor position to the end
28275 as the appendix part of the book.
28276 This part is marked with a red borderline.
28279 \begin_layout Standard
28280 Every chapter (or section) within the appendix part is treated as an appendix,
28281 numbered with a capital Latin letter.
28282 The appendix subsections are numbered with this letter followed by a dot
28283 and the subsection number.
28284 All appendix sections can be referenced as if they were normal sections,
28288 \begin_layout Standard
28290 \begin_inset space ~
28294 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28296 reference "chap:Credits"
28301 \begin_inset space ~
28305 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28307 reference "subsec:Export"
28314 \begin_layout Section
28316 \begin_inset Index idx
28319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28326 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28328 name "sec:Bibliography"
28335 \begin_layout Standard
28336 There are two ways of generating the bibliography in a \SpecialChar LyX
28338 You can include a bibliography database, which is explained in sec.
28339 \begin_inset space ~
28343 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28345 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
28352 , or you can insert the bibliography manually, using the paragraph environment
28357 , which is described in the following section (but see also sec.
28358 \begin_inset space ~
28362 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28364 reference "subsec:Biblio_environment"
28369 If you want anything other than the numerical citations that are used in
28370 this document, such as author-year citations, and if you have more than
28371 a handful of references, then you should seriously consider
28375 using a bibliography database.
28378 \begin_layout Standard
28379 In order to demonstrate the difference between these two approaches, we
28380 use two bibliographies in this document, a
28384 environment and a database-generated bibliography.
28385 As you can see, the bibliography that is created from a database lists
28386 only the database entries that are referenced in the document.
28387 In other words, the database approach relieves you, amongst other things,
28388 from the burden to check which entries you have actually cited.
28391 \begin_layout Subsection
28392 The Bibliography Environment
28393 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28395 name "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
28402 \begin_layout Standard
28407 environment, every paragraph begins with a gray bibliography box labeled
28409 If you click on it, you will get a dialog in which you can set a
28418 The key is the symbolic name by which you will refer to this bibliography
28420 Each entry needs to be given a unique key, which is one word consisting
28421 of ASCII characters only.
28425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28427 \begin_inset CommandInset href
28430 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ASCII#Character_set"
28436 \begin_inset Newline newline
28440 \begin_inset Flex URL
28443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28445 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ASCII
28457 For example, our second entry in the bibliography is a book about \SpecialChar LaTeX
28460 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28464 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28467 , a short form of its title, as the key.
28470 \begin_layout Standard
28471 You can cross-reference a bibliography entry using the menu
28473 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28476 or the toolbar button
28479 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
28483 A citation reference box is inserted and a citation window will appear
28484 containing the available citations.
28485 Select one or more keys from the list and
28495 The citation reference box will be labeled with the referenced key(s).
28496 If you click on the box, the citation window will appear and you can change
28500 \begin_layout Standard
28501 Citation references appear in the output as the number of the bibliography
28502 entry with surrounding brackets.
28507 for the entry, the label will appear instead of the number.
28508 Here are two examples; the first without a label, the second with the label
28510 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28514 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28520 \begin_layout Standard
28524 Companion Second Edition
28527 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28529 key "latexcompanion"
28537 \begin_layout Standard
28538 The \SpecialChar LyX
28539 -Team members are listed in the Credits:
28540 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28550 \begin_layout Standard
28551 You can also produce author-year or author-number citations, using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28558 \begin_inset Index idx
28561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28569 In order to do so, the label needs to be given the form
28570 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28574 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28578 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28581 Author A and Author B(Year)
28582 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28589 a blank between the author(s) and the opening parenthesis that delimits
28591 Then, if you select
28594 \begin_inset space ~
28599 in the document settings
28600 \begin_inset Index idx
28603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28604 Document ! Settings
28611 Bibliography\SpecialChar menuseparator
28613 \begin_inset space ~
28619 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28621 reference "subsec:Citation-Format"
28628 ), you can select between different author-year or author-number styles.
28631 \begin_layout Standard
28632 To align all entries in the bibliography environment you can set a longest
28635 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
28637 \begin_inset space ~
28645 arg "layout-paragraph"
28649 All entries are then indented in the output by the width of the given label.
28652 \begin_layout Subsection
28653 Bibliography databases
28654 \begin_inset Index idx
28657 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28658 Bibliography ! Databases
28664 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28666 name "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
28673 \begin_layout Standard
28674 Bibliography databases are useful if you use the same references in different
28679 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28680 They are also useful for keeping a database of articles and notes concerning
28682 Most of the database programs mentioned below allow you to store annotations
28683 and reviews along with bibliographical information.
28688 It also makes it very easy to have a uniform layout for all bibliography
28690 You can collect the bibliography of all relevant books and articles of
28691 your working field in a database.
28692 This database can be used for different documents, and by default only
28693 the entries cited in a particular document will appear in the bibliography
28694 list for that document.
28695 This relieves you of the need to keep track of which articles and books
28699 \begin_layout Standard
28700 The database is a text file with the file extension
28701 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28709 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28712 , containing the bibliography in a special format.
28713 The format is explained in
28714 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28721 and in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28723 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28725 key "Mittelbach,Kopka,Lamport"
28731 The file can be created using any text editor, but normally one uses a
28732 special program to create and edit the entries in the database.
28733 A list of such programs is maintained on the \SpecialChar LyX
28735 \begin_inset Flex URL
28738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28740 http://wiki.lyx.org/BibTeX/Programs
28748 \begin_layout Standard
28750 supports two different approaches to use bibliography databases in a document.
28751 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28752 is the classic technique that has been the only way to use such databases
28754 It is quite established and mature and there is a huge range of existing
28756 But it has its drawbacks, especially when it comes to more complex bibliographi
28757 c needs and support for specific languages and scripts.
28758 Those are addressed by
28763 \begin_inset Index idx
28766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28768 packages ! biblatex
28774 It reads the same database format than Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28775 (although it has been significantly
28776 extended beyond Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28781 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28786 can handle any classic Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28787 database, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28788 might conversely fail to correctly
28789 handle databases that use specific
28798 , but it uses a different framework to generate citations and references
28802 \begin_layout Standard
28803 To select if Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28808 should be used, set in the document settings (menu
28810 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28814 \begin_inset Index idx
28817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28818 Document ! Settings
28830 \begin_inset space ~
28835 to a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28843 \begin_layout Subsubsection
28844 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28846 \begin_inset Index idx
28849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28850 Bibliography ! Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28859 \begin_layout Standard
28860 To access a database via Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28863 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28868 TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
28870 \begin_inset space ~
28876 A window will appear in which you can add one or more databases and select
28877 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28885 Add bibliography to TOC
28887 adds a table of contents entry for the bibliography.
28892 drop box you can select whether to include all the entries in the database
28893 in the document or just the cited references.
28896 \begin_layout Standard
28897 The Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28898 style file is a text file with the file extension
28899 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28907 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28910 that controls how the bibliography entries will appear.
28911 Your \SpecialChar LaTeX
28912 distribution should provide several of these, and many publishers
28913 provide their own style files, so that you don't have to take care of the
28915 It is of course possible to write your own style file, but this is something
28920 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28921 For information on how this is done, have a look at
28922 \begin_inset Newline newline
28926 \begin_inset CommandInset href
28928 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxhak.pdf"
28938 In this document we used the Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28943 , which provides an alpha-numeric style in accordance with the German Standards
28947 \begin_layout Standard
28948 Inserting a citation reference works as described in the previous section.
28951 \begin_layout Subsubsection
28953 \begin_inset Index idx
28956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28957 Bibliography ! Biblatex
28963 \begin_inset Index idx
28966 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28968 packages ! biblatex
28976 \begin_layout Standard
28977 Accessing a database via
28981 is almost identical to Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28984 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28989 TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
28991 \begin_inset space ~
28997 In contrary to Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28998 you cannot select a
29003 The other dialog options are the same as with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29007 \begin_layout Standard
29012 has two different style files: a bibliography style file (text file with
29014 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29022 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29025 ) controls how the bibliography entries will look like and a citation style
29026 file (text file with the file extension
29027 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29035 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29038 ) controls the look of the citation references in the text.
29039 Usually such style files come in pairs and it makes sense to use matching
29041 It is nevertheless possible to mix any citation style with any bibliography
29045 \begin_layout Standard
29050 styles are not set in the
29053 \begin_inset space ~
29058 dialog, but in the document settings.
29059 \begin_inset Index idx
29062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29063 Document ! Settings
29068 However, in the dialog in the
29072 field, which is only visible if you use
29076 , you can enter options that determine how the bibliography is printed (for
29077 example how its heading will appear).
29078 These options are deescribed in detail in the
29083 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29093 \begin_layout Standard
29094 Inserting a citation reference works as described in section
29095 \begin_inset space ~
29099 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29101 reference "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
29111 \begin_layout Subsubsection
29112 Bibliography Processors
29115 \begin_layout Standard
29116 To generate the bibliography from a database, \SpecialChar LyX
29117 uses a bibliography processor,
29118 that is an external program that reads the database, sorts the citations
29119 and processes the data in a way it can be included in the document.
29120 The classic program is called Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29122 It has the advantage that it is very mature and widespread, but the disadvantag
29123 e that it has severe limitations, due to its age.
29126 \begin_layout Standard
29127 Meanwhile, some alternatives have been developed that address some of these
29129 LyX natively supports some of them and lets you select a custom processor.
29130 You can do this on a general level in
29132 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
29133 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
29134 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
29137 or for individual documents in
29139 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29140 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29144 The following variants are available by default:
29147 \begin_layout Description
29148 biber a specific, modern processor
29149 \begin_inset Index idx
29152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29159 developed exclusively for
29163 (it does not work with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29169 provides full Unicode support, unlimited memory and many specific features
29174 makes use of; if you use the
29178 approach, it is strongly recommended to use
29185 \begin_layout Description
29186 bibtex the standard; does not allow special characters in bibliography entries
29187 that are not possible to encode in a 7-bit encoding, limited memory, works
29188 with all bibliography packages, although it will probably fail with
29192 bibliographies due to the limited memory.
29195 \begin_layout Description
29196 bibtex8 allows all characters that are possible to encode in an 8-bit encoding
29197 (but no Unicode support), larger memory than
29201 , works with all bibliography packages, although more complex
29205 bibliographies will exceed its limits, and not all
29209 features are supported.
29212 \begin_layout Standard
29213 By default (with the
29219 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29220 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29233 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
29234 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
29235 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
29238 ), \SpecialChar LyX
29239 selects an appropriate (available) processor for the current bibliography
29252 for Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29253 -based bibliography styles).
29254 This should suit most needs.
29257 \begin_layout Standard
29258 In Japanese documents, a specific processor is used.
29259 By default this is pBib\SpecialChar TeX
29260 (in \SpecialChar LyX
29265 ), a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29266 variant specifically aimed at Japanese.
29267 You can adjust it in
29269 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
29270 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
29271 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
29277 \begin_layout Standard
29278 Selected bibliography processors can be controlled with options that you
29279 can add below the selection.
29280 Before adding options, it is strongly recommended that you read the manual
29281 of Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29287 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29297 \begin_layout Subsubsection
29301 \begin_layout Standard
29303 supports some specific tasks such as sectioned bibliographies and multiple
29305 These are explained in detail in section
29307 Customizing Bibliographies
29311 with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29316 Additional Features
29321 \begin_layout Subsection
29323 \begin_inset Index idx
29326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29327 Bibliography ! Citation format
29333 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29335 name "subsec:Citation-Format"
29342 \begin_layout Standard
29343 Many different citation formats are common, e.
29344 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29348 \begin_inset space \space{}
29351 numerical citation (as
29352 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29356 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29359 like in this document), alpha-numerical citations (as
29360 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29364 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29367 ) or author-year citations (as
29368 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29372 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29377 supports these formats via specific citation packages and their style
29381 \begin_layout Standard
29382 By default a simple numeric citation style is used.
29385 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29386 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29390 \begin_inset Index idx
29393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29394 Document ! Settings
29399 you have a range of other options, depending on your preferred bibliography
29405 environment your only choice besides manual formatting of the bibliography
29406 labels, is there to use
29409 \begin_inset space ~
29420 \begin_inset space ~
29425 which gives you author-year and author-numerical citations (see above
29426 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29428 reference "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
29435 \begin_layout Standard
29436 With a bibliography database (see
29437 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29439 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
29446 ) one has in contrary to the
29450 environment full access to the formatting styles.
29451 These style formats are available:
29454 \begin_layout Description
29456 \begin_inset space ~
29459 (BibTeX) the default Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29460 -based approached without any additional packages
29461 (simple numeric citations).
29464 \begin_layout Description
29465 Biblatex loads the package
29470 \begin_inset Index idx
29473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29475 packages ! biblatex
29480 and lets you select a style in the dropdown boxes
29482 Biblatex citation style
29486 Biblatex bibliography style
29489 Options to the package
29493 can be entered in the
29500 \begin_layout Description
29502 \begin_inset space ~
29506 \begin_inset space ~
29509 mode) loads the package
29513 with the natbib compatibility mode.
29514 This is a specific variant for users who switch an existing document that
29526 behavior very closely.
29531 this option has some additional styles.
29536 styles are also supported by this variant.
29539 \begin_layout Description
29541 \begin_inset space ~
29544 (BibTeX) loads the package
29549 \begin_inset Index idx
29552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29559 which provides author-year styles particularly suited for law studies.
29562 \begin_layout Description
29564 \begin_inset space ~
29567 (BibTeX) loads the package
29572 \begin_inset Index idx
29575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29582 which provides citation styles particularly suited for the humanities.
29585 \begin_layout Standard
29594 style formats provide the choice between author-year and author-numerical
29596 You have to select one style in the dropdown box
29605 formats, this only affects the appearance in the \SpecialChar LyX
29607 Whether the output uses numerical, author-year or another format such as
29608 alpha-numerical depends only on the selected
29610 Biblatex citation style
29613 However, when switching between Author-year and Author-number, a suitable
29619 , on the other hand, the dialog selection will ultimately determine the
29623 \begin_layout Standard
29624 For any author-year and author-numerical selection, multiple style variants
29625 are available in the
29630 Some selections also provide further options like the option to uppercase
29631 a name prefix such as
29632 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29636 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29640 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29644 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29647 ) or to expand or reduce the number of displayed others (i.
29648 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29652 \begin_inset space \space{}
29656 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29660 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29667 \begin_layout Standard
29668 In the citation dialog you can also set text to appear after a citation
29670 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29674 page numbers, which will then be formatted according to the style's needs
29676 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29681 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29685 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29689 Here is a simple example where the text
29690 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29694 \begin_inset space ~
29698 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29701 appears after the reference:
29704 \begin_layout Quote
29706 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29709 key "latexcompanion"
29717 \begin_layout Standard
29718 All styles except for
29722 also provide the feature to add text that precedes the reference (such
29724 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29728 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29732 This text is then also included in the parentheses, if the style requires
29736 \begin_layout Standard
29737 Note that these pre- and postnotes apply to the whole citation.
29738 So if you refer to multiple references at once, the prenote will precede
29739 the first citation in the list, the postnote will follow the last.
29744 styles allow to add pre- and postnotes to any individual reference in a
29745 multi-citation (so-called
29746 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29749 qualified citation lists
29750 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29756 If you use such a style and if the current reference includes multiple
29761 dialog will display three columns in the field
29768 \begin_inset space ~
29776 \begin_inset space ~
29784 \begin_inset space ~
29790 If you double-click on an item's
29793 \begin_inset space ~
29801 \begin_inset space ~
29806 field, you can add such individual pre- and postnotes.
29809 General text before
29815 fields you can add pre- and postnotes that apply to the whole list.
29818 \begin_layout Section
29820 \begin_inset Index idx
29823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29830 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29839 \begin_layout Standard
29840 An index entry is created if you use the menu
29842 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29844 \begin_inset space ~
29849 or the toolbar button
29856 A box is inserted containing the text that appears in the index.
29857 The word where the cursor is in or the currently highlighted text is proposed
29858 by \SpecialChar LyX
29859 as the index entry.
29862 \begin_layout Standard
29863 The index list is inserted in the document with the menu
29865 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29866 List/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
29868 \begin_inset space ~
29874 A light blue box labeled
29875 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29883 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29886 will show the place where the index is printed in the output.
29887 The index list box is not clickable like other \SpecialChar LyX
29891 \begin_layout Standard
29892 We give a short overview of the index commands in the next subsections.
29893 For a detailed description of \SpecialChar LaTeX
29894 's index mechanism, have a look at one of
29895 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29897 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29899 key "latexcompanion,latexguide,latexbook"
29907 \begin_layout Subsection
29908 Grouping Index Entries
29909 \begin_inset Index idx
29912 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29921 \begin_layout Standard
29922 Index entries are often grouped to offer the reader a fast search in the
29924 We want to group for example the index entries for itemized and enumerated
29925 lists under the entry
29926 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29930 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29934 First we create the entry
29935 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29939 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29943 \begin_inset space ~
29947 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29949 reference "subsec:Lists"
29954 In the text field for the itemized list index entry in section
29955 \begin_inset space ~
29959 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29961 reference "sec:Itemize"
29965 , we insert the command
29968 \begin_layout Standard
29974 \begin_layout Standard
29978 \begin_layout Standard
29984 \begin_layout Standard
29985 for the enumerated list in section
29986 \begin_inset space ~
29990 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29992 reference "sec:Enumerate"
29999 \begin_layout Standard
30000 The exclamation mark
30001 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30005 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30008 marks the grouping levels.
30009 You can have three levels; every index level is indented a bit more.
30010 An index entry for the higher levels is not required.
30011 If we don't have an index entry for
30012 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30016 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30019 , it will be printed anyway, but without a page number.
30022 \begin_layout Subsection
30024 \begin_inset Index idx
30027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30028 Index ! Page ranges
30036 \begin_layout Standard
30037 Normally an index entry will appear with the page number of the indexed
30039 But sometimes you want to index more pages under the same entry.
30040 For example, if we want to index the paragraph environments, we create
30041 an index entry in section
30042 \begin_inset space ~
30046 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30048 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
30055 \begin_layout Standard
30058 Paragraph environments|(
30061 \begin_layout Standard
30062 and another entry at the end of section
30063 \begin_inset space ~
30067 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30069 reference "subsec:LyX-Code"
30076 \begin_layout Standard
30079 Paragraph environments|)
30082 \begin_layout Standard
30084 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30092 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30096 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30104 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30107 respectively start and end the index range.
30108 You can also add the same index entry at different places in the document.
30109 They appear in the output under one entry with a comma separated list of
30110 the pages of the indexed document parts.
30111 An example is the index entry
30112 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30115 Document ! Settings
30116 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30122 \begin_layout Subsection
30124 \begin_inset Index idx
30127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30128 Index ! Cross referencing
30136 \begin_layout Standard
30137 It is also possible to refer to another index entry.
30138 We referred for example in the index entry
30139 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30143 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30147 \begin_inset space ~
30151 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30153 reference "subsec:Image-Formats"
30157 ) to the index entry
30158 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30162 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30165 in the same section using the entry
30168 \begin_layout Standard
30171 GIF|see{Image formats}
30174 \begin_layout Standard
30175 where the braces have to be inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
30177 The text within the braces is the referenced entry.
30178 The reference will appear in the output without a page number.
30181 \begin_layout Subsection
30183 \begin_inset Index idx
30186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30187 Index ! Entry order
30195 \begin_layout Standard
30196 If you use accented characters in the index entry the entries might not
30197 follow the rules for the index order.
30198 The index entries are sorted alphabetically but \SpecialChar LaTeX
30203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30204 The index generating is done in the background by an extra program, see
30206 \begin_inset space ~
30210 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30212 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
30221 does not know how to sort accents in different languages.
30222 We have created as an example the three dummy index entries
30223 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30227 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30231 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30235 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30239 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30243 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30247 \begin_inset Index idx
30250 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30251 Dummy entries ! maïs
30257 \begin_inset Index idx
30260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30261 Dummy entries ! maître
30267 \begin_inset Index idx
30270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30271 Dummy entries ! maïs@maison
30276 They will be sorted in the order maïs, maître, maison but we want the order
30277 maïs, maison, maître.
30278 To achieve this, we use the command
30281 \begin_layout Standard
30284 previous entry@current entry
30287 \begin_layout Standard
30288 In our case we want to have
30289 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30293 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30297 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30301 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30304 and write therefore for the index entry of maison:
30307 \begin_layout Standard
30313 \begin_layout Standard
30314 The previous entry need not be a real existing entry.
30315 You can also use another word to tell \SpecialChar LaTeX
30317 See the next subsection for an example.
30320 \begin_layout Standard
30321 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
30327 \begin_layout Standard
30328 In some cases the index entry order is not correct when you are using the
30333 to generate the index (see section
30334 \begin_inset space ~
30338 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30340 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
30349 would for example print the index entry for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30350 -package aeguill in section
30351 \begin_inset space ~
30355 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30357 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
30361 after the index entries of the other \SpecialChar LaTeX
30362 -packages although all these index
30363 commands start with
30364 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30373 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30377 The reason is that the index entry for aeguill is in a footnote.
30382 bug, add these commands to the preamble of your document:
30385 \begin_layout Standard
30397 \begin_layout Standard
30409 \begin_layout Subsection
30411 \begin_inset Index idx
30414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30415 Index ! Entry layout
30423 \begin_layout Standard
30424 You can change the appearance of index entries via the text style dialog.
30425 \begin_inset Index idx
30428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30431 This is an italic dummy entry
30436 You can also format the page number using the character
30437 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30441 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30444 followed by a \SpecialChar LaTeX
30445 -command without a backslash.
30446 We can write for example
30449 \begin_layout Standard
30452 italic page number:|textit
30455 \begin_layout Standard
30456 to get the page number in italic.
30457 \begin_inset Index idx
30460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30461 Dummy entries ! italic page number:|textit
30466 Normally all \SpecialChar LaTeX
30467 -commands begin with a backslash, but in this special case
30469 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30477 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30485 \begin_inset space ~
30491 Have a look at section
30492 \begin_inset space ~
30496 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30498 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
30502 to learn more about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30506 \begin_layout Standard
30507 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
30510 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30515 Formatting single index entries only works when you use the program
30519 to generate the index, see section
30520 \begin_inset space ~
30524 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30526 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
30535 , this will not work for anything other than bold or italic text.
30540 requires you to define semantic elements before they can be used, see
30541 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30544 key "latexcompanion"
30557 \begin_layout Standard
30558 In general, we encourage you to not format page numbers directly as shown
30560 Instead, you should define a macro in the preamble and use that.
30561 Maybe you want all page references italic that refer to a definition of
30562 the indexed term, so that users can easily find definitions.
30563 If so, put the following in the preamble
30566 \begin_layout Standard
30578 \begin_layout Standard
30582 \begin_layout Standard
30588 \begin_layout Standard
30589 in the index entry.
30590 \begin_inset Index idx
30593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30594 Dummy entries ! my entry|IndexDef
30599 The advantage is that, if you change your mind later or if your publisher
30600 insists that definitions must not be italic but bold, you just need to
30601 change the macro in the preamble, not every single index entry.
30604 \begin_layout Standard
30605 You can also change the layout for the whole index.
30606 For example, we marked the index list box of this document as bold to get
30607 a bold font for all index entries.
30608 For more advanced tasks you have to set up a so-called
30620 documentation for details,
30621 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30623 key "makeindex,xindy"
30631 \begin_layout Subsection
30633 \begin_inset Index idx
30636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30643 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30645 name "subsec:Index-Program"
30652 \begin_layout Standard
30653 If the index generation program
30657 is installed, \SpecialChar LyX
30658 uses it for index generation; otherwise the program
30662 , the program that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
30663 distribution, is used.
30667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30672 is very old, no longer under development and has many pitfalls, notably
30673 that it was developed with only the English language in mind.
30674 So it fails to sort anything other than a monolingual English text correctly.
30675 We have shown above how to fix this sorting.
30676 However, if you are writing in another than the English language, consider
30686 Both programs can be controlled by options that can be set in \SpecialChar LyX
30688 dialog, see section
30689 \begin_inset space ~
30693 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30695 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
30700 The available options are listed and explained in
30701 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30703 key "makeindex-man,xindy"
30709 In this dialog, you can also specify an alternative program to generate
30713 \begin_layout Standard
30714 If you need specific options or an alternative index program only for a
30715 given document, you can define the program and\SpecialChar breakableslash
30718 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30719 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
30723 This is especially useful if you need to pass language-specific options
30724 to the index program or if you need a specific layout style.
30727 \begin_layout Subsection
30731 \begin_layout Standard
30732 In many fields it is common to have more than one index.
30733 For instance, you might need to set up a separate
30734 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30738 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30741 next to the standard index.
30743 does not provide this possibility out of the box, but there are packages
30744 that add this feature.
30751 \begin_inset Index idx
30754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30756 packages ! splitidx
30761 package to generate multiple indexes.
30762 The package is included in all recent \SpecialChar LaTeX
30767 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30768 If yours does not ship it, consult the \SpecialChar TeX
30770 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30778 Note that the package does not only consist of a \SpecialChar LaTeX
30779 style, but it also includes
30780 specific preprocessor programs that need to be installed as well.
30781 Please consult the package's manual for details.
30789 \begin_layout Standard
30790 To set up \SpecialChar LyX
30791 for the use of multiple indexes, go to
30793 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30794 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
30797 and select the option
30799 Use multiple Indexes
30806 already contains the standard index
30807 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30811 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30815 To add further indexes, add the name of the index (in the form that should
30816 also appear as a heading) to the
30820 input field and press the
30825 The new index now also appears in the list.
30826 If you like, you can attribute an alternative \SpecialChar LyX
30827 label color to the new index.
30830 \begin_layout Standard
30831 Once the document changes have been applied, you can find the new index
30834 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30841 menu has a separate entry for each of the defined indexes.
30842 The workflow is basically the same as for the default index, but there
30843 are additional features:
30846 \begin_layout Itemize
30847 If you want to change the attribution of a specific index entry, right-clicking
30848 on the entry's label will open a dialog where you can do that.
30851 \begin_layout Itemize
30852 By right-clicking on an index, you can change its type.
30853 Furthermore, you can specify an index to be a
30854 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30858 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30861 If you do that, the heading of that list will be decreased by one level.
30862 For example, if you use a book class, where the standard index heading
30863 is defined as a chapter, subindexes will be defined as sections and can
30864 thus be nested to the non-subindexes.
30867 \begin_layout Section
30868 Nomenclature/Glossary
30869 \begin_inset Index idx
30872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30879 \begin_inset Index idx
30882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30898 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30911 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30913 name "sec:Nomenclature"
30920 \begin_layout Standard
30921 Sometimes you need to provide a list of technical terms or symbols that
30922 are mentioned in your document with a brief explanation of them – a so
30923 called nomenclature or glossary.
30926 \begin_layout Standard
30927 To be able to create nomenclatures or glossaries, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30934 \begin_inset Index idx
30937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30945 You find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
30947 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30954 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
30958 \begin_layout Standard
30959 A nomenclature entry is created if you place the cursor after a symbol entry
30960 and then use the menu
30962 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30968 \begin_inset space ~
30973 or the toolbar button
30976 arg "nomencl-insert"
30981 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30989 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30992 is inserted and a window pops up asking for the nomenclature entry.
30995 \begin_layout Standard
30996 A nomenclature entry consists of two main entries.
30997 The first is the term or
31001 that you wish to define.
31006 of the term or symbol.
31009 \begin_layout Standard
31010 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
31013 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31018 You have to enter valid \SpecialChar LaTeX
31019 -code for all fields of the nomenclature dialog.
31027 \begin_layout Subsection
31028 Nomenclature Definition and Layout
31029 \begin_inset Index idx
31032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31033 Nomenclature ! Layout
31041 \begin_layout Standard
31042 If you have symbols in formulas, you have to define them in the
31046 field as \SpecialChar LaTeX
31049 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31053 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
31057 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31061 \begin_inset Newline newline
31069 \begin_inset Newline newline
31075 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31079 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31082 character starts/ends the formula.
31083 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
31084 -command for the Greek letter is the name of the letter beginning with
31086 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31092 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31096 For capital Greek letters, start the command also with a capital letter,
31106 \begin_layout Standard
31107 (A short introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31108 -syntax is given in section
31109 \begin_inset space ~
31113 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31115 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
31122 \begin_layout Standard
31126 \begin_inset space ~
31131 dialog to format the description text; you have to use \SpecialChar LaTeX
31133 For example the description of the nomenclature entry for the
31134 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31138 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
31142 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31145 in this document is:
31146 \begin_inset Newline newline
31151 dummy entry for the character
31156 \begin_inset Newline newline
31168 \begin_inset space ~
31178 font use the command
31207 \begin_layout Standard
31208 To customize the appearance of all symbols add e.
31209 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31213 \begin_inset space \space{}
31217 \begin_inset Newline newline
31233 \begin_inset Newline newline
31236 to the LaTeX preamble in the document settings.
31237 This command will make the font of all symbols
31244 \begin_inset space ~
31252 \begin_layout Standard
31253 If the characters |
31254 \begin_inset space \space{}
31258 \begin_inset space \space{}
31262 \begin_inset space \space{}
31266 \begin_inset space \space{}
31270 \begin_inset space \space{}
31273 should appear in nomenclature entries they need to be escaped by adding
31274 a quote character in front of them.
31275 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
31276 LatexCommand nomenclature
31277 symbol "\"@, \"|, \"!, \"\""
31278 description "The quote sign is output by writing ‘ \"\"\"\" '"
31286 \begin_layout Subsection
31287 Sort Order of Nomenclature Entries
31288 \begin_inset Index idx
31291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31292 Nomenclature ! Sort order
31300 \begin_layout Standard
31301 The nomenclature entries are sorted alphabetically by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31302 -code of the symbol
31304 This leads to undesired results when you, for example, have symbols in
31306 Suppose you have nomenclature entries for the symbols
31309 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
31310 LatexCommand nomenclature
31312 description "dummy entry for the character \"a\""
31320 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
31324 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
31325 LatexCommand nomenclature
31328 description "dummy entry for the character \\textsf{sigma}"
31334 They will be sorted by
31335 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31343 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31347 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31357 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31361 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
31364 will be sorted before the
31368 since the character
31369 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31373 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31376 is considered in sorting.
31379 \begin_layout Standard
31380 To control the sort order, you can edit the
31383 \begin_inset space ~
31388 field of the nomenclature dialog.
31389 Then the nomenclature entry will be sorted by this entry and not the symbol
31391 For the example given, you can insert
31395 in this field for the
31396 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
31403 will be located before
31404 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
31410 \begin_layout Standard
31411 For subgrouping and tips for using sort entries see the
31416 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31426 \begin_layout Subsection
31427 Nomenclature Options
31428 \begin_inset Index idx
31431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31432 Nomenclature ! Options
31440 \begin_layout Standard
31445 package offers some options to adjust the appearance of the nomenclature.
31446 Here are some of its options; for more have a look at its documentation:
31449 \begin_layout Description
31450 refeq Appends the phrase
31451 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31463 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31466 to every nomenclature entry, where
31472 is the number of the last equation in front of the nomenclature entry
31475 \begin_layout Description
31476 refpage Appends the phrase
31477 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31489 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31492 to every nomenclature entry, where
31498 is the number of the page on which the nomenclature entry appeared
31501 \begin_layout Description
31502 intoc Inserts the nomenclature in the Table of Contents
31505 \begin_layout Standard
31506 To use one or more of the options, add them to the comma-separated document
31507 class options list in the
31509 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31513 In this document the options
31520 \begin_layout Standard
31521 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
31527 \begin_layout Standard
31528 You can also use the first two options above only for certain nomenclature
31529 entries when you add one of the following commands as last entry to the
31534 field in the nomenclature dialog:
31537 \begin_layout Description
31547 \begin_layout Description
31550 nomrefpage Like the
31557 \begin_layout Description
31560 nomrefeqpage Short notation of
31569 \begin_layout Description
31573 \begin_inset space ~
31579 \begin_inset space ~
31584 nomnorefeqpage Turns off the corresponding options
31587 \begin_layout Standard
31589 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31593 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31596 are automatically translated for some document languages.
31597 If not, add these lines to your \SpecialChar LaTeX
31601 \begin_layout Standard
31609 eqdeclaration}[1]{, see equation
31612 \begin_inset Newline newline
31619 pagedeclaration}[1]{, page
31624 \begin_inset Newline newline
31628 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31632 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31636 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31640 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31643 by their translation.
31646 \begin_layout Subsection
31647 Printing the Nomenclature
31648 \begin_inset Index idx
31651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31652 Nomenclature ! Printing
31660 \begin_layout Standard
31661 To print the nomenclature, use the menu
31663 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31664 Lists/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
31669 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31677 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31680 will show the place where the nomenclature is printed in the output.
31681 By right-clicking on it, the amount of space for symbols can be altered.
31682 You can choose between these settings:
31685 \begin_layout Description
31686 Default a space of 1
31687 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31693 \begin_layout Description
31695 \begin_inset space ~
31699 \begin_inset space ~
31702 width the width of the widest symbol of all nomenclature entries is used
31705 \begin_layout Description
31706 Custom custom space
31709 \begin_layout Standard
31710 In the printed output the title of the nomenclature appears as
31711 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31715 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31719 If you are not happy with the name, you can change it by redefining the
31727 For example, in order to change the name to
31731 , add the following line to the preamble:
31734 \begin_layout Standard
31742 nomname}{List of Symbols}
31745 \begin_layout Subsection
31746 Nomenclature Program
31747 \begin_inset Index idx
31750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31751 Nomenclature ! Program
31757 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31759 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
31766 \begin_layout Standard
31772 , that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
31773 distribution, to generate the nomenclature.
31775 's preferences dialog allows you to specify another program or to control
31780 by adding options, see section
31781 \begin_inset space ~
31785 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31787 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
31792 The available options are listed and explained in
31793 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31795 key "nomencl,makeindex"
31803 \begin_layout Section
31805 \begin_inset Index idx
31808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31815 \begin_inset Index idx
31818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31819 Document ! Branches
31825 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31827 name "sec:Branches"
31834 \begin_layout Standard
31835 Sometimes it is useful to hide some document parts in the output.
31836 For example a teacher who is setting an exam obviously doesn't want the
31837 pupils to see the answers, but having questions and answers in the same
31838 document will make the life of the markers of that exam much easier.
31841 \begin_layout Standard
31842 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
31843 allows you to put text into branches.
31844 The text will then only appear in the output when its branch is activated.
31845 To create a branch, either select the menu
31847 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31848 Branch\SpecialChar menuseparator
31851 (if you just want to specify a new branch) or go in the
31853 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31860 , where you can specify and change the name of the branch, its activation
31861 state (whether the content of the branch is shown in the output or not),
31862 its background color inside \SpecialChar LyX
31863 and whether the name of the branch should
31864 be appended to the document file name on export if the branch is active
31865 (see below for an example).
31866 Furthermore, the dialog lets you merge two branches (just rename one branch
31867 to the name of the other) and to add
31868 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31872 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31876 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31880 \begin_inset space ~
31883 branches that were added to the document via copy and paste from other documents
31884 , without having been defined) to the document's branch list.
31887 \begin_layout Standard
31888 Text that should be in a branch is set into branch inset boxes.
31889 These boxes are inserted via the menu
31891 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31894 where you can choose a branch.
31895 You can later change the activation state of the branch by right-clicking
31899 \begin_layout Standard
31900 Here is an example, where only the question text appears, the answer branch
31901 is deactivated and therefore does not appear in the output:
31904 \begin_layout Standard
31905 \begin_inset Branch Question
31909 \begin_layout Standard
31914 Who was the first physics Nobel prize winner?
31922 \begin_layout Standard
31923 \begin_inset Branch Answer
31927 \begin_layout Standard
31932 Wilhelm Conrad Röntgen
31940 \begin_layout Standard
31947 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31948 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
31951 , the name of the active branches will be appended to the file name at export.
31952 Consider for example a file
31953 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31957 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31960 which has the above branches.
31962 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31966 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31969 is active, the PDF export file would be called
31970 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31974 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31978 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31982 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31986 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31990 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31993 branch were inactive,
31994 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31998 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32002 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32006 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32009 branch was active, likewise
32010 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32014 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32018 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32022 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32025 branch was active, and
32026 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32029 Exam-Question-Answer.pdf
32030 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32033 if both branches were active.
32034 This helps you to export different versions of your document easily.
32035 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
32041 \begin_layout Standard
32042 There are also inverted branch insets, whose content is output just in case
32048 This make it easy to add alternative text for different versions of a document.
32049 To control whether a particular inset is inverted, right-click on the inset
32053 \begin_inset space ~
32061 \begin_layout Standard
32062 \begin_inset Branch Answer
32066 \begin_layout Standard
32072 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32076 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32079 branch is deactivated.
32085 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
32091 \begin_layout Standard
32092 To use conditional output inside places where you cannot insert branch insets,
32093 like inside equations, you can code special \SpecialChar LaTeX
32094 definitions for each branch.
32095 For example you can define for the question branch
32099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32100 For an introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32101 -syntax, see section
32102 \begin_inset space ~
32106 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32108 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
32120 \begin_layout Standard
32130 \begin_layout Standard
32140 \begin_layout Standard
32141 and for the answer branch
32144 \begin_layout Standard
32154 \begin_layout Standard
32164 \begin_layout Standard
32165 \begin_inset Branch Question
32169 \begin_layout Standard
32173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32201 \begin_layout Standard
32202 \begin_inset Branch Answer
32206 \begin_layout Standard
32210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32238 \begin_layout Standard
32239 Now it is possible to use the
32243 question{\SpecialChar ldots
32250 answer{\SpecialChar ldots
32253 commands to obtain conditional output.
32254 Here is an example formula where only the
32261 \begin_inset Formula
32263 x^{2}-2x-2\Rightarrow\question{x_{1}}\answer{x_{2}}=1\question{+\sqrt{3}}\answer{-\sqrt{3}}.
32271 \begin_layout Standard
32272 Inside math, the same effect can be achieved using math macros, see the
32280 \begin_layout Standard
32281 Each type of branch is allowed to have its specific style defined in layout
32283 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32287 \begin_inset space \space{}
32290 any branch inset can be automatically wrapped by your own \SpecialChar LaTeX
32292 For this advanced usage, see the
32298 Flex insets and InsetLayout
32303 \begin_layout Section
32305 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32307 name "sec:PDF-Properties"
32312 \begin_inset Index idx
32315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32324 \begin_layout Standard
32327 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32328 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
32331 dialog allows you to set up special options for the PDF output of your
32333 All these options are provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32339 \begin_inset Index idx
32342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32344 packages ! hyperref
32349 which will link all cross-references in the DVI- and PDF-output.
32350 This means that the reader of your document will be able to click on a
32351 table of contents entry or on a reference to move to the cross-referenced
32352 part of the document.
32356 \begin_layout Standard
32357 The header information in the dialog tab
32361 is saved together with the PDF as file properties.
32362 Many programs are able to extract this information, for example, automatically
32363 to recognize who the author is and what the PDF is about.
32364 This is very useful to sort, classify or use PDFs for bibliography issues.
32368 \begin_inset space ~
32372 \begin_inset space ~
32377 is set, \SpecialChar LyX
32378 tries to extract the header information from your document title
32379 and author entries.
32383 \begin_inset space ~
32387 \begin_inset space ~
32391 \begin_inset space ~
32396 will open the PDF in fullscreen mode, which is useful for presentations.
32399 \begin_layout Standard
32400 You can specify in the dialog tab
32404 how the links will look and if links for bibliographical backreferences
32409 \begin_inset space ~
32413 \begin_inset space ~
32417 \begin_inset space ~
32422 option allows long links to be split;
32425 \begin_inset space ~
32429 \begin_inset space ~
32433 \begin_inset space ~
32441 \begin_inset space ~
32446 both turn off the default behavior of enclosing all links in frames;
32449 \begin_inset space ~
32454 colors the different links.
32455 The default colors are:
32458 \begin_layout Labeling
32459 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
32464 for hyperlinks and URLs
32467 \begin_layout Labeling
32468 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
32476 \begin_layout Labeling
32477 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
32485 \begin_layout Standard
32486 but you can change these in the field
32491 For example, in this document they were changed with the additional options:
32494 \begin_layout Standard
32497 linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue
32500 \begin_layout Standard
32505 is set, the hyperlinks will appear in the bibliography after the different
32506 entries, showing, depending on the option selected, the number of the section,
32507 slide or page where the entry is referenced.
32510 \begin_layout Standard
32515 you can specify if PDF-bookmarks should be created for every section of
32516 your document to make it easier for readers to navigate through the document.
32517 You can decide if the bookmarks should be numbered like your document sections
32527 you can specify what sectioning level should be displayed in the bookmarks
32528 when opening the PDF.
32530 \begin_inset space ~
32533 2 will display all sections and subsections, while level
32534 \begin_inset space ~
32537 1 will only display the sections.
32540 \begin_layout Standard
32541 PDF properties are also used in this document.
32542 When you look in its document settings, you can see that some additional
32548 For an explanation of all them we refer you to the hyperref manual
32549 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32559 \begin_layout Section
32561 Code and the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32563 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32565 name "sec:TeX-Code"
32572 \begin_layout Subsection
32575 \begin_inset Index idx
32578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32586 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32588 name "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
32595 \begin_layout Standard
32596 As \SpecialChar LyX
32597 uses \SpecialChar LaTeX
32598 in the background, it supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
32599 commands and constructs,
32602 contains hundreds of packages that provide different commands.
32603 All the time packages are being updated and new ones added.
32604 This has the advantage that you can typeset nearly everything as there
32605 is a \SpecialChar LaTeX
32606 -package for every problem, though \SpecialChar LyX
32607 cannot support all packages and
32611 \begin_layout Standard
32612 But don't worry, you can use any \SpecialChar LaTeX
32613 -command directly in \SpecialChar LyX
32614 inside the \SpecialChar TeX
32618 Code box is created by the menu
32620 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32622 \begin_inset space ~
32627 or by the toolbar button
32640 The box can be opened by left-clicking and closed by right-clicking on
32648 \begin_layout Standard
32649 You can insert complete or incomplete commands as \SpecialChar TeX
32651 Incomplete means that the command argument can be Standard \SpecialChar LyX
32653 For example, if you want to draw a frame around a word
32657 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32658 The LyX way would be to use a framed box.
32663 and are therefore using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32670 , you can write the command part
32676 in a \SpecialChar TeX
32677 Code box before the word and the closing brace
32681 in a second \SpecialChar TeX
32682 Code box behind the word.
32683 The word between the two \SpecialChar TeX
32684 Code boxes is then the argument as it is in the
32688 \begin_layout Standard
32689 \begin_inset Graphics
32690 filename clipart/ERT.png
32698 \begin_layout Standard
32702 \begin_layout Standard
32703 This is a line with a
32707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32730 \begin_layout Standard
32731 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
32734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32739 At the end of \SpecialChar LaTeX
32740 -commands without parameters, you have to insert a space
32741 to let \SpecialChar LaTeX
32742 know that the command is finished.
32750 \begin_layout Subsection
32751 A Short Introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32753 \begin_inset Argument 1
32756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32757 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
32764 \begin_inset Index idx
32767 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32775 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32777 name "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
32784 \begin_layout Standard
32785 When you write larger documents or books, you will need to know something
32786 about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32787 -commands that \SpecialChar LyX
32788 uses in the background.
32789 Because \SpecialChar LaTeX
32790 is based on commands, you can
32791 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32795 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32799 This has the advantage that the layout of the document can be changed at
32800 any time if you know the right commands.
32801 For example, imagine you have to write a manual for a product and the deadline
32802 is the end of the day.
32803 Your boss has just complimented you for your good work but wants to have
32804 all caption labels bold.
32805 But you have over a hundred figure and table captions with non-bold labels
32807 Of course it is impossible to change all caption labels manually in one
32811 \begin_layout Standard
32812 Now \SpecialChar LaTeX
32814 As mentioned above, for every problem there exists a \SpecialChar LaTeX
32816 First you have to find out which and therefore look in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32819 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32829 \begin_layout Standard
32830 As result you find that the package
32835 \begin_inset Index idx
32838 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32846 To use a package, you have to load it in the document preamble (menu
32848 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32851 \SpecialChar menuseparator
32855 \begin_inset space ~
32863 \begin_layout Standard
32868 usepackage[options]{package name}
32871 \begin_layout Standard
32872 All \SpecialChar LaTeX
32873 commands begin with a backslash, the command argument is set within
32874 two braces and the options are set within two brackets.
32875 Note that not all commands have an argument and options.
32878 \begin_layout Standard
32879 In your case the package name is
32884 After a look in the documentation of the package, you know that the option
32889 will change the font of all caption labels to bold.
32890 So you add the command
32893 \begin_layout Standard
32898 usepackage[labelfont=bf]{caption}
32901 \begin_layout Standard
32902 to the preamble and the problem is solved.
32906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32907 For more commands provided by the
32911 package, have a look at its documentation,
32912 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32927 \begin_layout Standard
32928 Note that some document classes have built-in solutions for well-known problems
32930 For example if you use a
32934 class, you don't need the package
32938 , you can instead write
32941 \begin_layout Standard
32946 setkomafont{captionlabel}{
32951 \begin_layout Standard
32952 in the preamble and the problem is solved.
32953 So if you plan to write a large document, you should have a look at the
32954 documentation of the document class you want to use.
32961 is an example of a command with more than one argument.)
32964 \begin_layout Standard
32965 Commands in the preamble affect the whole document, while commands in the
32966 text affect only the text after the command or only the text used as command
32968 To insert a \SpecialChar LaTeX
32969 -command in text, use the \SpecialChar TeX
32970 Code box as described in the previous
32974 \begin_layout Standard
32975 If you want to learn more about \SpecialChar LaTeX
32976 and its syntax, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32979 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32981 key "latexcompanion,latexguide"
32989 \begin_layout Standard
32990 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
32996 \begin_layout Standard
33000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33010 \begin_inset Note Note
33013 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33014 switches temporarily to a page style with custom header and footer line
33022 \begin_layout Left Header
33023 \begin_inset Argument 1
33026 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33036 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33046 \begin_inset Note Note
33049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33050 defines the header line as described below
33058 \begin_layout Center Header
33059 \begin_inset Argument 1
33062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33071 \begin_layout Right Header
33072 \begin_inset Argument 1
33075 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33079 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33096 \begin_layout Left Footer
33097 \begin_inset Argument 1
33100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33104 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33121 \begin_layout Center Footer
33122 \begin_inset Argument 1
33125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33137 \begin_inset Newline newline
33141 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
33147 \begin_layout Right Footer
33148 \begin_inset Argument 1
33151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33173 \begin_layout Section
33174 Customized Page Headers and Footers
33175 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33177 name "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
33182 \begin_inset Index idx
33185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33186 Document ! Header/Footer line
33192 \begin_inset Index idx
33195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33204 \begin_layout Standard
33205 To define a custom page header and footer line for your document, you need
33209 \begin_inset space ~
33220 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33226 \begin_inset space ~
33232 As a second step add in the menu
33234 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33235 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
33239 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33244 Custom Header/Footerlines
33247 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33251 This module offers the following 6
33252 \begin_inset space ~
33258 \begin_layout Description
33260 \begin_inset space ~
33264 \begin_inset space ~
33268 \begin_inset space ~
33272 \begin_inset space ~
33276 \begin_inset space ~
33282 \begin_layout Description
33284 \begin_inset space ~
33288 \begin_inset space ~
33292 \begin_inset space ~
33296 \begin_inset space ~
33300 \begin_inset space ~
33306 \begin_layout Standard
33307 for the different positions in the header/footer.
33308 These environments can be selected in the environment pull-down box.
33311 \begin_layout Standard
33312 Normally, headers and footers are set up at the beginning of the document.
33313 But you can change them anywhere you want to.
33315 \begin_inset space ~
33319 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33321 reference "fig:Page-layout"
33325 shows the page layout and where the header/footer styles will appear.
33328 \begin_layout Standard
33329 \begin_inset Float figure
33335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33338 \begin_inset Tabular
33339 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
33340 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
33341 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="30line%">
33342 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="30line%">
33343 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="30line%">
33345 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33354 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
33357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33363 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
33366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33374 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33383 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33392 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
33395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33403 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none" width="90line%">
33406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33407 The normal text on the page goes here.
33408 The running header is above the text, and the footer is below (including
33410 Headers/footers typically contain things like the page number, title of
33411 the chapter, company logo but you can use almost anything, except of floats.
33416 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33425 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
33428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33436 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33445 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33448 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33454 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
33457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33465 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33474 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
33477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33483 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
33486 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33501 \begin_inset Caption Standard
33503 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33504 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33506 name "fig:Page-layout"
33510 Page layout with custom header and footer line.
33523 \begin_layout Standard
33524 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
33527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33532 : some document classes implement their own customized page headers and
33536 \begin_inset space ~
33541 is set to “Default”.
33542 Check what these are before you specify your own customized page headers
33551 \begin_layout Subsection
33555 \begin_layout Standard
33556 To define your header line, add all three header environments.
33557 The things you add to each environment appear on odd numbered pages, the
33558 things in the optional arguments on even numbered pages.
33559 For single-sided documents, the optional arguments will not be used and
33561 If you leave a header environment or its argument empty, nothing appears
33563 Defining the footer line works similarly.
33566 \begin_layout Standard
33567 For the definition, you will need some \SpecialChar LaTeX
33568 -commands that are inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
33572 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33574 \begin_inset space ~
33582 \begin_layout Description
33585 thepage prints the current page number
33588 \begin_layout Description
33591 Roman{page} prints the current page number with capital roman numerals
33594 \begin_layout Description
33597 roman{page} prints the current page number with small roman numerals
33600 \begin_layout Description
33603 leftmark prints the current section number and title.
33604 If the document has chapters, it prints the current chapter number and
33607 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33611 \begin_inset Quotes prd
33614 because it usually goes in a left header.
33617 \begin_layout Description
33620 rightmark prints the current subsection number and title.
33621 If the document has chapters, it prints the current section number and
33623 It is normally used in the right header.
33626 \begin_layout Subsection
33627 Default header/footer
33630 \begin_layout Standard
33631 The custom header/footer is not empty by default.
33632 The default header contains the chapter and section title and the center
33633 footer has the page number.
33634 In order to remove unwanted entries from the header/footer, include the
33635 relevant header/footer style in your document, but leave it blank.
33636 So, if you do not want a page number in the footer, include a blank
33639 \begin_inset space ~
33647 \begin_layout Subsection
33651 \begin_layout Standard
33652 The header and footer will appear on normal pages.
33653 Some pages are different.
33654 The title page has a header/footer environment of its own, and so does
33655 any page that starts a new part or chapter in your book.
33656 Such pages will not have the custom headers/footers, but that is normal.
33657 There is for example no need to print a header with the chapter name on
33658 the chapter page where the chapter heading is in big bold letters anyway.
33661 \begin_layout Subsubsection
33662 Header and footer decoration line
33665 \begin_layout Standard
33666 By default, you get a 0.4
33667 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33670 pt thick line below the header and no footer line.
33671 This can be changed in the document preamble with the commands
33683 in the following way:
33686 \begin_layout Standard
33693 headrulewidth}{thickness}
33696 \begin_layout Standard
33697 where thickness is a size in standard units like
33710 If you don't want a line, set the thickness to 0
33711 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33717 \begin_layout Standard
33718 The lines can also be colored, but this requires more knowledge of \SpecialChar LaTeX
33720 If you really need this, have a look at the Internet or in section
33721 \begin_inset space ~
33725 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33735 \begin_layout Subsubsection
33736 Several header/footer lines
33739 \begin_layout Standard
33740 In case you need more than one text line as a header/footer, you can do
33741 this by adding a ragged line break in the style definition.
33742 However, the default height of the header/footer is only the height of
33744 To expand the height, redefine the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33759 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33760 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
33762 \begin_inset space ~
33770 \begin_layout Standard
33777 headheight}{height}
33780 \begin_layout Standard
33785 is a size in standard units (e.
33786 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33790 \begin_inset space \space{}
33798 If you don't know how much space is needed for the height, define your
33799 header/footer and preview your document as a PDF.
33800 Then open the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33801 logfile with the menu
33803 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33805 \begin_inset space ~
33813 \begin_inset space ~
33818 to see if you can find a warning about the package
33823 \begin_inset Index idx
33826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33828 packages ! fancyhdr
33834 If there is such a warning, it contains the space that you need at least
33835 for your header/footer.
33838 \begin_layout Subsection
33842 \begin_layout Standard
33843 This example demonstrates what can be done with custom header/footers.
33844 Don't use it for your document as it is just an example.
33845 This example consists of the following definition:
33848 \begin_layout Description
33850 \begin_inset space ~
33859 , empty optional argument
33862 \begin_layout Description
33864 \begin_inset space ~
33867 Header empty, empty optional argument
33870 \begin_layout Description
33872 \begin_inset space ~
33881 in the optional argument
33884 \begin_layout Description
33886 \begin_inset space ~
33895 in the optional argument
33898 \begin_layout Description
33900 \begin_inset space ~
33913 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33917 \begin_inset Newline newline
33921 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
33925 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33928 in the optional argument
33931 \begin_layout Description
33933 \begin_inset space ~
33942 , empty optional argument
33945 \begin_layout Description
33948 headrulewidth set to 2
33949 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33955 \begin_layout Standard
33956 In principle you can use almost everything in headers/footers, except floats.
33957 For more specialized features, for example, thumb-indexes, see the manual
33963 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33973 \begin_layout Standard
33974 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
33980 \begin_layout Standard
33984 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33988 pagestyle{headings}
33994 \begin_inset Note Note
33997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33998 switches back to page style with the default headings
34006 \begin_layout Section
34007 Previewing Snippets of your Document
34008 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34010 name "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
34015 \begin_inset Index idx
34018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34025 \begin_inset Index idx
34028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34037 \begin_layout Standard
34039 allows you to generate previews of sections of your document on the fly
34040 so you can see how they will look in the final document without having
34041 to break your train of thought with viewing the output.
34044 \begin_layout Subsection
34048 \begin_layout Standard
34049 To get previews working, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34055 \begin_inset Index idx
34058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34060 packages ! preview-latex
34065 (on some systems named simply
34070 If it is not already installed, you will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
34072 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34079 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
34081 You obtain prettier results if you install the program
34089 package; for \SpecialChar LyX
34090 on Windows this program and also the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34091 -package are automatically
34092 installed together with \SpecialChar LyX
34096 \begin_layout Subsection
34100 \begin_layout Standard
34101 If you would for example like to see in \SpecialChar LyX
34102 your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
34104 activate the option
34107 \begin_inset space ~
34114 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
34120 \begin_inset space ~
34124 \begin_inset space ~
34127 feel\SpecialChar menuseparator
34134 \begin_inset space ~
34147 \begin_inset space ~
34152 is the multiplication factor for the size.
34155 \begin_layout Standard
34156 If you would like to see everything but your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
34161 \begin_inset space ~
34169 \begin_inset space ~
34177 \begin_layout Standard
34178 Previews are generated when you load a document into \SpecialChar LyX
34179 and when you finish
34183 \begin_layout Standard
34184 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
34187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34192 Previews of an already loaded document are not in every case immediately
34193 generated by activating the option
34196 \begin_inset space ~
34202 Reopening the document will fix such problems.
34210 \begin_layout Subsection
34211 Selected document parts
34214 \begin_layout Standard
34215 Besides math there are other cases where you might like to see a preview,
34216 for example things that \SpecialChar LyX
34217 cannot render like rotated parts or things that
34218 are not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
34220 To do this, insert a preview inset via the menu
34222 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34226 Insert or paste the stuff that you want to preview into this inset.
34227 The preview will be generated when the cursor is outside the preview inset.
34228 If you click on the preview, you can edit the previewed stuff.
34231 \begin_layout Standard
34232 An example: To create rotated boxes, you use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34239 which is not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
34244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34251 is explained in section
34253 Rotated and Scaled Boxes
34258 \begin_inset space ~
34268 Instead of the \SpecialChar TeX
34269 Code boxes you want to see in \SpecialChar LyX
34270 the final rotated boxes,
34271 for example to adjust the rotation angle to fit with the surrounding text.
34272 Therefore you create a preview inset and copy the text with the rotated
34274 Here is the result:
34277 \begin_layout Standard
34278 \begin_inset Preview
34280 \begin_layout Standard
34285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34289 rotatebox[origin=r]{-60}{
34295 \begin_inset Box Doublebox
34305 height_special "totalheight"
34310 backgroundcolor "none"
34313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34323 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34334 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34338 rotatebox[origin=lb]{60}{
34344 \begin_inset Formula $\int A\,\mathrm{d}x=B$
34351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34366 \begin_layout Standard
34367 Previewing works also for colors.
34368 In this example a special framed, colored box was created using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34380 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34387 is explained in section
34394 \begin_inset space ~
34407 \begin_layout Standard
34408 \begin_inset Preview
34410 \begin_layout Standard
34414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34429 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34433 fcolorbox{cyan}{magenta}{
34438 This is text within a colored, framed box.
34442 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34457 \begin_layout Standard
34458 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
34464 \begin_layout Standard
34465 If \SpecialChar LyX
34466 does not show a preview, make sure that you enabled previews as described
34467 above and also make sure that \SpecialChar TeX
34468 Code in the preview inset is valid and that
34469 you loaded the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34470 packages in your document preamble that are required by
34471 the \SpecialChar TeX
34473 If \SpecialChar LyX
34474 cannot create a preview, you will in most cases also not be able to
34475 view your document due to \SpecialChar LaTeX
34477 So if you have to use some \SpecialChar TeX
34478 Code and don't know if it is correct, the preview
34479 inset is a nice method to check it without the need to view the whole document.
34482 \begin_layout Subsection
34487 \begin_layout Standard
34488 You can preview the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34489 source of the whole document or parts of it.
34492 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
34494 \begin_inset space ~
34499 and a window will be shown where you can see the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34501 The window shows the source of the whole paragraph in which the cursor
34503 You can also select document parts in \SpecialChar LyX
34504 's main window, then only this selection
34505 (when it is more than one paragraph) is shown as source code.
34506 To view the whole document as source, enable the corresponding option in
34507 the source view window.
34512 , you can see the changes as you make them in \SpecialChar LyX
34513 ; but note that if you have
34514 several documents open, this will slow things down as \SpecialChar LyX
34516 not just the one which is open at the time.
34519 \begin_layout Section
34520 Advanced Find and Replace
34521 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34523 name "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
34528 \begin_inset Index idx
34531 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34538 \begin_inset Index idx
34541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34550 \begin_layout Subsection
34554 \begin_layout Standard
34555 The advanced find and replace feature of \SpecialChar LyX
34556 allows for searching of complex,
34557 format-sensitive text segments and mathematics contents within \SpecialChar LyX
34559 It is an enhancement of the standard (quick) find and replace feature.
34560 The key-features are:
34563 \begin_layout Itemize
34564 Both searching of text and of mathematical formulas is allowed, where the
34565 latter is done by entering mathematics in the usual way; not only entire
34566 mathematical formulas are found, but also parts occurring within more complex
34570 \begin_layout Itemize
34571 Search may be format-insensitive, so that the searched text is found in
34572 any context/style (standard text, section headings, notes, and even mathematics
34573 ), or it may be format-sensitive, so that, for example, a word entered with
34574 a section heading will only be found within section headings
34577 \begin_layout Itemize
34578 Search may be restricted to mathematics environments only; this is useful
34579 for remangling math notation where one does not want to match any text
34580 outside of mathematics environments
34583 \begin_layout Itemize
34584 Search may be widened to a specific
34589 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34593 \begin_inset space ~
34596 a set of files which may be all the children of the document being edited,
34597 all the open files, or all the manuals available from the
34604 \begin_layout Itemize
34605 Replace may optionally preserve capitalization, so that the replaced text
34606 capitalization is adapted to the matching text (i.
34607 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34611 \begin_inset space ~
34614 all lowercase, all uppercase, first letter uppercase followed by lowercase)
34617 \begin_layout Subsection
34621 \begin_layout Standard
34622 The advanced find and replace feature is activated through the menu
34624 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
34637 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
34640 ) or the toolbar button
34643 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
34649 Advanced Find and Replace
34654 \begin_layout Subsubsection
34658 \begin_layout Standard
34664 mini-editor a simple word, and search for occurrences of it by clicking
34668 \begin_inset space ~
34673 button at the bottom of the dialog (or just press the
34676 arg "paragraph-break"
34680 The entered word is found both in text mode and in math mode, and in emphasized
34681 , bold or normal face, and in both in section titles and in standard text.
34685 arg "paragraph-break"
34688 repeatedly keeps searching forward while pressing
34692 searches backwards.
34695 \begin_layout Standard
34699 \begin_inset space ~
34704 option allows matches to occur only with the same case as entered in the
34713 \begin_inset space ~
34718 option allows matches to occur only at word boundaries.
34721 \begin_layout Subsubsection
34722 Searching for mathematics
34725 \begin_layout Standard
34726 Mathematical formulas, such as
34727 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
34730 or something more complex like
34731 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}$
34734 , may be searched for by typing them in the
34739 When searching for a formula, it is found both when it is alone and when
34740 it occurs in sub-formulas and nested parts of sub-formulas.
34741 For example the mentioned segments would be found in something like
34742 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{\sqrt{\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}}}$
34748 \begin_layout Subsubsection
34752 \begin_layout Standard
34753 It is also possible to search for text with specific styles.
34754 This is done by switching to the
34758 tab of the dialog and unchecking the
34763 This way, entering in the
34770 \begin_layout Itemize
34771 a normal word and searching for it would not find instances of the word
34772 occurring in emphasized or boldface.
34775 \begin_layout Itemize
34776 an emphasized or boldface word and searching for it would find the respective
34777 instances with the same face only, and within the same text style only.
34780 \begin_layout Itemize
34781 a normal word in a section heading, and searching for it, would find occurrences
34782 of it only within section headings.
34783 Also, if the text to search is given an emphasized or bold face, in addition
34784 to a section style, then it is found only when occurring with the same
34788 \begin_layout Itemize
34789 a displayed formula will only find instances of this formula that are also
34790 displayed formulas (and not inline formulas).
34793 \begin_layout Subsubsection
34797 \begin_layout Standard
34798 The entries made in the
34802 editor can be replaced with entries made in the
34805 \begin_inset space ~
34811 In order to find the next occurrence and replace it, click on the
34815 button or alternatively press
34818 arg "paragraph-break"
34825 while the cursor is in the
34828 \begin_inset space ~
34836 \begin_layout Standard
34837 You can replace with fully-featured formatted \SpecialChar LyX
34839 Typical scenarios in which to use this capability might be (just to mention
34843 \begin_layout Itemize
34844 replacing occurrences of a word with a customized formatted version of the
34845 same word, for example replacing occurrences of a name like
34846 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34850 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34853 with its typewriter version
34854 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34862 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34868 \begin_layout Itemize
34869 performing a notation rework of mathematical symbols, for example replacing
34871 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34875 \begin_inset Formula $R$
34879 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34883 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34887 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbb{R}$
34891 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34894 (you may want to enable the
34897 \begin_inset space ~
34905 \begin_inset space ~
34910 options and disable the
34918 tab, in order to avoid replacing all
34919 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34923 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34926 letters occurring in normal text), or occurrences of
34927 \begin_inset Formula $x_{j}^{i}$
34931 \begin_inset Formula $x_{i,\,j}$
34934 , or occurrences of
34935 \begin_inset Formula $x[k]$
34939 \begin_inset Formula $x_{k}$
34945 \begin_layout Subsection
34949 \begin_layout Standard
34950 There is a regular expression (regexp) based searching facility.
34954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34955 A good explanation of regular expressions is given in this Wikipedia entry:
34957 \begin_inset CommandInset href
34959 target "http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regular_expression"
34969 You can search for a regular expression by inserting a regexp inset into
34975 This is done with the context menu
34977 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34978 Insert Regular Expression
34980 while the cursor is in the
34985 Characters entered within regexp insets are matched according to the regular
34986 expression matching rules
34990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34991 Under the constraint that any (sub)expression must match a well-formed \SpecialChar LyX
34994 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34998 \begin_inset space ~
35001 when matching \SpecialChar LaTeX
35002 code, no segments with unbalanced {} braces are allowed to
35008 , while text entered outside regexp insets is matched exactly against the
35009 same text in the document.
35010 You can cut and paste regexp-mode insets.
35011 Examples of using such a feature may be:
35014 \begin_layout Enumerate
35015 Searching for all fractions with a given denominator: for example, entering
35020 editor the fraction
35021 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{.*}{1+x^{2}}$
35025 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
35028 on the numerator is the match-everything regular expression) finds all
35029 fractions with the given denominator.
35032 \begin_layout Enumerate
35033 Searching for all text with a given style: for example, after unchecking
35045 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
35050 regular expression and giving it an emphasized or bold face, finds all
35051 emphasized or bold face text respectively.
35052 Also, by inserting a
35053 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
35056 regular expression in a bullet or enumerated list or a section heading,
35057 you can find all bullet or enumerated lists or section headings.
35060 \begin_layout Standard
35061 Finally, references to (sub)expressions in regexp may be used as usual:
35062 Enclosing parts of the expression within round braces
35063 \begin_inset Formula $()$
35066 , and referring back to them through
35067 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
35071 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash2$
35075 For example, try searching with the regexp
35076 \begin_inset Newline newline
35079 [[:space:]]([[:alpha:]]+)[[:space:]]
35082 \begin_inset Newline newline
35085 in order to find word repetitions, if there are any.
35088 \begin_layout Standard
35089 The usage of back references in the replaced text is not (yet) implemented.
35092 \begin_layout Standard
35093 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
35096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35101 Back references work both when occurring within the same regexp, and when
35102 occurring in multiple different regexps, where the numbering of back-referenced
35103 sub-expressions is absolute.
35105 \begin_inset space ~
35109 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
35112 always refers to the first occurrence of
35113 \begin_inset Formula $()$
35116 in all entered regexps.
35124 \begin_layout Section
35126 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35128 name "sec:Spellchecking"
35133 \begin_inset Index idx
35136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35145 \begin_layout Standard
35147 has a built-in spell checker.
35150 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35157 key or the toolbar button
35160 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
35163 start the spell checking from either the current cursor position or the
35164 beginning of the currently selected text.
35165 A sidebar will appear showing any incorrect (or unknown) word found, allowing
35166 you to edit and replace it in a second line.
35167 Whenever an unknown word is found, the word is highlighted and the text
35168 scrolled so that it is visible.
35169 In the spellchecker sidebar, there is a box showing suggestions for a correctio
35170 n, if any could be found.
35171 Clicking on one of the corrections will copy it to the
35175 field, double-clicking directly invokes the replacement.
35176 Unknown but correctly typed words can be added to the personal dictionary.
35179 \begin_layout Standard
35180 By default, the dictionary file used is determined by the document language
35183 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35187 You can specify the language of a word in the spellchecker dialog by choosing
35188 a different one at the top of the dialog.
35190 can correctly spell check documents containing multiple languages.
35191 This works if you have set the language of the text parts using the
35194 \begin_inset space ~
35202 arg "dialog-show character"
35205 ) and have the spell checker dictionaries installed.
35207 automatically switches to the appropriate dictionary file.
35210 \begin_layout Standard
35211 All spell-checker dictionaries supported by \SpecialChar LyX
35212 can be downloaded from here:
35213 \begin_inset Newline newline
35217 \begin_inset Flex URL
35220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35222 http://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/hunspell/
35228 \begin_inset Newline newline
35232 \begin_inset space ~
35235 files for each language.
35236 To install a dictionary on Windows, copy the 2
35237 \begin_inset space ~
35240 files into \SpecialChar LyX
35241 's installation subfolder
35249 and restart \SpecialChar LyX
35251 \begin_inset Newline newline
35254 With Linux one needs to install the packages for the desired language.
35255 The number of these packages vary depending on the Linux distribution,
35256 but in most cases these are
35272 is the language code.
35275 \begin_layout Subsection
35279 \begin_layout Standard
35282 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35283 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
35285 \begin_inset space ~
35288 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
35291 you can set the following things:
35294 \begin_layout Description
35296 \begin_inset space ~
35299 engine Select the library \SpecialChar LyX
35300 should use for spell checking.
35301 Depending on your platform,
35315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35316 Enchant itself is a wrapper library having different configurable back-ends.
35317 Please consult the documentation or man-page of it to learn more.
35332 \begin_inset space ~
35335 OS can also use Mac's own spellchecker and will use it by default.
35338 \begin_layout Description
35340 \begin_inset space ~
35343 language If this field is not empty, \SpecialChar LyX
35344 will always use the given language
35345 for the spell checking, no matter what the document language is.
35348 \begin_layout Description
35350 \begin_inset space ~
35353 characters Allows you to add non-standard characters that the spell checker
35355 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35359 \begin_inset space \space{}
35363 This should normally not be needed.
35366 \begin_layout Description
35368 \begin_inset space ~
35372 \begin_inset space ~
35375 words Prevents the spell checker from complaining about compounded words
35377 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35381 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35387 \begin_layout Description
35389 \begin_inset space ~
35392 continuously Checks the spelling of your document as you type it.
35393 Misspelled words get underlined with a dotted red line.
35394 By right-clicking on an underlined word, suggestions from the spellchecker
35395 appear in a context menu.
35396 Choosing one of them will replace the misspelled word with the suggested
35400 \begin_layout Description
35402 \begin_inset space ~
35406 \begin_inset space ~
35410 \begin_inset space ~
35413 comments If enabled, the spelling of non-printed document content is checked
35417 \begin_layout Section
35419 \begin_inset Index idx
35422 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35429 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35431 name "sec:Thesaurus"
35438 \begin_layout Standard
35440 provides a multilingual thesaurus.
35441 It uses the same thesaurus framework as LibreOffice, OpenOffice and Firefox
35450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35451 \begin_inset CommandInset href
35453 target "http://lingucomponent.openoffice.org/thesaurus.html"
35463 thesaurus library, which is included in \SpecialChar LyX
35465 Therefore, \SpecialChar LyX
35466 is able to directly access OpenOffice thesaurus dictionaries,
35467 which are available for many languages.
35470 \begin_layout Standard
35471 This section describes how new dictionaries are installed and set up for
35472 the use with \SpecialChar LyX
35476 \begin_layout Subsection
35477 Setting up the thesaurus
35480 \begin_layout Standard
35489 thesauri consist of two files per language: A file with the suffix
35493 containing the data and an index file with the suffix
35498 The standardized file names include the language code for the given language
35500 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35504 \begin_inset space ~
35512 For instance, the US English files are named:
35515 \begin_layout Itemize
35519 \begin_layout Itemize
35523 \begin_layout Standard
35532 and its thesaurus installed, these files should be already on your system
35533 and you just need to point \SpecialChar LyX
35536 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35537 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
35538 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
35540 \begin_inset space ~
35545 ) to the path where they are installed.
35549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35550 On Linux, depending on your distribution and the way you installed the dictionar
35551 ies, typical locations are
35557 /usr/share/myspell/dicts/
35561 /usr/share/ooo/thesaurus/
35565 ~/.config/libreoffice/<version>/user/
35568 On Windows, dictionaries are to be found at
35574 LibreOffice-<Version>
35581 On the Mac, the default location is
35583 /Users\SpecialChar breakableslash
35584 <user name>\SpecialChar breakableslash
35585 Library\SpecialChar breakableslash
35586 Application Support\SpecialChar breakableslash
35587 libreoffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
35588 <version>\SpecialChar breakableslash
35596 On Windows, you can alternatively also select dictionaries for installation
35597 during the \SpecialChar LyX
35598 installation process, which will then be installed in the correct
35602 \begin_layout Standard
35603 If you want to install new\SpecialChar breakableslash
35604 further thesaurus dictionaries, you can downloaded
35608 \begin_layout Itemize
35609 \begin_inset Flex URL
35612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35614 http://www.lyx.org/trac/browser/lyxsvn/dictionaries/trunk/thes/
35622 \begin_layout Standard
35623 To install a new dictionary, download the two files for this dictionary
35624 into the thesaurus path (which is set in
35626 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35627 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
35628 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
35630 \begin_inset space ~
35635 ) and restart \SpecialChar LyX
35637 If this path is not defined yet, you can use a dictionary of your choice
35638 and point \SpecialChar LyX
35642 \begin_layout Standard
35643 Alternatively, you can also install new dictionaries via
35645 LibreOffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
35648 or, on Linux, via your package manager (look for
35654 libreoffice-thesaurus-*
35657 If you do this, make sure that \SpecialChar LyX
35658 is able to find the installed dictionaries,
35660 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35666 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35667 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
35668 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
35670 \begin_inset space ~
35675 points to the path where you installed these dictionaries.
35678 \begin_layout Subsection
35679 Using the thesaurus
35682 \begin_layout Standard
35683 To start the thesaurus, use the menu
35685 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35688 or the toolbar button
35691 arg "thesaurus-entry"
35694 while the cursor is at the word you want to look up or while a word is
35696 A dialog pops up showing you probably related words that you can use as
35698 The suggestions are grouped into categories.
35699 Note that, for some languages (such as English), the thesaurus does not
35700 only show equivalent words (synonyms), but also generic terms (such as
35709 ), related terms (such as
35712 \begin_inset space ~
35721 ), compounds (such as
35724 \begin_inset space ~
35733 ) and opposites (antonyms) (such as
35742 Generic terms, related terms and antonyms are marked as such.
35745 \begin_layout Standard
35746 The language is automatically chosen from the language at the cursor, but
35747 you can also switch it in the dialog, as you can enter new words to look
35751 \begin_layout Standard
35752 Note that the thesaurus cannot handle phrases (only compounds that are in
35753 the dictionary, such as the above
35757 ), and you have to use the so called lemma form, i.
35758 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35762 \begin_inset space \space{}
35765 the form that is used in the dictionaries (for many languages: first person
35766 singular indicative active for nouns, infinitive for verbs).
35767 For example, looking up the word form
35771 yields no results, while results are shown for the word form
35776 Your best bet is to highlight only the relevant part of such a word (e.
35777 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35781 \begin_inset space \space{}
35792 s); then you will get suggestions without needing to adjust the query in
35793 the dialog, and also the replacement will probably be correct (as only
35794 the highlighted part will be replaced; thus the ending remains).
35797 \begin_layout Section
35799 \begin_inset Index idx
35802 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35809 \begin_inset Index idx
35812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35813 Document ! Change Tracking
35819 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35821 name "sec:Change-Tracking"
35828 \begin_layout Standard
35829 When you work on a document collaboratively it is extremely useful to be
35830 able to see changes that others have made highlighted in the document.
35831 You can then decide if you want to accept a change or not.
35832 This can be achieved by turning on change tracking in the menu
35834 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35836 \begin_inset space ~
35839 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
35841 \begin_inset space ~
35849 \begin_layout Standard
35850 Changes made in the document will then be highlighted by strokes and colors:
35864 The color depends on the author that made the change.
35865 You can change the color in
35867 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35868 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
35870 \begin_inset space ~
35874 \begin_inset space ~
35879 \SpecialChar menuseparator
35885 \begin_inset Index idx
35888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35889 Color ! Change tracking
35894 The author and the date of the change are shown in \SpecialChar LyX
35895 's status bar when the
35896 cursor is in changed text.
35897 The same information is shown when you use the toolbar button
35900 arg "changes-merge"
35906 \begin_layout Standard
35907 When change tracking is activated, you will see the review toolbar in \SpecialChar LyX
35909 \begin_inset Index idx
35912 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35921 \begin_layout Standard
35922 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
35928 \begin_layout Standard
35929 \begin_inset Graphics
35930 filename clipart/ChangesToolbar.png
35938 \begin_layout Standard
35939 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
35945 \begin_layout Standard
35946 The review toolbar as shown above contains the following buttons:
35949 \begin_layout Standard
35950 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
35956 \begin_layout Standard
35957 \begin_inset Tabular
35958 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
35959 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
35960 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
35961 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
35962 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
35963 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
35966 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35971 arg "changes-track"
35979 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
35982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35985 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35987 \begin_inset space ~
35990 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
35992 \begin_inset space ~
36001 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36002 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36010 arg "changes-output"
36018 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36024 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36026 \begin_inset space ~
36029 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36031 \begin_inset space ~
36035 \begin_inset space ~
36039 \begin_inset space ~
36048 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36049 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36065 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36069 Jumps to the next change
36075 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36076 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36079 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36084 arg "change-accept"
36092 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36098 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36100 \begin_inset space ~
36103 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36105 \begin_inset space ~
36114 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36115 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36123 arg "change-reject"
36131 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36134 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36137 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36139 \begin_inset space ~
36142 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36144 \begin_inset space ~
36153 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36154 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36162 arg "changes-merge"
36170 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36176 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36178 \begin_inset space ~
36181 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36183 \begin_inset space ~
36192 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36193 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36201 arg "all-changes-accept"
36209 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36215 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36217 \begin_inset space ~
36220 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36222 \begin_inset space ~
36226 \begin_inset space ~
36235 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36236 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36244 arg "all-changes-reject"
36252 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36258 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36260 \begin_inset space ~
36263 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36265 \begin_inset space ~
36269 \begin_inset space ~
36278 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36279 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36282 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36295 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36301 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
36302 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
36304 \begin_inset space ~
36313 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36314 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36330 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36336 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
36338 \begin_inset space ~
36354 \begin_layout Standard
36355 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
36361 \begin_layout Standard
36362 Not all changes are (yet) visualized, especially no format changes like
36382 \begin_layout Standard
36383 The review toolbar helps you to accept, reject, or merge changes – highlight
36384 the change and press one of the desired toolbar buttons.
36385 When you merge changes, a window pops up showing you information about
36386 the next change after the current cursor position.
36387 So you don't need to highlight a certain change.
36388 Within the merge window you can decide to accept or reject changes and
36389 step to the next change.
36390 This way you can jump through all the changes in the document.
36393 \begin_layout Standard
36394 The toolbar has two buttons to handle notes because notes are often important
36395 to describe a change.
36398 \begin_layout Standard
36399 To show the changes made in the output you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36405 \begin_inset Index idx
36408 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36416 You will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
36418 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
36425 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
36429 \begin_layout Section
36430 Comparison of Documents
36431 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36433 name "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
36438 \begin_inset Index idx
36441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36442 Comparison of documents
36450 \begin_layout Standard
36451 You can compare two different \SpecialChar LyX
36454 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
36458 The comparison result is a \SpecialChar LyX
36459 file with change tracking enabled showing the
36461 In the comparison dialog you can select from which document \SpecialChar LyX
36463 the document settings for the resulting difference file with the option
36467 \begin_inset space ~
36471 \begin_inset space ~
36475 \begin_inset space ~
36484 \begin_inset space ~
36488 \begin_inset space ~
36492 \begin_inset space ~
36496 \begin_inset space ~
36500 \begin_inset space ~
36504 \begin_inset space ~
36509 enables the change tracking option
36512 \begin_inset space ~
36516 \begin_inset space ~
36520 \begin_inset space ~
36525 to visualize the differences also in the PDF output of the difference file.
36528 \begin_layout Section
36529 International Support
36530 \begin_inset Index idx
36533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36534 International support
36542 \begin_layout Standard
36543 This section describes how to use \SpecialChar LyX
36544 with any language you want.
36545 For some languages there are special Wiki-pages that explain how to set
36546 up \SpecialChar LyX
36548 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
36550 key "Arabic,Armenian,Farsi,Hebrew,Latvian,Lithuanian,Mongolian,Vietnamese"
36558 \begin_layout Standard
36559 Besides languages, \SpecialChar LyX
36560 also supports phonetic symbols, see section
36561 \begin_inset space ~
36565 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36567 reference "subsec:Special-Character"
36574 \begin_layout Subsection
36576 \begin_inset Index idx
36579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36586 \begin_inset Index idx
36589 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36590 Document ! Settings
36596 \begin_inset Index idx
36599 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36600 Document ! Language
36608 \begin_layout Standard
36611 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36612 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
36615 dialog lets you set
36617 the language, the quote style and character encoding
36622 \begin_layout Standard
36627 you can choose the character encoding map you want to use for \SpecialChar LaTeX
36632 \begin_inset space ~
36637 is the preferred choice and works well in most cases.
36638 For details about the different encoding options see section
36639 \begin_inset space ~
36643 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36645 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
36652 \begin_layout Subsection
36653 Keyboard mapping configuration
36654 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36656 name "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
36663 \begin_layout Standard
36664 If you have for example a U.
36665 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36668 S.-style keyboard and want to write in a language other than English, you
36669 can use an alternate keymap.
36670 For example, if you want to write in Italian, you can configure \SpecialChar LyX
36675 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
36676 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
36677 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
36680 dialog allows you to choose up to two keyboard mappings, see section
36681 \begin_inset space ~
36685 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36687 reference "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
36692 You can choose primary and secondary keyboard languages and then select
36693 which one you want to use.
36696 \begin_layout Standard
36697 Finally, you may just want to change a few key mappings or create an entirely
36698 different keymap (for Vulcan, for instance).
36699 You may, for example, normally write in Italian on a U.
36700 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36703 S.-style keyboard but want to include an occasional quotation in German.
36704 In such a case, you can write your own keyboard mapping or modify an existing
36705 one to support the characters you want.
36706 This and many other customizations are explained in the
36713 \begin_layout Chapter
36716 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36718 name "chap:The-User-Interface"
36725 \begin_layout Standard
36726 This appendix lists all the available menus and describes their functionality.
36727 It is designed as a quick reference if you are searching for a special
36728 topic inside the user's guide.
36731 \begin_layout Section
36733 \begin_inset Index idx
36736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36745 \begin_layout Standard
36750 menu are the basic operations in addition to some more advanced operations.
36753 \begin_layout Subsection
36757 \begin_layout Standard
36758 Creates a new document.
36761 \begin_layout Subsection
36765 \begin_layout Standard
36766 This menu entry prompts you for a template to use.
36767 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
36768 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
36771 \begin_layout Subsection
36775 \begin_layout Standard
36779 \begin_layout Subsection
36783 \begin_layout Standard
36784 The submenu shows a list of the recently opened files.
36785 Click there on a file to open it.
36788 \begin_layout Subsection
36792 \begin_layout Standard
36793 Closes the current document.
36796 \begin_layout Subsection
36800 \begin_layout Standard
36801 Closes all opened documents.
36804 \begin_layout Subsection
36808 \begin_layout Standard
36809 Saves the actual document.
36812 \begin_layout Subsection
36816 \begin_layout Standard
36817 Saves the actual document under a new name to create a copy.
36820 \begin_layout Subsection
36824 \begin_layout Standard
36825 Saves all opened documents.
36828 \begin_layout Subsection
36832 \begin_layout Standard
36833 Reloads the actual document from disk.
36836 \begin_layout Subsection
36840 \begin_layout Standard
36841 This is used when multiple people are working on the same document or when
36842 one person wants to keep a careful archive of changes.
36843 It is described in the section
36845 Version Control in \SpecialChar LyX
36850 Additional Features
36855 \begin_layout Subsection
36859 \begin_layout Standard
36860 Here you can import files from older \SpecialChar LyX
36861 versions, HTML files, \SpecialChar LaTeX
36863 files, plain text files and comma separated, table-like text files (CSV).
36864 The files will be imported as a new \SpecialChar LyX
36868 \begin_layout Standard
36869 When using the menu entry
36872 \begin_inset space ~
36877 , line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph; when using the menu
36881 \begin_inset space ~
36885 \begin_inset space ~
36889 \begin_inset space ~
36894 , consecutive lines of text will be imported to one big paragraph.
36895 A new paragraph will begin when there is a blank line in the file.
36898 \begin_layout Subsection
36900 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36902 name "subsec:Export"
36909 \begin_layout Standard
36910 You can export your document to various file formats.
36911 The resulting files are placed in the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
36913 The menu entries are not the same on all installations.
36914 They depend on the programs found by \SpecialChar LyX
36915 during its configuration.
36918 \begin_layout Standard
36919 Here is a list of all available entries; some of them are explained in detail
36921 \begin_inset space ~
36925 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36927 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
36934 \begin_layout Description
36940 \begin_inset space ~
36943 LyX format of the special \SpecialChar LyX
36945 \begin_inset space ~
36948 1.4.x versions for Chinese, Japanese and Korean (CJK)
36949 \begin_inset Newline newline
36952 Since \SpecialChar LyX
36953 1.5.0 CJK support has been fully integrated into \SpecialChar LyX
36957 \begin_layout Description
36958 DocBook text file with code in the language SGML that is used for the markup
36964 \begin_layout Description
36966 \begin_inset space ~
36969 (XML) text file with code in the language XML that is used for the markup
36975 \begin_layout Description
36976 DraftDVI \SpecialChar LaTeX
36977 's native DVI-format.
36978 This format is not suitable if you have special characters or spaces in
36979 files paths or file names in your document.
36981 use this format internally as a pre-stage to export to
36988 \begin_layout Description
36989 DVI DVI-format that also allows the useage of special characters or spaces
36990 in files paths or file names
36993 \begin_layout Description
36995 \begin_inset space ~
37002 ) DVI-format using the program
37004 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
37007 ; supports Unicode and the usage of non-\SpecialChar TeX
37011 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
37014 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37019 not all DVI-viewers are currently able to display this output format properly.
37027 \begin_layout Description
37029 \begin_inset space ~
37032 (cropped) the same as
37036 but with cropped page margins.
37039 \begin_layout Description
37041 \begin_inset space ~
37044 Dot text file with code in the programming language
37048 which is used to draw visualizations of graphs via the program
37053 \begin_layout Description
37057 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
37060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37065 the exported file will be stored in a subdirectory.
37073 \begin_layout Description
37075 \begin_inset space ~
37079 \begin_inset space ~
37082 Word) HTML-format specialized so that the result can be imported to
37086 ; as a consequence of this formulas will be embedded as bitmap fonts and
37094 \begin_layout Description
37098 \begin_inset space ~
37107 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37108 source that is compilable with the program
37110 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
37114 \begin_layout Description
37118 \begin_inset space ~
37123 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37124 source, additionally all images used in the document
37125 will be converted to a format that is readable by the
37129 program (GIF, JPG, PDF, PNG)
37132 \begin_layout Description
37136 \begin_inset space ~
37141 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37142 source code, additionally all images used in the document
37143 will be converted to the EPS-format, only this format is readable by the
37151 \begin_layout Description
37155 \begin_inset space ~
37164 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37165 source that is compilable with the program
37171 \begin_layout Description
37173 \begin_inset space ~
37177 \begin_inset space ~
37184 ) text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37185 source and also code in the syntax of the music notation
37191 \begin_layout Description
37193 \begin_inset space ~
37196 z.y.x \SpecialChar LyX
37197 -Document in a format readable by the \SpecialChar LyX
37199 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37203 \begin_inset space \space{}
37208 \begin_inset space ~
37212 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37216 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37220 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37224 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37227 represent the version number)
37230 \begin_layout Description
37232 \begin_inset space ~
37236 \begin_inset space ~
37239 (zip|tar.gz) creates a zip-archive or a tar.gz-archive file (depending upon
37240 your system) that contains your document and all files that are necessary
37241 to compile it (images, child documents, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
37245 \begin_layout Description
37246 LyXHTML HTML-format using \SpecialChar LyX
37247 's internal XHTML engine
37250 \begin_layout Description
37252 \begin_inset space ~
37256 \begin_inset space ~
37260 \begin_inset space ~
37264 \begin_inset space ~
37267 XML Office Open XML file, to be opened with
37272 For the conversion the program
37281 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
37284 \begin_layout Description
37285 NoWeb text file with code in the format of the literate programming language
37290 \begin_layout Description
37292 \begin_inset space ~
37295 (Pandoc) OpenDocument file, to be opened with
37297 LibreOffice, OpenOffice, KOffice, Abiword
37300 For the conversion the program
37309 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
37312 \begin_layout Description
37314 \begin_inset space ~
37317 (tex4ht) OpenDocument file.
37318 For the conversion the program
37327 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
37330 \begin_layout Description
37332 \begin_inset space ~
37335 (cropped) the same as
37338 \begin_inset space ~
37343 but with cropped page margins
37346 \begin_layout Description
37350 \begin_inset space ~
37355 PDF-format using the program
37359 , produces internally a DVI-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
37362 \begin_layout Description
37366 \begin_inset space ~
37370 \begin_inset space ~
37378 \begin_inset space ~
37383 but with a reduced pixel resolution of 150
37384 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37388 \begin_inset space \space{}
37391 useful for e-books to be read on tablet PCs or for large documents as intermedia
37395 \begin_layout Description
37399 \begin_inset space ~
37404 PDF-format using the program
37406 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
37409 , produces PDF-files directly
37412 \begin_layout Description
37416 \begin_inset space ~
37421 PDF-format using the program
37425 , produces PDF-files directly
37428 \begin_layout Description
37432 \begin_inset space ~
37437 PDF-format using the program
37441 , produces internally a PostScript-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
37444 \begin_layout Description
37448 \begin_inset space ~
37453 PDF-format using the program
37458 , produces PDF-files directly
37461 \begin_layout Description
37465 \begin_inset space ~
37473 \begin_layout Description
37477 \begin_inset space ~
37481 \begin_inset space ~
37486 text format, the document will first be converted to Postscript format
37487 and then exported as text using the program
37492 \begin_layout Description
37497 PostScript format using the program
37505 options see section
37506 \begin_inset space ~
37510 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37512 reference "subsec:General-output"
37519 \begin_layout Description
37520 Sweave text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37521 source and also code in the statistical programming
37535 it is possible to use
37539 -commands in \SpecialChar LaTeX
37543 \begin_layout Standard
37544 If one of the menu entries
37551 \begin_inset space ~
37560 is missing, you need to update your \SpecialChar LaTeX
37562 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
37564 \begin_inset space ~
37568 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37570 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
37575 \begin_inset Index idx
37578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37579 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
37588 \begin_layout Subsection
37592 \begin_layout Standard
37593 This menu entry will only appear if you have a fax program installed (on
37594 Windows you additionally need to register its program path to \SpecialChar LyX
37597 \begin_inset space ~
37601 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37603 reference "sec:Paths"
37608 With this menu entry you can send your document to a fax program like
37617 The default format of the sent file is PostScript.
37618 The format can be changed in \SpecialChar LyX
37619 's preferences as described in section
37620 \begin_inset space ~
37624 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37626 reference "subsec:Converters"
37633 \begin_layout Subsection
37634 New and Close Window
37637 \begin_layout Standard
37638 Opens or closes a new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
37642 \begin_layout Subsection
37646 \begin_layout Standard
37647 Prompts you to save all unsaved documents and then exits.
37650 \begin_layout Section
37652 \begin_inset Index idx
37655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37664 \begin_layout Subsection
37668 \begin_layout Standard
37669 Described in section
37670 \begin_inset space ~
37674 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37676 reference "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
37683 \begin_layout Subsection
37684 Cut, Copy, Paste, Paste Recent, Paste Special
37687 \begin_layout Standard
37688 Described in section
37689 \begin_inset space ~
37693 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37695 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
37702 \begin_layout Subsection
37706 \begin_layout Standard
37707 Selects the content of the inset in which the cursor currently is.
37708 If the cursor is outside an inset, the whole document will be selected.
37711 \begin_layout Subsection
37715 \begin_layout Standard
37716 Selects the whole document.
37719 \begin_layout Subsection
37720 Find & Replace (Quick)
37723 \begin_layout Standard
37724 Described in section
37725 \begin_inset space ~
37729 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37731 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
37738 \begin_layout Subsection
37739 Find & Replace (Advanced)
37742 \begin_layout Standard
37743 Described in section
37744 \begin_inset space ~
37748 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37750 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
37757 \begin_layout Subsection
37758 Move Paragraph Up/Down
37761 \begin_layout Standard
37762 This shifts the paragraph in which the cursor currently is one paragraph
37766 \begin_layout Subsection
37770 \begin_layout Standard
37771 Described in section
37772 \begin_inset space ~
37776 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37778 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
37785 \begin_layout Subsection
37787 \begin_inset Index idx
37790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37791 Paragraph ! Settings
37799 \begin_layout Standard
37800 Enables you to set the paragraph alignment, line spacing and label width.
37801 These settings only affect the paragraph in which the cursor is currently
37805 \begin_layout Standard
37806 You can also prevent the first line of the paragraph being indented if you
37807 have chosen to separate paragraphs with
37813 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37814 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
37816 \begin_inset space ~
37824 \begin_layout Subsection
37825 Table and Rows & Columns
37828 \begin_layout Standard
37829 These menus only appear if the cursor is inside a table.
37830 It allows you to create multicolumn and multirow cells, add or remove borders
37831 of a cell and to set the alignment of the cell.
37834 \begin_layout Subsection
37838 \begin_layout Standard
37839 This menu only appears if the cursor is inside an inset.
37840 It will dissolve this inset.
37841 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
37845 \begin_layout Subsection
37849 \begin_layout Standard
37850 This menu is only active if the cursor is inside an inset or a formula.
37851 Here you can change the properties of the inset or the formula.
37854 \begin_layout Subsection
37855 Increase/Decrease List Depth
37858 \begin_layout Standard
37859 These menus are only active if the cursor is in an environment that can
37861 They increase/decrease the environment nesting level as explained in section
37862 \begin_inset space ~
37866 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37868 reference "sec:Nesting"
37873 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37875 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
37882 \begin_layout Subsection
37885 Start New Environment/Start New Parent Environment
37888 \begin_layout Standard
37889 These menus are only visible if it is possible to have two consecutive environme
37890 nts of the same type.
37892 \begin_inset space ~
37896 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37898 reference "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
37902 for an explanation.
37905 \begin_layout Section
37907 \begin_inset Index idx
37910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37919 \begin_layout Standard
37920 At the bottom of the
37924 menu the opened documents are listed.
37927 \begin_layout Subsection
37928 Open/Close all Insets
37931 \begin_layout Standard
37932 Opens/closes all insets in your document.
37935 \begin_layout Subsection
37936 Unfold/Fold Math Macros
37939 \begin_layout Standard
37940 Unfolds/folds the current math macro.
37943 \begin_layout Standard
37944 Math macros are described in the
37951 \begin_layout Subsection
37955 \begin_layout Standard
37956 Shows the outline window as described in sections
37957 \begin_inset space ~
37961 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37963 reference "sec:Navigating"
37968 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37970 reference "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
37977 \begin_layout Subsection
37981 \begin_layout Standard
37982 Opens a window showing the source code of the actual document, as described
37984 \begin_inset space ~
37988 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37990 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
37997 \begin_layout Subsection
38001 \begin_layout Standard
38002 Opens a window showing console messages.
38003 This is useful for debugging \SpecialChar LyX
38005 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38008 e., hunt for errors in the program) or to see what is going on in the background
38009 while \SpecialChar LaTeX
38010 is processing the document.
38013 \begin_layout Subsection
38015 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38017 name "subsec:Toolbars"
38022 \begin_inset Index idx
38025 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38034 \begin_layout Standard
38035 In this menu entry you can set the appearance of the different toolbars.
38036 All toolbars and the
38039 \begin_inset space ~
38044 can be turned on and off.
38049 state is denoted in the menu with a checkmark.
38061 \begin_inset space ~
38073 \begin_inset space ~
38078 toolbars can additionally be set to the state
38082 , denoted in the menu with the suffix
38089 \begin_layout Standard
38094 state the toolbar is permanently shown; in the
38098 state the toolbar is only shown when the cursor is in a certain environment
38099 or when a certain feature is enabled.
38100 That means that the review toolbar will only be shown if change tracking
38101 is activated, the math and table toolbars are only shown if the cursor
38102 is inside a formula or table respectively.
38105 \begin_layout Standard
38107 's toolbars and their buttons are explained in section
38108 \begin_inset space ~
38112 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38114 reference "sec:Toolbars"
38121 \begin_layout Subsection
38125 \begin_layout Standard
38129 \begin_inset space ~
38133 \begin_inset space ~
38137 \begin_inset space ~
38141 \begin_inset space ~
38145 \begin_inset space ~
38149 \begin_inset space ~
38154 will split \SpecialChar LyX
38155 's main window vertically while
38158 \begin_inset space ~
38162 \begin_inset space ~
38166 \begin_inset space ~
38170 \begin_inset space ~
38174 \begin_inset space ~
38178 \begin_inset space ~
38183 will split it horizontally.
38184 This allows you to view documents at the same time to compare them, or
38185 to view the same document, but at different positions.
38186 You can even split the main window several times to view, for example,
38187 three or more documents at the same time.
38188 To close a split view, use the menu
38191 \begin_inset space ~
38195 \begin_inset space ~
38203 \begin_layout Subsection
38207 \begin_layout Standard
38208 Closes a split view.
38211 \begin_layout Subsection
38215 \begin_layout Standard
38216 Using this menu entry or pressing F11 removes the menu bar and all toolbars
38217 so that you will see nothing but your text.
38218 It furthermore displays \SpecialChar LyX
38219 's main window fullscreen.
38220 To return from fullscreen to the normal view, press F11, or right-click
38221 and turn off the fullscreen mode in the context menu.
38224 \begin_layout Section
38226 \begin_inset Index idx
38229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38238 \begin_layout Subsection
38242 \begin_layout Standard
38243 Inserts math constructs that are explained in chapter
38244 \begin_inset space ~
38248 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38250 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
38261 \begin_layout Subsection
38263 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38265 name "subsec:Special-Character"
38272 \begin_layout Standard
38273 Here you can insert the following characters:
38276 \begin_layout Description
38281 dialog which allows you to insert any character that can be output by your
38284 By default groups of characters are displayed in character categories;
38285 the available characters depend on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38286 -packages you have installed.
38287 You can get a complete display by checking
38290 \begin_inset space ~
38296 \begin_inset Newline newline
38300 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
38303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38308 Not all characters will be visible in the
38312 dialog because none of the screen fonts that you can set in the preferences
38313 dialog (see section
38314 \begin_inset space ~
38318 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38320 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
38324 ) can display every character.
38332 \begin_layout Description
38333 Ellipsis Inserts an ellipsis: \SpecialChar ldots
38337 \begin_layout Description
38339 \begin_inset space ~
38343 \begin_inset space ~
38346 Sentence Inserts an end of sentence period as described in section
38347 \begin_inset space ~
38351 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38353 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
38360 \begin_layout Description
38362 \begin_inset space ~
38365 Quote Inserts this quote: ", no matter what quote style you selected in
38368 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38369 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
38375 \begin_layout Description
38377 \begin_inset space ~
38380 Quote Inserts a single quote in the quotation marks style selected in the
38383 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38384 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
38390 \begin_layout Description
38392 \begin_inset space ~
38395 Hyphen Inserts a hyphen that is protected from line breaks: \SpecialChar nobreakdash
38399 \begin_layout Description
38401 \begin_inset space ~
38404 Slash Inserts a slash where a line break can also occur: \SpecialChar breakableslash
38408 \begin_layout Description
38410 \begin_inset space ~
38413 Space Inserts a character representing a single space (the one you get when
38419 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
38425 \begin_layout Description
38427 \begin_inset space ~
38430 Separator Inserts the menu separator sign: \SpecialChar menuseparator
38434 \begin_layout Description
38436 \begin_inset space ~
38440 \begin_inset Index idx
38443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38450 \begin_inset Index idx
38453 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38454 Language ! Phonetic symbols
38459 Inserts a box where you can insert symbols from the International Phonetic
38460 Alphabet (IPA) and opens a toolbar which provides a large set of these
38462 To use this feature you must have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38468 \begin_inset Index idx
38471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38479 \begin_inset Newline newline
38482 More information about this feature can be found in the
38488 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
38494 \begin_layout Description
38495 Logos Inserts the logos of the programs \SpecialChar LyX
38497 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
38498 and \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
38502 \begin_layout Subsection
38506 \begin_layout Standard
38507 Opens a submenu with the following options:
38510 \begin_layout Description
38511 Superscript Inserts a superscript: test
38512 \begin_inset script superscript
38514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38523 \begin_layout Description
38524 Subscript Inserts a subscript: test
38525 \begin_inset script subscript
38527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38536 \begin_layout Description
38538 \begin_inset space ~
38541 Space Inserts a protected space as described in section
38542 \begin_inset space ~
38546 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38548 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
38555 \begin_layout Description
38557 \begin_inset space ~
38560 Space Inserts an inter-word space as described in section
38561 \begin_inset space ~
38565 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38567 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
38574 \begin_layout Description
38576 \begin_inset space ~
38579 Space Inserts a thin space as described in section
38580 \begin_inset space ~
38584 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38586 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
38593 \begin_layout Description
38595 \begin_inset space ~
38598 Space Inserts a character to visualize that there is or should be a space.
38600 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38604 \begin_inset space \space{}
38607 useful if you need to indicate a space in a command sequence.
38608 An example from the \SpecialChar LyX
38614 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38617 To insert a fraction use the command
38622 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
38626 \begin_inset Formula $\downarrow$
38632 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38635 The visible space is hereby the character before the
38642 \begin_layout Description
38644 \begin_inset space ~
38647 Space Inserts horizontal space as described in section
38648 \begin_inset space ~
38652 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38654 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
38661 \begin_layout Description
38663 \begin_inset space ~
38666 Line Inserts a horizontal line as described in section
38667 \begin_inset space ~
38671 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38673 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
38680 \begin_layout Description
38682 \begin_inset space ~
38685 Space Inserts vertical space as described in section
38686 \begin_inset space ~
38690 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38692 reference "subsec:Vertical-Space"
38699 \begin_layout Description
38700 Phantom Inserts a Phantom space as described in section
38701 \begin_inset space ~
38705 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38707 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
38714 \begin_layout Description
38716 \begin_inset space ~
38719 Point Inserts a hyphenation point as described in section
38720 \begin_inset space ~
38724 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38726 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
38733 \begin_layout Description
38735 \begin_inset space ~
38738 Break Inserts a ligature break as described in section
38739 \begin_inset space ~
38743 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38745 reference "subsec:Ligatures"
38750 \change_inserted -1402925745 1503938048
38754 \begin_layout Description
38756 \change_inserted -1402925745 1503938353
38758 \begin_inset space ~
38762 \begin_inset space ~
38765 Break Inserts a line break point (ZWSP) that is invisible in the output.
38767 \begin_inset space ~
38771 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38773 reference "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
38780 for a usage example.
38785 \begin_layout Description
38787 \begin_inset space ~
38791 \begin_inset space ~
38794 Break Inserts a forced line break as described in section
38795 \begin_inset space ~
38799 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38801 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
38808 \begin_layout Description
38810 \begin_inset space ~
38813 Break Inserts a forced line break that right justifies the remaining text
38814 as described in section
38815 \begin_inset space ~
38819 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38821 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
38828 \begin_layout Description
38830 \begin_inset space ~
38833 Page Inserts a forced page break as described in section
38834 \begin_inset space ~
38838 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38840 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
38847 \begin_layout Description
38849 \begin_inset space ~
38852 Break Inserts a forced page break that shares the extra space among paragraph
38853 breaks instead of leaving it at the bottom of the page, as described in
38855 \begin_inset space ~
38859 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38861 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
38868 \begin_layout Description
38870 \begin_inset space ~
38873 Page Inserts a clear page break as described in section
38874 \begin_inset space ~
38878 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38880 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
38887 \begin_layout Description
38889 \begin_inset space ~
38893 \begin_inset space ~
38896 Page Inserts a clear doublepage break as described in section
38897 \begin_inset space ~
38901 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38903 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
38910 \begin_layout Subsection
38914 \begin_layout Standard
38915 Various lists can be inserted with this menu entry.
38919 \begin_inset space ~
38940 are described in section
38941 \begin_inset space ~
38945 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38947 reference "sec:toc"
38956 is described in section
38957 \begin_inset space ~
38961 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38963 reference "sec:Index"
38971 is described in section
38972 \begin_inset space ~
38976 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38978 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
38984 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
38987 is described in section
38988 \begin_inset space ~
38992 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38994 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
39001 \begin_layout Subsection
39005 \begin_layout Standard
39006 To insert floats, as described in section
39007 \begin_inset space ~
39011 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39013 reference "sec:Floats"
39017 and in detail the chapter
39024 \begin_inset space ~
39032 \begin_layout Subsection
39036 \begin_layout Standard
39037 To insert notes, described in section
39038 \begin_inset space ~
39042 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39044 reference "sec:Notes"
39051 \begin_layout Subsection
39055 \begin_layout Standard
39056 Inserts a branch inset, if any, and allowing you to create and insert a
39058 Branches are described in section
39059 \begin_inset space ~
39063 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39065 reference "sec:Branches"
39072 \begin_layout Subsection
39076 \begin_layout Standard
39077 Inserts document class-specific insets.
39078 Such insets only exist if they are defined in the layout file for a certain
39080 An example is the document class
39081 \begin_inset Quotes eld
39085 \begin_inset Quotes erd
39088 with three custom insets.
39091 Flex insets and InsetLayout
39095 Installing New Document Classes, The Layout file format
39101 manual explains how custom insets are defined.
39104 \begin_layout Subsection
39106 \begin_inset Index idx
39109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39118 \begin_layout Standard
39119 This menu entry allows you to insert or include the contents of other files
39121 For more information see chapter
39123 External Document Parts
39126 \begin_inset space ~
39132 \begin_layout Subsection
39134 \begin_inset Index idx
39137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39146 \begin_layout Standard
39147 Inserts a box in a certain style.
39148 Boxes are described in detail in the chapter
39155 \begin_inset space ~
39163 \begin_layout Subsection
39167 \begin_layout Standard
39172 dialog as described in section
39173 \begin_inset space ~
39177 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39179 reference "sec:Bibliography"
39186 \begin_layout Subsection
39190 \begin_layout Standard
39195 as described in section
39196 \begin_inset space ~
39200 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39202 reference "sec:Cross-References"
39209 \begin_layout Subsection
39213 \begin_layout Standard
39218 as described in section
39219 \begin_inset space ~
39223 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39225 reference "sec:Cross-References"
39232 \begin_layout Subsection
39234 \begin_inset Index idx
39237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39244 \begin_inset Index idx
39247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39248 Tables ! Multi-page ! Caption
39256 \begin_layout Standard
39257 Inserts a caption in a float or multi-page table.
39258 Floats are described in section
39259 \begin_inset space ~
39263 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39265 reference "sec:Floats"
39269 ; captions in multi-page tables are described in the section
39271 Multi-page Captions
39276 \begin_inset space ~
39284 \begin_layout Subsection
39288 \begin_layout Standard
39289 Inserts an index entry as described in section
39290 \begin_inset space ~
39294 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39296 reference "sec:Index"
39303 \begin_layout Subsection
39307 \begin_layout Standard
39308 Inserts a nomenclature entry as described in section
39309 \begin_inset space ~
39313 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39315 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
39322 \begin_layout Subsection
39326 \begin_layout Standard
39327 Opens a dialog allowing you to specify the rows and columns of the table.
39328 Tables are described in section
39329 \begin_inset space ~
39333 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39335 reference "sec:Tables"
39339 and in detail in the chapter
39346 \begin_inset space ~
39354 \begin_layout Subsection
39358 \begin_layout Standard
39364 Graphics are described in section
39365 \begin_inset space ~
39369 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39371 reference "sec:Graphics"
39378 \begin_layout Subsection
39382 \begin_layout Standard
39383 Inserts a URL as described in section
39384 \begin_inset space ~
39388 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39390 reference "subsec:URLs"
39397 \begin_layout Subsection
39401 \begin_layout Standard
39402 Inserts a hyperlink as described in section
39403 \begin_inset space ~
39407 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39409 reference "subsec:Hyperlinks"
39416 \begin_layout Subsection
39420 \begin_layout Standard
39421 Inserts a footnote as described in section
39422 \begin_inset space ~
39426 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39428 reference "sec:Footnotes"
39435 \begin_layout Subsection
39439 \begin_layout Standard
39440 Inserts a marginal note as described in section
39441 \begin_inset space ~
39445 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39447 reference "sec:Marginal-Notes"
39454 \begin_layout Subsection
39458 \begin_layout Standard
39459 Is only visible if the cursor is in front, in or behind a section heading,
39460 title or caption of a float.
39461 Inserts a short title as described in section
39462 \begin_inset space ~
39466 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39468 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
39475 \begin_layout Subsection
39480 \begin_layout Standard
39481 Inserts a \SpecialChar TeX
39482 Code box as described in section
39483 \begin_inset space ~
39487 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39489 reference "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
39496 \begin_layout Subsection
39498 \begin_inset Index idx
39501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39510 \begin_layout Standard
39511 Inserts a program listings box.
39512 Program listings are explained in the chapter
39514 Program Code Listings
39519 \begin_inset space ~
39527 \begin_layout Subsection
39531 \begin_layout Standard
39532 Inserts the actual date.
39533 The format depends on the date format of the language that is used for
39538 \begin_layout Subsection
39542 \begin_layout Standard
39543 Inserts a preview inset as described in section
39544 \begin_inset space ~
39548 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39550 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
39557 \begin_layout Section
39559 \begin_inset Index idx
39562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39571 \begin_layout Standard
39572 This menu lists the existing chapters, sections, figures, tables, etc.
39573 \begin_inset space ~
39576 of the current document.
39577 This allows you to navigate easily through your document.
39580 \begin_layout Subsection
39584 \begin_layout Standard
39585 With this menu entry you are able to define your own bookmarks.
39586 This is useful when you are working on a large document and often have
39587 to jump, for example, between section
39588 \begin_inset space ~
39592 To create bookmarks for this example, go to section
39593 \begin_inset space ~
39596 2.5 and use the submenu
39599 \begin_inset space ~
39603 \begin_inset space ~
39610 \begin_inset space ~
39616 \begin_inset space ~
39620 \begin_inset space ~
39626 Now you can jump easily between these sections by using the menu or by
39630 arg "bookmark-goto 1"
39636 arg "bookmark-goto 2"
39639 .You can also use bookmarks to jump between several opened documents.
39642 \begin_layout Standard
39643 The saved bookmarks are valid till the document is closed.
39647 \begin_inset space ~
39652 allows you to clear bookmarks while the submenu
39655 \begin_inset space ~
39660 jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
39663 \begin_layout Subsection
39664 Next Note, Change, Cross-reference
39667 \begin_layout Standard
39668 Jump to the next note, change, or cross-reference after the current cursor
39672 \begin_layout Subsection
39676 \begin_layout Standard
39677 Only active if the cursor is in front of a cross-reference.
39678 Sets the cursor before the referenced label.
39679 (It is the same as if you right-click on a cross-reference box and use
39683 \begin_inset space ~
39687 \begin_inset space ~
39695 \begin_layout Subsection
39699 \begin_layout Standard
39700 Allows you to jump directly to the corresponding text part in the output,
39703 The \SpecialChar LyX
39704 Server\SpecialChar menuseparator
39706 \begin_inset space ~
39714 \begin_inset space ~
39719 manual for a detailed description.
39722 \begin_layout Section
39724 \begin_inset Index idx
39727 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39736 \begin_layout Subsection
39740 \begin_layout Standard
39741 Change Tracking is described in section
39742 \begin_inset space ~
39746 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39748 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
39755 \begin_layout Subsection
39763 \begin_layout Standard
39764 After running \SpecialChar LaTeX
39765 by viewing or exporting a document, this menu will be enabled.
39766 It shows the logfile of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39768 You can go to the next error or the next warning, search, copy something
39769 to the clipboard or update the view.
39770 \begin_inset Newline newline
39773 With the help of the logfile, experts can find reasons for \SpecialChar LaTeX
39777 \begin_layout Standard
39780 Open Containing Directory
39782 one can open \SpecialChar LyX
39783 's temporary folder for the document.
39784 This folder contains all converted and created files to generate the output.
39785 Some of these files might be of interest for experts to solve problems
39786 or for writers who need to supply intermediate files.
39787 For example some journals require to send the
39791 file (a text file with the used Bib\SpecialChar TeX
39795 \begin_layout Subsection
39796 Start Appendix Here
39799 \begin_layout Standard
39800 Sets the start of the appendices of the document at the current cursor position
39801 as described in section
39802 \begin_inset space ~
39806 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39808 reference "sec:Appendices"
39815 \begin_layout Subsection
39817 \begin_inset space ~
39823 \begin_layout Standard
39824 This menu entry generates the output in the format you have specified as
39825 default output format for the document (menu
39827 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39828 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
39829 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
39831 \begin_inset space ~
39835 \begin_inset space ~
39841 \begin_inset space ~
39845 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39847 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
39851 ) or in the \SpecialChar LyX
39854 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
39855 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
39857 \begin_inset space ~
39860 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
39862 \begin_inset space ~
39865 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
39867 \begin_inset space ~
39871 \begin_inset space ~
39877 \begin_inset space ~
39881 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39883 reference "sec:File-Formats"
39887 ) and opens it in an appropriate viewer.
39888 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
39890 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
39891 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
39893 \begin_inset space ~
39896 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
39898 \begin_inset space ~
39901 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
39905 \begin_inset space ~
39909 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39911 reference "sec:File-Formats"
39916 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
39917 when it is first configured.
39918 The default output format is
39921 \begin_inset space ~
39929 \begin_layout Subsection
39930 View (Other Formats)
39933 \begin_layout Standard
39934 With this menu you can view your document in alternative output formats.
39935 The menu contains a list of available formats in which you can view the
39936 actual document with an external program.
39937 The menu entries are not the same on all installations — it depends on
39938 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39939 programs that are found when \SpecialChar LyX
39941 All possible formats are listed in section
39942 \begin_inset space ~
39946 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39948 reference "subsec:Export"
39953 You should at least see the menu entry
39958 If it is missing, you need to update or repair your \SpecialChar LaTeX
39960 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
39962 \begin_inset space ~
39966 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39968 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
39973 \begin_inset Index idx
39976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39977 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
39986 \begin_layout Standard
39987 Invoking a view menu will start a viewer program.
39988 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
39990 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
39991 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
39993 \begin_inset space ~
39996 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
39998 \begin_inset space ~
40001 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
40005 \begin_inset space ~
40009 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40011 reference "sec:File-Formats"
40016 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
40017 when it is first configured.
40020 \begin_layout Subsection
40022 \begin_inset space ~
40028 \begin_layout Standard
40029 This menu entry allows you to update the view with your latest changes (in
40030 the default output format) without opening a new viewer window.
40033 \begin_layout Subsection
40034 Update (Other Formats)
40037 \begin_layout Standard
40038 With this menu you can update the view of alternative output formats of
40039 your document without opening a new viewer window.
40042 \begin_layout Subsection
40043 View Master Document
40046 \begin_layout Standard
40047 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
40049 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40053 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40063 \begin_inset space ~
40068 manual for more information on this topic).
40069 This item allows you to view the master document from within its child.
40070 That is, if you are working on a child document which is a chapter of a
40074 \begin_inset space ~
40078 \begin_inset space ~
40083 generates the output of the whole book, while
40087 will just output the chapter alone.
40090 \begin_layout Standard
40091 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
40092 in the document settings (menu
40094 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40095 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
40096 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
40098 \begin_inset space ~
40102 \begin_inset space ~
40108 \begin_inset space ~
40112 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40114 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
40118 ) or in the preferences (menu
40120 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40121 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
40123 \begin_inset space ~
40126 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
40128 \begin_inset space ~
40131 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
40133 \begin_inset space ~
40137 \begin_inset space ~
40143 \begin_inset space ~
40147 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40149 reference "sec:File-Formats"
40156 \begin_layout Subsection
40157 Update Master Document
40160 \begin_layout Standard
40161 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
40163 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40167 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40177 \begin_inset space ~
40182 manual for more information on this topic).
40183 This item allows you to update the view of a master document from within
40184 its child without the need to switch to the master document itself.
40187 \begin_layout Standard
40188 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
40189 in the document settings (menu
40191 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40192 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
40193 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
40195 \begin_inset space ~
40199 \begin_inset space ~
40205 \begin_inset space ~
40209 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40211 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
40215 ) or in the preferences (menu
40217 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40218 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
40220 \begin_inset space ~
40223 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
40225 \begin_inset space ~
40228 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
40230 \begin_inset space ~
40234 \begin_inset space ~
40240 \begin_inset space ~
40244 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40246 reference "sec:File-Formats"
40253 \begin_layout Subsection
40255 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40257 name "subsec:Compressed"
40264 \begin_layout Standard
40265 Un/compresses the current document.
40266 For documents under version control it is strongly recommended to disable
40267 compression (see the
40269 Additional Features
40271 manual for details).
40274 \begin_layout Subsection
40278 \begin_layout Standard
40279 Toggles the read-only state for the document.
40282 \begin_layout Subsection
40286 \begin_layout Standard
40287 The document settings are described in appendix
40288 \begin_inset space ~
40292 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40294 reference "chap:The-Document-Settings"
40301 \begin_layout Section
40303 \begin_inset Index idx
40306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40315 \begin_layout Subsection
40319 \begin_layout Standard
40320 Spell checking is explained in section
40321 \begin_inset space ~
40325 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40327 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
40334 \begin_layout Subsection
40338 \begin_layout Standard
40339 The thesaurus is described in section
40340 \begin_inset space ~
40344 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40346 reference "sec:Thesaurus"
40353 \begin_layout Subsection
40355 \begin_inset Index idx
40358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40365 \begin_inset Index idx
40368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40377 \begin_layout Standard
40378 Returns the number of the words and characters in the actual document or
40379 the highlighted document part.
40382 \begin_layout Subsection
40388 \begin_inset Index idx
40391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40392 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
40401 \begin_layout Standard
40402 Generates with the help of the program
40404 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
40407 a log of possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
40408 -errors and displays it in a dialog.
40409 This feature is not available on Windows.
40412 \begin_layout Subsection
40418 \begin_inset Index idx
40421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40431 \begin_layout Standard
40432 Shows you a list of the document classes and styles installed in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
40437 \begin_inset space ~
40442 to see the full filename paths.
40445 \begin_layout Subsection
40447 \begin_inset Index idx
40450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40459 \begin_layout Standard
40460 Opens a dialog to compare \SpecialChar LyX
40461 files as described in section
40462 \begin_inset space ~
40466 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40468 reference "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
40475 \begin_layout Subsection
40477 \begin_inset Index idx
40480 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40486 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40493 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
40498 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40511 \begin_inset Index idx
40514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40515 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
40524 \begin_layout Standard
40525 Reconfigures \SpecialChar LyX
40526 ; that is, \SpecialChar LyX
40527 looks for \SpecialChar LaTeX
40528 -packages and programs it needs; see
40530 \begin_inset space ~
40534 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40536 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
40543 \begin_layout Subsection
40547 \begin_layout Standard
40552 dialog as described in detail in appendix
40553 \begin_inset space ~
40557 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40559 reference "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
40566 \begin_layout Section
40568 \begin_inset Index idx
40571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40580 \begin_layout Standard
40581 This menu lists the documentation files of \SpecialChar LyX
40582 in the language of \SpecialChar LyX
40584 If a file is not available in this language, the English version will be
40588 \begin_layout Standard
40592 \begin_inset space ~
40597 shows a \SpecialChar LyX
40598 document with information about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40599 packages and classes found
40600 by \SpecialChar LyX
40602 \begin_inset space ~
40606 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40608 reference "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
40615 \begin_layout Standard
40619 \begin_inset space ~
40624 gives information about the copyright, the credits and the \SpecialChar LyX
40629 \begin_layout Section
40631 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40633 name "sec:Toolbars"
40640 \begin_layout Standard
40641 How to show or hide toolbars is explained in section
40642 \begin_inset space ~
40646 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40648 reference "subsec:Toolbars"
40655 \begin_layout Standard
40656 It is also possible to define custom toolbars.
40657 This is described in the
40659 Additional Features
40664 \begin_layout Subsection
40666 \begin_inset Index idx
40669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40678 \begin_layout Standard
40679 \begin_inset Graphics
40680 filename clipart/StandardToolbar.png
40688 \begin_layout Standard
40689 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
40695 \begin_layout Standard
40696 The standard toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
40701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40713 \begin_inset Note Note
40716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40717 This is necessary to left align the following longtables.
40722 manual for more information.
40730 \begin_layout Standard
40731 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
40737 \begin_layout Standard
40738 \begin_inset Tabular
40739 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="2">
40740 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
40741 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
40742 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
40744 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40748 \begin_inset Graphics
40749 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
40759 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40763 pull-down box for the environments
40776 \begin_layout Standard
40777 \begin_inset VSpace -10mm
40783 \begin_layout Standard
40785 \begin_inset Tabular
40786 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="22" columns="2">
40787 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
40788 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
40789 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
40790 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40791 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40807 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40813 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
40820 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40821 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40837 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40843 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
40850 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40851 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40854 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40867 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40873 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
40880 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40881 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40884 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40889 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
40897 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40903 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40910 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40911 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40919 arg "spelling-continuously"
40927 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40931 Spellcheck continuously
40937 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40938 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40954 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40960 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
40967 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40968 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40984 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40990 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
40997 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40998 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41014 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41017 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41020 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41027 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41028 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41044 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41050 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41057 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41058 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41074 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41080 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41087 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41088 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41096 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
41104 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41110 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41112 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41116 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41120 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41129 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41130 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41133 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41136 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
41144 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41150 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41152 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41156 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41160 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41169 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41170 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41178 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
41186 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41192 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
41193 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
41200 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41201 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41217 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41221 Emphasize text, function of the
41223 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41225 \begin_inset space ~
41228 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
41237 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41238 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41254 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41258 Set text to noun style, function of the
41260 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41262 \begin_inset space ~
41265 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
41274 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41275 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41283 arg "textstyle-apply"
41291 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41295 Format text using the current settings in the
41297 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41299 \begin_inset space ~
41302 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
41311 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41312 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41328 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41334 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41335 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
41337 \begin_inset space ~
41346 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41347 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41355 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
41363 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41369 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41376 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41377 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41380 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41383 arg "tabular-insert"
41391 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41397 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41404 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41405 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41408 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41413 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
41421 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41425 Toggle outline window on/off,
41427 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
41434 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41435 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41443 arg "toolbar-toggle math"
41451 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41455 Toggle math toolbar on/off
41461 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41462 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41470 arg "toolbar-toggle table"
41478 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41482 Toggle table toolbar on/off
41495 \begin_layout Subsection
41497 \begin_inset Index idx
41500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41509 \begin_layout Standard
41510 \begin_inset Graphics
41511 filename clipart/ExtraToolbar.png
41519 \begin_layout Standard
41520 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
41526 \begin_layout Standard
41527 The extra toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
41531 \begin_layout Standard
41532 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
41538 \begin_layout Standard
41539 \begin_inset Tabular
41540 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="25" columns="2">
41541 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
41542 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
41543 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
41544 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41545 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41561 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41571 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41572 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41580 arg "layout Enumerate"
41588 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41598 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41599 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41602 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41607 arg "layout Itemize"
41615 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41625 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41626 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41642 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41652 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41653 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41661 arg "layout Description"
41669 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41672 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41679 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41680 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41683 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41688 arg "depth-increment"
41696 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41702 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41704 \begin_inset space ~
41708 \begin_inset space ~
41717 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41718 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41721 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41726 arg "depth-decrement"
41734 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41737 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41740 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41742 \begin_inset space ~
41746 \begin_inset space ~
41755 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41756 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41759 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41764 arg "float-insert figure"
41772 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41778 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41779 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
41786 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41787 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41795 arg "float-insert table"
41803 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41809 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41810 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
41817 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41818 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41821 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41834 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41840 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41847 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41848 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41856 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
41864 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41870 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41877 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41878 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41881 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41886 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
41894 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41900 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41907 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41908 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41924 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41930 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41932 \begin_inset space ~
41941 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41942 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41950 arg "nomencl-insert"
41958 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41964 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41966 \begin_inset space ~
41975 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41976 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41984 arg "footnote-insert"
41992 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41998 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42005 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42006 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42014 arg "marginalnote-insert"
42022 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42025 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42028 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42030 \begin_inset space ~
42039 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42040 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42043 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42056 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42062 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42063 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
42065 \begin_inset space ~
42074 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42075 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42083 arg "box-insert Frameless"
42091 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42097 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42104 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42105 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42121 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42127 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42134 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42135 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42151 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42157 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42159 \begin_inset space ~
42168 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42169 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42177 arg "math-macro newmacroname newcommand"
42185 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42191 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42192 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
42199 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42200 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42208 arg "dialog-show-new-inset include"
42216 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42222 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42223 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
42225 \begin_inset space ~
42234 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42235 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42243 arg "dialog-show character"
42251 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42257 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
42259 \begin_inset space ~
42262 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
42269 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42270 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42278 arg "layout-paragraph"
42286 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42292 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
42294 \begin_inset space ~
42303 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42304 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42312 arg "thesaurus-entry"
42320 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42323 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42326 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42340 \begin_layout Subsection
42341 View/Update Toolbar
42342 \begin_inset Index idx
42345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42346 Toolbar ! View / Update
42354 \begin_layout Standard
42355 \begin_inset Graphics
42356 filename clipart/ViewToolbar.png
42363 \begin_layout Standard
42364 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
42370 \begin_layout Standard
42371 The view/update toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
42375 \begin_layout Standard
42376 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
42382 \begin_layout Standard
42383 \begin_inset Tabular
42384 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="7" columns="2">
42385 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
42386 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
42387 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
42388 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42389 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42405 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42408 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42411 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42418 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42419 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42422 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42427 arg "buffer-update"
42435 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42441 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42448 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42449 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42452 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42457 arg "master-buffer-view"
42465 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42471 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42473 \begin_inset space ~
42482 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42483 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42486 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42491 arg "master-buffer-update"
42499 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42505 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42507 \begin_inset space ~
42511 \begin_inset space ~
42520 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42521 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42529 arg "buffer-toggle-output-sync"
42537 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42543 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42544 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
42545 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
42546 Synchronize with Output
42552 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42553 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42569 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42575 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42576 View (Other Formats)
42582 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42583 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42589 arg "update-others"
42597 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42603 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42604 Update (Other Formats)
42617 \begin_layout Standard
42618 * These icons might look different for you if you do not use the default
42622 \begin_layout Subsection
42626 \begin_layout Standard
42627 The change tracking toolbar is explained in section
42628 \begin_inset space ~
42632 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42634 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
42638 , the table toolbar
42639 \begin_inset Index idx
42642 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42651 \begin_inset space ~
42656 manual and the math macro toolbar
42657 \begin_inset Index idx
42660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42673 \begin_layout Chapter
42674 The Document Settings
42675 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42677 name "chap:The-Document-Settings"
42682 \begin_inset Index idx
42685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42686 Document ! Settings
42694 \begin_layout Standard
42698 \begin_inset space ~
42703 s dialog contains submenus to set properties for the whole document and
42704 is called with the menu
42706 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42710 You can save your document settings as default with the
42712 Save as Document Defaults
42714 button in any dialog.
42715 This will create a template named
42719 which is automatically loaded by \SpecialChar LyX
42720 when you create a new document without
42724 \begin_layout Standard
42729 resets the document settings to the default of the document class.
42730 This affects mostly class options, the page layout and Numbering & TOC.
42733 \begin_layout Standard
42734 The different submenus of the dialog are explained in the following sections.
42735 There are so many document settings available that it might take a while
42736 to find the one you are looking for.
42737 To find a setting quicker, you can use the search field which is above
42738 the submenus of the dialog.
42740 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42744 \begin_inset space \space{}
42748 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42752 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42755 , you will see that some submenus will be grayed-out and disabled.
42756 Only the submenus with page settings stay enabled.
42757 The found page settings are labeled red in these submenus.
42760 \begin_layout Section
42764 \begin_layout Standard
42765 Here you set the document class, class options, a graphics driver, and a
42767 Document classes are described in section
42768 \begin_inset space ~
42772 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42774 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
42782 \begin_layout Standard
42786 \begin_inset space ~
42791 you can load you own layout-file, that is not in \SpecialChar LyX
42796 folder and thus not recognized by \SpecialChar LyX
42797 as a layout for a document class.
42798 For more about layout-files, see the chapter
42800 Installing New Document Classes, Types of Layout Files
42809 \begin_layout Standard
42810 Some classes use special class options by default.
42811 If this is the case, they are listed in the field
42815 and you can decide to use them or not.
42816 If you do not know exactly what the default class options are for, it is
42817 recommended you leave them untouched.
42822 is used for \SpecialChar LaTeX
42823 's graphics, color and page layout packages.
42828 , the default driver for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42830 It is recommended that you use the default unless you know what you are
42835 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42836 When you want to use one of the following drivers
42837 \begin_inset Newline newline
42842 dvi2ps, dvialw, dvilaser, dvitops, psprint, pubps, ln
42845 \begin_inset Newline newline
42848 you first have to activate them in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
42849 distribution, see section
42854 \begin_inset CommandInset href
42856 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/graphics/grfguide.pdf"
42869 \begin_layout Standard
42874 document is necessary if the current document is a child or subdocument.
42875 The master document will be used by \SpecialChar LyX
42876 in the background if the child document
42877 is opened without its master.
42878 This way child documents are always compilable.
42879 More about master and child documents is explained in the section
42886 \begin_inset space ~
42894 \begin_layout Standard
42895 There is also an option to suppress the date and one to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42906 \begin_inset Index idx
42909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42911 packages ! prettyref
42917 \begin_inset Index idx
42920 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42922 packages ! refstyle
42927 for cross-references, see section
42928 \begin_inset space ~
42932 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42934 reference "sec:Cross-References"
42941 \begin_layout Section
42945 \begin_layout Standard
42946 This submenu is only visible when your document includes child documents.
42947 Please refer to the section
42950 \begin_inset space ~
42958 \begin_inset space ~
42963 manual for details.
42966 \begin_layout Section
42970 \begin_layout Standard
42971 Modules are explained in section
42972 \begin_inset space ~
42976 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42978 reference "subsec:Modules"
42985 \begin_layout Section
42989 \begin_layout Standard
42991 \begin_inset space ~
42995 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42997 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
43004 \begin_layout Section
43008 \begin_layout Standard
43009 The document font settings are described in section
43010 \begin_inset space ~
43014 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43016 reference "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
43023 \begin_layout Section
43027 \begin_layout Standard
43028 You can specify if paragraphs should be separated by
43040 \begin_inset space ~
43045 and whether it should be a
43048 \begin_inset space ~
43053 can also be specified here.
43056 \begin_layout Standard
43057 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
43058 will not show two columns or the specified line spacing on screen.
43059 That would be impractical, often unreadable, and is not part of the WYSIWYM
43061 However, it will be as you specified in the output.
43064 \begin_layout Standard
43067 Use justification in \SpecialChar LyX
43070 you can decide if \SpecialChar LyX
43071 justifies the text on screen.
43072 This only affects the text inside \SpecialChar LyX
43076 \begin_layout Section
43080 \begin_layout Standard
43081 This dialog is described in sections
43082 \begin_inset space ~
43086 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43088 reference "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
43093 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43095 reference "subsec:Document-Layout"
43102 \begin_layout Section
43106 \begin_layout Standard
43107 Here you can adjust the page margins as described in section
43108 \begin_inset space ~
43112 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43114 reference "subsec:Margins"
43121 \begin_layout Section
43123 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43125 name "sec:Language-encodings"
43130 \begin_inset Index idx
43133 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43134 Language ! Encoding
43142 \begin_layout Standard
43143 The document language and quote styles are set here.
43144 The encoding specifies how the document content is exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
43145 (the \SpecialChar LyX
43147 is always encoded in utf8).
43148 All characters that cannot be encoded using the specified encoding will
43149 be exported as \SpecialChar LaTeX
43150 -commands (this can fail if a \SpecialChar LaTeX
43151 -command is not known for
43152 a particular character).
43155 \begin_layout Standard
43156 If you use the option
43161 determines the encoding of a text part from the language of this text.
43162 If the document contains text in more than one language you may get more
43163 than one encoding in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43165 If you do not use this option then the complete document will always use
43166 exactly one encoding.
43167 Checking this option is the preferred setting.
43170 \begin_layout Standard
43172 also supports Unicode output, which is particularly useful if you need
43173 lots of special symbols or non-alphabetic scripts, respectively.
43174 If you want to use this (and your \SpecialChar LaTeX
43175 installation supports Unicode), choose
43176 one of the four utf8 variants from the list below.
43177 Unfortunately the Unicode support of standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
43178 is quite incomplete, so
43179 it is not uncommon that a file with lots of Unicode symbols works fine
43184 (when \SpecialChar LyX
43185 uses its list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
43186 -commands), but does not work with a fixed
43187 utf8 encoding (when the list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
43188 -commands is not used, because all
43189 Unicode symbols can be encoded in utf8).
43190 The situation is much better with Xe\SpecialChar TeX
43191 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
43192 , two new alternative engines
43193 to standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
43195 Both engines support Unicode natively.
43197 now also supports these two engines (via the output formats
43200 \begin_inset space ~
43208 \begin_inset space ~
43216 \begin_inset space ~
43222 \begin_inset space ~
43226 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43228 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
43233 So if you are using many special or accented characters and
43237 fails, you might try out one of these new engines.
43240 \begin_layout Standard
43244 \begin_inset space ~
43249 determines the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43250 -package that is used for hyphenation and the translation
43252 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43256 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43260 The possible settings are:
43263 \begin_layout Description
43264 Default uses the language package that is selected in
43266 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
43267 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
43271 \begin_inset space ~
43275 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43277 reference "subsec:Prefs-Language"
43284 \begin_layout Description
43285 Automatic selects the most suitable language package for the view/export
43286 format you will use.
43287 In many cases this will be
43292 \begin_inset Index idx
43295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43303 If the newer package
43308 \begin_inset Index idx
43311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43313 packages ! polyglossia
43318 is more appropriate (is the case when using Xe\SpecialChar TeX
43319 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
43320 and non-\SpecialChar TeX
43322 this package will be used instead of
43329 \begin_layout Description
43331 \begin_inset space ~
43342 would be more appropriate.
43345 \begin_layout Description
43346 Custom allows you to specify a language package command of your choice.
43347 For example if you want to use a language-specific package like
43351 (for German texts), type in
43354 \begin_inset Newline newline
43359 usepackage{ngerman}
43362 \begin_layout Description
43363 None will not use a language package.
43364 This is necessary for some document classes for scientific articles.
43367 \begin_layout Standard
43368 Here is a list with the important encodings:
43371 \begin_layout Description
43373 \begin_inset space ~
43377 \begin_inset space ~
43381 \begin_inset space ~
43388 , but the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43394 \begin_inset Index idx
43397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43399 packages ! inputenc
43405 When using this, you probably need to load some additional packages manually
43406 in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign
43407 languages in \SpecialChar TeX
43411 \begin_layout Description
43412 ASCII the ASCII encoding, covers only plain English (7-bit ASCII).
43414 converts all other characters into \SpecialChar LaTeX
43415 commands, which may result in a big
43416 file when lots of \SpecialChar LaTeX
43417 -commands are needed.
43420 \begin_layout Description
43422 \begin_inset space ~
43426 \begin_inset space ~
43429 1256) MS Windows code page for Arabic and Farsi
43432 \begin_layout Description
43434 \begin_inset space ~
43438 \begin_inset space ~
43441 8859-6) for Arabic and Farsi
43444 \begin_layout Description
43446 \begin_inset space ~
43449 (ArmSCII8) for Armenian
43452 \begin_layout Description
43454 \begin_inset space ~
43458 \begin_inset space ~
43461 1257) MS Windows code page for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, the same
43462 as the ISO-8859-13 encoding
43465 \begin_layout Description
43467 \begin_inset space ~
43471 \begin_inset space ~
43474 8859-13) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a superset of the ISO-8859-4
43478 \begin_layout Description
43480 \begin_inset space ~
43484 \begin_inset space ~
43487 8859-4) (latin 4) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a subset of the
43488 ISO-8859-13 encoding
43491 \begin_layout Description
43493 \begin_inset space ~
43497 \begin_inset space ~
43501 \begin_inset space ~
43504 1250) MS Windows code page for ISO
43505 \begin_inset space ~
43511 \begin_layout Description
43513 \begin_inset space ~
43517 \begin_inset space ~
43521 \begin_inset space ~
43524 8859-2) (latin 2) covers Albanian, Croatian, Czech, German, Hungarian, Polish,
43525 Romanian, Slovak and Slovenian
43528 \begin_layout Description
43530 \begin_inset space ~
43534 \begin_inset space ~
43537 (EUC-CN) for simplified Chinese, used especially on UNIX OSes, since 2001
43538 this encoding is officially replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030
43539 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
43540 you should try to use the encoding Unicode
43541 \begin_inset space ~
43545 \begin_inset space ~
43551 \begin_layout Description
43553 \begin_inset space ~
43557 \begin_inset space ~
43560 (GBK) for simplified Chinese, is the same as the Windows code page CP 936
43561 except for the Euro currency sign, since 2001 this encoding is officially
43562 replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
43564 should try to use the encoding Unicode
43565 \begin_inset space ~
43569 \begin_inset space ~
43575 \begin_layout Description
43577 \begin_inset space ~
43581 \begin_inset space ~
43584 (EUC-TW) for traditional Chinese
43587 \begin_layout Description
43589 \begin_inset space ~
43593 \begin_inset space ~
43596 1251) MS Windows code page for Cyrillic
43599 \begin_layout Description
43601 \begin_inset space ~
43605 \begin_inset space ~
43608 8859-5) covers Belorussian, Bulgarian, Macedonian, Serbian and Ukrainian
43611 \begin_layout Description
43613 \begin_inset space ~
43616 (KOI8-R) standard Cyrillic especially for Russian
43619 \begin_layout Description
43621 \begin_inset space ~
43624 (KOI8-U) Cyrillic for Ukrainian
43627 \begin_layout Description
43629 \begin_inset space ~
43633 \begin_inset space ~
43636 154) Cyrillic for Kazakh
43639 \begin_layout Description
43641 \begin_inset space ~
43645 \begin_inset space ~
43651 \begin_layout Description
43653 \begin_inset space ~
43657 \begin_inset space ~
43660 1255) MS Windows code page for Hebrew, a superset of the ISO-8859-8 encoding
43663 \begin_layout Description
43665 \begin_inset space ~
43669 \begin_inset space ~
43675 \begin_layout Description
43677 \begin_inset space ~
43681 \begin_inset space ~
43684 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43690 \begin_inset Index idx
43693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43700 , when using this, set the document language to
43705 \begin_layout Description
43707 \begin_inset space ~
43711 \begin_inset space ~
43714 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43719 , when using this, set the document language to
43722 \begin_inset space ~
43728 \begin_layout Description
43730 \begin_inset space ~
43734 \begin_inset space ~
43737 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43743 \begin_inset Index idx
43746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43748 packages ! japanese
43753 , when using this, set the document language to
43758 \begin_layout Description
43760 \begin_inset space ~
43764 \begin_inset space ~
43767 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43772 , when using this, set the document language to
43777 \begin_layout Description
43779 \begin_inset space ~
43783 \begin_inset space ~
43786 (SJIS) SJIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43791 , when using this, set the document language to
43796 \begin_layout Description
43798 \begin_inset space ~
43801 (EUC-KR) for Korean
43804 \begin_layout Description
43806 \begin_inset space ~
43810 \begin_inset space ~
43814 \begin_inset space ~
43817 8859-3) (latin 3) covers Esperanto, Galician, Maltese and Turkish
43820 \begin_layout Description
43822 \begin_inset space ~
43826 \begin_inset space ~
43830 \begin_inset space ~
43833 8859-16) (latin 10) covers Albanian, Croatian, Finnish, French, German,
43834 Hungarian, Irish Gaelic, Italian, Polish, Romanian and Slovenian, is designed
43835 to cover many languages and characters with diacritics
43838 \begin_layout Description
43840 \begin_inset space ~
43844 \begin_inset space ~
43850 \begin_layout Description
43852 \begin_inset space ~
43856 \begin_inset space ~
43859 8859-9) (latin 5) for Turkish, is like the ISO-8859-1 encoding where the
43860 Icelandic letters are replaced by Turkish ones
43863 \begin_layout Description
43865 \begin_inset space ~
43869 \begin_inset space ~
43872 (utf8) Unicode utf8 with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43878 \begin_inset Index idx
43881 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43888 (for the languages Chinese, Japanese and Korean)
43891 \begin_layout Description
43893 \begin_inset space ~
43901 \begin_inset space ~
43904 (utf8) Unicode utf8 to be used with
43911 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
43914 , which use Unicode directly, without the help of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43921 automatically selects this encoding if you export or preview Xe\SpecialChar TeX
43922 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
43924 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
43927 \begin_layout Description
43929 \begin_inset space ~
43933 \begin_inset space ~
43936 (utf8x) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43942 \begin_inset Index idx
43945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43952 (comprehensive, including Latin, Greek, Cyrillic and CJK scripts).
43955 \begin_layout Description
43957 \begin_inset space ~
43960 (utf8) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43966 \begin_inset Index idx
43969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43971 packages ! inputenc
43977 Currently only a limited range of characters (mainly for Latin scripts)
43981 \begin_layout Description
43983 \begin_inset space ~
43987 \begin_inset space ~
43991 \begin_inset space ~
43994 1252) MS Windows code page for ISO
43995 \begin_inset space ~
44001 \begin_layout Description
44003 \begin_inset space ~
44007 \begin_inset space ~
44011 \begin_inset space ~
44014 8859-1) (latin 1) covers the languages Albanian, Catalan, Danish, Dutch,
44015 English, Faroese, Finnish, French, Galician, German, Icelandic, Irish,
44016 Italian, Norwegian, Portuguese, Spanish and Swedish; better use the ISO-8859-15
44020 \begin_layout Description
44022 \begin_inset space ~
44026 \begin_inset space ~
44030 \begin_inset space ~
44033 8859-15) (latin 9) like the ISO-8859-1 encoding, but with the Euro currency
44034 sign, the œ-ligature and some characters used for French and Finnish
44037 \begin_layout Section
44039 \begin_inset Index idx
44042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44049 \begin_inset Index idx
44052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44059 \begin_inset Index idx
44062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44063 Color ! Shaded boxes
44069 \begin_inset Index idx
44072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44073 Color ! Greyed-out notes
44081 \begin_layout Standard
44082 Here you can alter the font color for the
44086 (default: black), for
44089 \begin_inset space ~
44094 (default: light grey)for the background color for the
44098 (default: white) and for
44101 \begin_inset space ~
44111 sets the color back to the default.
44114 \begin_layout Standard
44115 Clicking any button showing
44123 opens a dialog enabling you to choose from a selection of colors or from
44124 a color-picker or to specify a color using HSL or RGB values.
44125 In the dialog you can add any color to the custom colors to select them
44126 later more quickly.
44129 \begin_layout Standard
44130 Note, if you change the
44133 \begin_inset space ~
44138 font color and use the option
44141 \begin_inset space ~
44146 in the document settings under
44149 \begin_inset space ~
44154 , you probably also need to change the link font color as described in section
44155 \begin_inset space ~
44159 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44161 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
44168 \begin_layout Standard
44169 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
44175 \begin_layout Standard
44179 \begin_inset space ~
44188 background for every page in your document if you use these commands as
44191 \begin_inset space ~
44194 Code after a forced page break:
44197 \begin_layout Itemize
44198 For the page color:
44199 \begin_inset Newline newline
44206 pagecolor{color name}
44209 \begin_layout Itemize
44210 For the text color:
44211 \begin_inset Newline newline
44221 \begin_layout Standard
44222 You are restricted to one of
44258 unless you have defined your own color (see the section
44265 \begin_inset space ~
44271 \begin_inset Newline newline
44274 If you have changed a text or background color, you can use the following
44275 names to refer to them:
44278 \begin_layout Itemize
44284 \begin_inset Newline newline
44289 page_backgroundcolor
44292 \begin_layout Itemize
44296 \begin_inset space ~
44302 \begin_inset Newline newline
44310 \begin_layout Itemize
44314 \begin_inset space ~
44320 \begin_inset Newline newline
44328 \begin_layout Itemize
44332 \begin_inset space ~
44338 \begin_inset Newline newline
44346 \begin_layout Standard
44347 To see how to define and use custom colors, see section
44350 \begin_inset space ~
44358 \begin_inset space ~
44366 \begin_layout Section
44370 \begin_layout Standard
44371 Here you can adjust the
44375 depth of section headings and the section depth in the
44379 as described in section
44380 \begin_inset space ~
44384 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44386 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
44393 \begin_layout Section
44397 \begin_layout Standard
44398 Here you can specify if a specific citation style using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44404 \begin_inset Index idx
44407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44409 packages ! biblatex
44419 \begin_inset Index idx
44422 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44434 \begin_inset Index idx
44437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44445 If you use Bib\SpecialChar TeX
44448 Sectioned bibliography
44450 using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44456 \begin_inset Index idx
44459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44461 packages ! bibtopic
44471 , you can select the style files and specify further options.
44472 Finally, you can select a document-specific
44476 for the generation of the bibliography.
44477 For a further description of these possibilities see section
44478 \begin_inset space ~
44482 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44484 reference "sec:Bibliography"
44491 \begin_layout Section
44495 \begin_layout Standard
44496 Here you can define the
44500 that will generate your index and you can define additional indexes (see
44502 \begin_inset space ~
44506 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44508 reference "sec:Index"
44515 \begin_layout Section
44519 \begin_layout Standard
44520 The PDF properties are explained in section
44521 \begin_inset space ~
44525 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44527 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
44534 \begin_layout Section
44538 \begin_layout Standard
44539 These options will force \SpecialChar LyX
44540 to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44546 \begin_inset Index idx
44549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44561 \begin_inset Index idx
44564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44576 \begin_inset Index idx
44579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44591 \begin_inset Index idx
44594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44606 \begin_inset Index idx
44609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44611 packages ! mathdots
44621 \begin_inset Index idx
44624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44626 packages ! mathtools
44636 \begin_inset Index idx
44639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44651 \begin_inset Index idx
44654 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44656 packages ! stackrel
44666 \begin_inset Index idx
44669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44671 packages ! stmaryrd
44681 \begin_inset Index idx
44684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44686 packages ! undertilde
44691 , or to use them automatically when they are needed.
44694 \begin_layout Description
44695 amsmath is needed for many constructs, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
44696 -errors in formulas,
44697 ensure that you have this enabled.
44700 \begin_layout Description
44701 amssymb is needed for some special math symbols like bold or upright Greek
44702 letters, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
44703 -errors in formulas, ensure that you have this
44707 \begin_layout Description
44708 cancel is used for canceled formulas, see section
44711 \begin_inset space ~
44723 \begin_layout Description
44724 esint is used for special integral characters, see section
44727 \begin_inset space ~
44739 \begin_layout Description
44740 mathdots is used for special ellipses, see section
44751 \begin_layout Description
44752 mathtools is used for the math commands
44788 and labeled arrows, see the corresponding sections in the
44795 \begin_layout Description
44796 mhchem is used for chemical equations, see section
44798 Chemical Symbols and Equations
44807 \begin_layout Description
44808 stackrel is used for the math command
44825 \begin_layout Description
44826 stmaryrd is used for a few special math symbols.
44829 \begin_layout Description
44830 undertilde is used for the math command
44838 Accents for one Character
44847 \begin_layout Section
44851 \begin_layout Standard
44852 The float placement options are described in the section
44855 \begin_inset space ~
44863 \begin_inset space ~
44871 \begin_layout Section
44875 \begin_layout Standard
44876 The listings settings are explained in the chapter
44878 Program Code Listings
44883 \begin_inset space ~
44891 \begin_layout Section
44895 \begin_layout Standard
44896 Here you can adjust the characters used for the itemize
44904 set to be used and set the
44909 The itemize environment is described in section
44910 \begin_inset space ~
44914 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44916 reference "sec:Itemize"
44923 \begin_layout Standard
44924 You can furthermore specify a
44927 \begin_inset space ~
44932 by inserting in this field the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44933 command of the desired character.
44934 For example to use the € sign, you have to insert the command
44941 For math symbols you additionally need to enclose the command with $ signs.
44943 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44947 \begin_inset space \space{}
44951 \begin_inset Formula $\circlearrowright$
44961 To find the command for a math symbol, create a formula and hover the mouse
44962 over the desired symbol in the math toolbar.
44965 \begin_layout Standard
44966 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
44969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44974 Some characters require to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
44975 -packages in the preamble (menu
44978 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44979 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
44982 \begin_inset space ~
44988 For example for the € sign one needs to add the line
44992 usepackage{textcomp}
44995 For most math symbols it is sufficient to add the line
44999 usepackage{amssymb}
45009 \begin_layout Section
45013 \begin_layout Standard
45014 Branches are described in section
45015 \begin_inset space ~
45019 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45021 reference "sec:Branches"
45028 \begin_layout Section
45030 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45032 name "sec:Doc-Formats"
45039 \begin_layout Standard
45040 Here you can define some output specifics for the current document:
45043 \begin_layout Description
45045 \begin_inset space ~
45049 \begin_inset space ~
45052 Format: The format that is used when you enter
45053 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45057 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45061 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45065 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45069 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45072 View Master Document
45073 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45077 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45080 Update Master Document
45081 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45088 menu or the toolbar.
45089 The default is set in
45091 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
45092 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
45094 \begin_inset space ~
45097 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
45101 \begin_inset space ~
45105 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45107 reference "sec:File-Formats"
45114 \begin_layout Description
45116 \begin_inset space ~
45120 \begin_inset space ~
45123 Output settings for the menu
45125 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
45127 \begin_inset space ~
45133 For a detailed description see section
45135 Reverse DVI/PDF search
45140 \begin_inset space ~
45148 \begin_layout Description
45150 \begin_inset space ~
45154 \begin_inset space ~
45157 Options offers settings for the export format
45165 \begin_inset space ~
45170 will assure that the output follows exactly version
45171 \begin_inset space ~
45174 1.1 of the XHTML standard.
45178 \begin_inset space ~
45183 settings are described in detail in section
45185 Math Output in XHTML
45190 \begin_inset space ~
45199 \begin_inset space ~
45203 \begin_inset space ~
45208 is used for the size of equations in the output.
45211 \begin_layout Description
45213 \begin_inset space ~
45218 Save transient properties
45220 controls whether document settings that are frequently switched or that
45221 are specific to the user are saved with the document.
45222 The properties that are affected by option are currently:
45226 \begin_layout Itemize
45227 the activation of change tracking
45230 \begin_layout Itemize
45231 the output of tracked changes
45234 \begin_layout Itemize
45235 the recording of the document directory path.
45238 \begin_layout Standard
45239 Disabling the option can prevent issues in collaborative work and/or when
45240 using a version control system (for instance unnecessary merge conflicts).
45244 \begin_layout Section
45252 \begin_layout Standard
45253 In this text field you can enter commands to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
45255 define \SpecialChar LaTeX
45257 The preamble is a thing for \SpecialChar LaTeX
45259 You should not enter commands here until you know exactly what you are
45263 \begin_layout Standard
45264 An introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45265 -syntax is given in section
45266 \begin_inset space ~
45270 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45272 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
45279 \begin_layout Chapter
45285 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45287 name "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
45292 \begin_inset Index idx
45295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45304 \begin_layout Standard
45305 The preferences dialog is called with the menu
45307 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
45311 It has the following submenus.
45314 \begin_layout Section
45318 \begin_layout Subsection
45322 \begin_layout Subsubsection
45323 User Interface File
45324 \begin_inset Index idx
45327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45328 Customization ! of toolbars
45334 \begin_inset Index idx
45337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45338 Customization ! of menus
45346 \begin_layout Standard
45347 The appearance of the menus and toolbars can be changed by choosing a user
45348 interface (ui) file.
45349 A ui-file is a text file where the toolbars and menus are listed.
45357 \begin_layout Description
45362 specifies the menu entries for the standard menus
45365 \begin_layout Description
45372 the menu entries in popup context menus
45375 \begin_layout Description
45380 specifies the toolbar buttons
45383 \begin_layout Standard
45384 To create your own menu and toolbar layout, start with a copy of these files
45385 and edit the entries.
45388 \begin_layout Standard
45389 The syntax of the .inc-files is straightforward: the
45401 entries must be finished with an explicit
45426 and in the case of the
45427 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45431 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45439 The syntax for the entries is:
45442 \begin_layout Standard
45443 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
45449 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45457 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45461 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45466 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45472 \begin_layout Standard
45474 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
45477 All the \SpecialChar LyX
45478 -functions are listed in the menu
45480 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
45482 \begin_inset space ~
45490 \begin_layout Standard
45491 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
45497 \begin_layout Standard
45498 For example, assuming you use the menu
45500 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
45503 quite often and therefore want six available bookmarks, you can add the
45507 \begin_layout Standard
45508 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
45514 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45518 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45522 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45526 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45532 \begin_layout Standard
45534 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
45538 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45542 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45549 to have the sixth bookmark.
45552 \begin_layout Standard
45556 \begin_inset space ~
45561 allows you to change the appearance of \SpecialChar LyX
45562 's toolbar buttons.
45563 The currently available icon sets are compared in
45564 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45567 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/uploads/LyX/NewInLyX20/themes.png"
45575 \begin_layout Subsubsection
45579 \begin_layout Standard
45582 Enable tool tips in main work area
45584 enables tool tips showing the content of closed insets like index entries
45588 \begin_layout Subsubsection
45592 \begin_layout Standard
45597 is the number of last opened files that \SpecialChar LyX
45598 should display in the menu
45600 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
45602 \begin_inset space ~
45610 \begin_layout Subsection
45614 \begin_layout Subsubsection
45618 \begin_layout Standard
45621 Restore window layouts and geometries
45624 's main window will be opened with the size and layout that was used in
45625 the last \SpecialChar LyX
45629 \begin_layout Standard
45632 Restore cursor positions
45634 sets the cursor to the position in the file where it was at the end of
45638 \begin_layout Standard
45641 Load opened files from last session
45643 opens all files that were opened in the last \SpecialChar LyX
45647 \begin_layout Standard
45650 Clear all session information
45652 deletes all information from previous \SpecialChar LyX
45653 sessions (cursor positions, names
45654 of last opened documents, etc.).
45657 \begin_layout Subsubsection
45659 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45661 name "subsec:Backup documents"
45666 \begin_inset Index idx
45669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45678 \begin_layout Standard
45681 Backup original documents when saving
45683 creates a backup copy of the file in the state when it was opened or when
45684 it was saved the last time.
45685 It is stored in the
45688 \begin_inset space ~
45694 \begin_inset space ~
45698 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45700 reference "sec:Paths"
45704 ) or in the same folder as your document if no
45707 \begin_inset space ~
45713 The backup file has the file extension
45714 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45722 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45728 \begin_layout Standard
45731 Backup documents, every
45733 , you can specify the time between backup saves.
45736 \begin_layout Standard
45739 Save documents compressed by default
45741 always saves files in a compressed format (see also section
45742 \begin_inset space ~
45746 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45748 reference "subsec:Compressed"
45753 This applies to newly created documents only.
45754 The compression status of existing documents is not changed when saving.
45757 \begin_layout Subsubsection
45758 Windows & work area
45761 \begin_layout Standard
45764 Open documents in tabs
45766 is not checked, every file will be opened in its own new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
45770 \begin_layout Standard
45775 is only active if a \SpecialChar LyX
45780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45782 \begin_inset space ~
45786 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45788 reference "sec:Paths"
45792 for information about \SpecialChar LyX
45799 If it is checked, \SpecialChar LyX
45800 documents will be opened in the same running instance
45801 of \SpecialChar LyX
45803 Otherwise a new \SpecialChar LyX
45804 instance is created for each file.
45807 \begin_layout Standard
45810 Single close-tab button
45812 is checked, there will only be one close button (
45822 ) at the right side of the tab bar to close tabs.
45823 Otherwise every document tab has its own close button.
45824 Regardless of this option, one can always close a tab by middle-clicking
45828 \begin_layout Standard
45829 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
45832 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45837 For this option you have to restart \SpecialChar LyX
45838 before the change takes effect.
45846 \begin_layout Standard
45851 you one can decide if a document is closed or hidden when its tab or view
45853 Hidden documents are accessible via the menu
45855 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
45859 Not to close documents can be useful if you open files parallel in several
45860 instances of \SpecialChar LyX
45861 and only want to close the view in once instance.
45864 \begin_layout Subsection
45866 \begin_inset Index idx
45869 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45876 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45878 name "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
45885 \begin_layout Standard
45886 These fonts are used to display your documents within \SpecialChar LyX
45890 \begin_layout Standard
45891 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
45894 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45899 This section only deals with the fonts
45903 the \SpecialChar LyX
45905 The fonts that appear in the output are independent of these fonts, and
45908 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45909 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
45920 \begin_layout Standard
45921 By default, \SpecialChar LyX
45938 (depends on the system) as its
45941 \begin_inset space ~
45957 \begin_layout Standard
45958 You can change the font size with the
45965 \begin_layout Standard
45970 are calculated as letter height in units of points.
45972 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45975 points have the size of 1
45976 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45980 \begin_inset space ~
45984 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45986 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
45991 The default font sizes are the same as if a document font size of 10
45992 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45996 The sizes are explained in detail in section
45997 \begin_inset space ~
46001 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46003 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
46010 \begin_layout Standard
46013 Use pixmap cache to speed up font rendering
46015 enabled, \SpecialChar LyX
46016 needs to redraw the screen less often.
46017 This results in better performance, especially on slow systems.
46018 On the other hand, the characters might look more fuzzy on screen.
46019 So whether you enable this or not depends on whether you prefer speed over
46021 Note that the Pixmap Cache is only available and useful under Mac
46022 \begin_inset space ~
46028 \begin_layout Subsection
46030 \begin_inset Index idx
46033 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46034 Color ! \SpecialChar LyX
46041 \begin_inset Index idx
46044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46053 \begin_layout Standard
46054 Here you can change the screen colors used by \SpecialChar LyX
46055 by choosing an item in the
46056 list and selecting the
46063 \begin_layout Standard
46064 By checking the option
46068 the color scheme of your OS or window manager is used.
46071 cursor, selection, table line, text, URL
46072 \begin_inset space ~
46076 \begin_inset space ~
46081 are then not customizable and thus not listed.
46084 \begin_layout Subsection
46086 \begin_inset Index idx
46089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46098 \begin_layout Standard
46099 Here you can specify if graphics are displayed inside \SpecialChar LyX
46103 \begin_layout Standard
46108 enables previewing snippets of your document.
46109 This feature is described in section
46110 \begin_inset space ~
46114 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46116 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
46123 \begin_layout Standard
46124 Checking the option
46127 \begin_inset space ~
46131 \begin_inset space ~
46135 \begin_inset space ~
46140 displays a pilcrow (¶) at the end of every paragraph.
46143 \begin_layout Section
46145 \begin_inset Index idx
46148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46157 \begin_layout Subsection
46161 \begin_layout Subsubsection
46165 \begin_layout Standard
46168 Cursor follows scrollbar
46170 sets the cursor to the top of the currently displayed document part when
46174 \begin_layout Standard
46175 You can adjust the width of the cursor.
46176 If you set the value to zero, the thickness of the cursor scales relative
46177 to the zoom value you choose for the screen fonts.
46180 \begin_layout Standard
46183 Scroll below end of document
46185 is self-explanatory.
46188 \begin_layout Standard
46189 In \SpecialChar LyX
46190 one can jump from word to word by pressing
46197 Use Mac-style for cursor moving between words
46199 the cursor jumps from the end of a word to the end of the next word.
46200 Normally it jumps from the beginning to the beginning.
46203 \begin_layout Standard
46206 Sort environments alphabetically
46208 sorts the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
46211 \begin_layout Standard
46214 Group environments by their category
46216 groups the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
46219 \begin_layout Standard
46224 options determine the editing style for math macros, see the section
46235 \begin_layout Subsubsection
46239 \begin_layout Standard
46240 Here you can specify what is hidden in the fullscreen mode.
46245 you can specify the width of the text in fullscreen mode.
46246 This way you can display the text smaller than the screen; the text then
46250 \begin_layout Subsection
46252 \begin_inset Index idx
46255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46262 \begin_inset Index idx
46265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46266 Settings ! Shortcuts
46274 \begin_layout Standard
46279 specifies the file to be used to bind a \SpecialChar LyX
46281 Several binding files are available, among them:
46284 \begin_layout Description
46285 cua.bind a typical set of PC keyboard shortcuts
46288 \begin_layout Description
46289 (x)emacs.bind a set of bindings similar to those used in the editor programs
46301 \begin_layout Description
46302 mac.bind a set of bindings for
46305 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46313 \begin_layout Standard
46314 There are also binding files designed for special document classes, like
46319 , and binding files for special languages.
46320 The names of language binding files begin with a language code, e.
46321 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46325 \begin_inset space \space{}
46329 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46333 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46337 If you use \SpecialChar LyX
46338 in a certain language, \SpecialChar LyX
46339 will try to use the appropriate binding
46343 \begin_layout Standard
46344 Some binding files, like
46348 , only have a limited scope.
46349 When looking at the end of the file
46353 , you can see that they are included to keep the overview in the bind-file.
46356 \begin_layout Standard
46360 \begin_inset space ~
46364 \begin_inset space ~
46369 allows you to search for the shortcut provided for a particular function
46370 in the selected key binding file.
46373 \begin_layout Subsubsection
46375 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46377 name "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
46382 \begin_inset Index idx
46385 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46386 Key Bindings ! Editing
46394 \begin_layout Standard
46395 To add new or modify existing key bindings to your own taste you can use
46396 the table in the dialog that lists all \SpecialChar LyX
46397 functions and the bound shortcuts.
46398 To find functions easily, they are grouped by categories and the dialog
46401 Show key-bindings containing
46404 In this field you can insert a keyword for a function you want to edit.
46405 Insert there for example as keyword
46406 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46410 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46413 and you get the four different existing shortcuts for the three different
46414 functions that contain
46415 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46419 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46423 As you can see, one function can have more than one shortcut.
46424 All \SpecialChar LyX
46425 functions are also listed in the file
46430 that you will find in the
46437 \begin_layout Standard
46438 For example, to add the shortcut
46446 , select the function and press the
46451 A dialog pops up where you can add the shortcut by using it.
46452 So press Alt+Q to define the shortcut.
46455 \begin_layout Standard
46456 Modifying an existing shortcut is done the same way.
46457 You can also bind multiple functions to one shortcut by starting the \SpecialChar LyX
46459 definition with “command alternatives” and following it with the different
46460 function names as a semicolon separated list.
46462 will then use the first function that is enabled in the current document
46467 \begin_layout Standard
46468 If you don't like a particular shortcut, you can remove it.
46471 \begin_layout Standard
46472 Alternatively you can also edit shortcuts by modifying binding files with
46474 The syntax of the entries is:
46477 \begin_layout Standard
46483 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46487 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46491 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46496 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46502 \begin_layout Standard
46503 Note, though, that the key combination definition uses a specific syntax.
46504 This applies to the designators of specific modifier keys (e.
46505 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46532 , respectively) as well as to the other keys.
46533 Note particularly that you cannot use non-alphanumeric characters directly
46534 in the definition of the key combination, but must use commands following
46535 the Xlib standard instead (please refer to the existing bind files for
46537 So if you wanted to bind a command to the key combination
46541 , you needed to specify it as
46546 If you use the dialog to edit key bindings, you don't have to care for
46549 transforms your input to the correct syntax.
46552 \begin_layout Subsection
46554 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46556 name "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
46561 \begin_inset Index idx
46564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46571 \begin_inset Index idx
46574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46575 Settings ! Keyboard Map
46583 \begin_layout Standard
46584 Normally keyboard settings are made in a menu of your operating system.
46585 For the case thatWhere this is not possible, \SpecialChar LyX
46586 provides keyboard maps.
46587 If, for example, you have a Czech keyboard but want to use it as if it
46588 is a Romanian one, you can enable
46591 \begin_inset space ~
46595 \begin_inset space ~
46600 and select the keyboard map file named
46607 \begin_layout Standard
46616 keyboard map and, if you use the
46620 bindings, you can select the first and second with
46623 arg "keymap-primary"
46629 arg "keymap-secondary"
46632 respectively or toggle between them with
46635 arg "keymap-toggle"
46641 \begin_layout Standard
46642 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
46645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46650 Keyboard maps can only provide a makeshift solution and don't work on all
46659 \begin_layout Standard
46660 You can also specify the mouse
46662 Wheel scrolling speed
46665 The standard value is 1.0; higher values speed up the scrolling, lower ones
46669 Middle mouse button pasting
46671 you can determine if pressing the middle mouse button (or the mouse wheel)
46672 inserts the content of the clipboard.
46675 \begin_layout Standard
46683 \begin_inset space ~
46687 \begin_inset space ~
46692 you can select a key for zooming.
46693 When this key is pressed and the mouse wheel is rotated, the text is zoomed.
46696 \begin_layout Subsection
46700 \begin_layout Standard
46701 Input completion is described in section
46702 \begin_inset space ~
46706 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46708 reference "sec:Input-Completion"
46715 \begin_layout Section
46717 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46724 \begin_inset Index idx
46727 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46734 \begin_inset Index idx
46737 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46746 \begin_layout Standard
46747 The paths to the various resources used by \SpecialChar LyX
46748 are normally determined during
46750 But there may be reasons why you might want to modify them.
46753 \begin_layout Description
46755 \begin_inset space ~
46758 directory This is \SpecialChar LyX
46759 's working directory.
46760 It is the default when you
46771 \begin_inset space ~
46779 \begin_layout Description
46781 \begin_inset space ~
46784 templates This directory will be opened when you use the menu
46786 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
46788 \begin_inset space ~
46792 \begin_inset space ~
46800 \begin_layout Description
46802 \begin_inset space ~
46805 files This directory will be opened when you use the button
46811 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
46815 \begin_inset Newline newline
46819 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
46822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46831 button does not exist when using \SpecialChar LyX
46832 on Mac OS and Windows systems.
46840 \begin_layout Description
46842 \begin_inset space ~
46846 \begin_inset Index idx
46849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46855 Backup copies will be saved to this directory.
46856 If no directory is given but backups are enabled as described in section
46857 \begin_inset space ~
46861 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46863 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
46871 will be used to save the backups.
46872 \begin_inset Newline newline
46875 Backup files have the ending
46876 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46880 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46886 \begin_layout Description
46888 \begin_inset space ~
46891 pipe Here you can enter the name of a so-called UNIX-pipe.
46892 This pipe is used to send data from external programs to \SpecialChar LyX
46894 \begin_inset Newline newline
46901 You add a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
46907 You can edit this file with the program
46916 you have to use the same Unix-Pipe for \SpecialChar LyX
46917 in its preferences under
46920 \begin_inset space ~
46926 If you want to get one entry of the database as citation, select it in
46931 and click on the \SpecialChar LyX
46933 The entry will now be inserted as a citation at the current cursor position
46934 in your \SpecialChar LyX
46940 and \SpecialChar LyX
46941 need to be running the same time.
46942 \begin_inset Newline newline
46945 The pipe is also used for the
46949 feature, see section
46950 \begin_inset space ~
46954 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46956 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
46961 \begin_inset Newline newline
46964 To use the \SpecialChar LyX
46965 Server-Pipe on Windows, you must use this pipe name:
46966 \begin_inset Newline newline
46982 \begin_layout Description
46984 \begin_inset space ~
46987 directory Temporary files will be saved in this directory.
46990 \begin_layout Description
46992 \begin_inset space ~
46995 dictionary Directory where the thesaurus dictionaries are located.
46996 You only need to specify it if the thesaurus does not work or if you want
46997 to use custom/alternative dictionaries.
47000 \begin_layout Description
47002 \begin_inset space ~
47005 dictionary Directory where the dictionaries of the spell checker program
47011 You only need to specify it if you are using
47015 and spell checking does not work or if you want to use custom/alternative
47017 For \SpecialChar LyX
47022 is the only available spell checker and should work without specifying
47026 \begin_layout Description
47028 \begin_inset space ~
47031 prefix This field contains a list of paths to external programs.
47032 When \SpecialChar LyX
47033 needs to use an external program, it looks in this list to see where
47034 to find it on the system.
47035 The path list is automatically set up on Windows and Mac systems when \SpecialChar LyX
47037 is configured; so you normally don't have to modify it.
47039 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47043 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47046 Linux systems, the path list will need to be set only if there are external
47047 programs you wish to use that are not in your normal system path ($PATH).
47050 \begin_layout Description
47052 \begin_inset space ~
47055 prefix The TEXINPUTS environment variable allows you to use external files
47056 which are included in a \SpecialChar LyX
47057 document via commands in \SpecialChar TeX
47058 code or in the document
47060 This prefix includes by default the document directory (represented by
47062 The prefix can contain any list of paths separated by the default separator
47063 of the OS (':' on UNIX like systems and ';' on Windows).
47064 If files are included, the paths listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix will be
47065 scanned for the input files.
47066 Note that any non-absolute path listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix is considered
47067 to be relative to the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
47069 It is recommended that you always include '.' as one of the paths; otherwise
47070 compilation may fail for some documents.
47073 \begin_layout Section
47077 \begin_layout Standard
47078 Here you can insert your
47087 These will be used when you have enabled change tracking, as described
47089 \begin_inset space ~
47093 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47095 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
47099 , to mark changes you make as yours.
47102 \begin_layout Section
47104 \begin_inset Index idx
47107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47108 Language ! Settings
47114 \begin_inset Index idx
47117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47118 Settings ! Language
47126 \begin_layout Subsection
47128 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47130 name "subsec:Prefs-Language"
47137 \begin_layout Description
47139 \begin_inset space ~
47143 \begin_inset space ~
47146 language Here you can select the language for \SpecialChar LyX
47148 You can find its actual translation status here:
47149 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47151 target "http://www.lyx.org/I18n"
47159 \begin_layout Description
47161 \begin_inset space ~
47164 package determines which \SpecialChar LaTeX
47165 package should be loaded to handle language issues.
47166 Language issues that are handled by this package include proper hyphenation
47167 as well as localization of dates and text strings such as
47168 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47172 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47176 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47180 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47184 The most widespread language package is
47189 \begin_inset Index idx
47192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47199 ; it is the default language package in classic \SpecialChar LaTeX
47201 More recent typesetting engines such as Xe\SpecialChar TeX
47202 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
47203 come with the alternative
47209 \begin_inset Index idx
47212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47214 packages ! polyglossia
47219 that is more suited to the multi-script support of these engines.
47220 Furthermore, there are also specific language packages for languages not
47226 The available selections are described in section
47227 \begin_inset space ~
47231 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47233 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
47240 \begin_layout Description
47242 \begin_inset space ~
47245 start If a special \SpecialChar LaTeX
47246 -package is needed to write in a certain document language,
47247 you can here specify the command to start the package.
47248 An example is the start command
47254 that is needed to write Arabic using the package
47256 Arab\SpecialChar TeX
47260 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
47276 selectlanguage{$$lang}
47281 \begin_layout Description
47283 \begin_inset space ~
47291 Some packages, like the default, don't have an end command since the start
47292 command toggles the package on and off.
47295 \begin_layout Description
47297 \begin_inset space ~
47301 \begin_inset space ~
47304 separator Defines the default decimal point for use in tables (decimal point
47308 \begin_layout Description
47310 \begin_inset space ~
47314 \begin_inset space ~
47317 unit Defines the unit that is used as default for lengths in \SpecialChar LyX
47321 \begin_layout Description
47323 \begin_inset space ~
47327 \begin_inset space ~
47330 globally When this option is set, the languages used in the document will
47331 be added as options to the document class options, so that they can be
47332 used by all \SpecialChar LaTeX
47334 Otherwise they will only be used as options for the
47341 \begin_layout Description
47343 \begin_inset space ~
47346 begin When this option is set, documents start with the chosen document
47348 When this option is not set, the
47351 \begin_inset space ~
47356 is explicitly set to the beginning of the document in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47358 This assures that the correct language is used when you use another
47361 \begin_inset space ~
47369 \begin_layout Description
47371 \begin_inset space ~
47377 \begin_inset space ~
47383 When it is not set, the
47386 \begin_inset space ~
47391 is set to the end of the document.
47394 \begin_layout Description
47396 \begin_inset space ~
47400 \begin_inset space ~
47403 languages Text marked formatted in a language different from the document
47404 language will be underlined in blue.
47407 \begin_layout Description
47409 \begin_inset space ~
47413 \begin_inset space ~
47416 support Enables the use of languages, written from right to left (RTL),
47417 like Arabic, Hebrew or Farsi.
47420 \begin_layout Description
47422 \begin_inset space ~
47425 movement When writing RTL, you can define if the left and right arrow keys
47426 move the cursor visually to the left or right, respectively, or logically.
47427 Logical means that the cursor is moved to the left when pressing the right
47428 arrow key and the cursor is inside text in an RTL language.
47431 \begin_layout Subsection
47435 \begin_layout Standard
47436 The spellchecker settings are explained in section
47437 \begin_inset space ~
47441 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47443 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
47450 \begin_layout Section
47454 \begin_layout Subsection
47456 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47458 name "subsec:General-output"
47465 \begin_layout Description
47467 \begin_inset space ~
47470 search Commands that will be used for the menu
47472 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
47474 \begin_inset space ~
47480 For a detailed description see section
47482 Reverse DVI/PDF search
47487 \begin_inset space ~
47495 \begin_layout Description
47497 \begin_inset space ~
47500 Options Options for the program
47504 that is used for the export format
47509 \begin_inset space ~
47513 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47515 reference "subsec:Export"
47520 Possible options are listed in the
47525 \begin_inset Newline newline
47529 \begin_inset Flex URL
47532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47534 https://www.tug.org/texinfohtml/dvips.html
47544 \begin_layout Description
47546 \begin_inset space ~
47550 \begin_inset space ~
47553 length sets the maximum number of characters printed in one line when using
47556 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
47557 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
47559 \begin_inset space ~
47565 Setting the line length to 0 means all text is printed in one endless line.
47568 \begin_layout Description
47570 \begin_inset space ~
47574 \begin_inset Index idx
47577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47584 \begin_inset Index idx
47587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47588 Settings ! Date format
47593 The date format can be one or a mixture of the formats listed here:
47594 \begin_inset Newline newline
47598 \begin_inset Flex URL
47601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47603 http://man7.org/linux/man-pages/man1/date.1.html
47609 \begin_inset Newline newline
47612 For example the format
47613 \begin_inset Newline newline
47617 \begin_inset Newline newline
47620 prints the date as day/month/year.
47623 \begin_layout Description
47625 \begin_inset space ~
47629 \begin_inset space ~
47632 export Setting what \SpecialChar LyX
47633 is allowed to overwrite on export.
47636 \begin_layout Subsection
47642 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47644 name "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
47649 \begin_inset Index idx
47652 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47653 Settings ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
47662 \begin_layout Description
47664 \begin_inset space ~
47672 \begin_inset space ~
47676 \begin_inset space ~
47679 encoding This is the default encoding of the document font.
47684 is the default and covers western languages and symbols.
47705 are used for Cyrillic.
47706 Combinations of the encodings are possible, like
47707 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47715 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47719 The font encoding is normally automatically loaded by the language packages
47721 sets up in the background.
47722 So there is no need to change the default encoding.
47725 \begin_layout Description
47727 \begin_inset space ~
47731 \begin_inset space ~
47735 \begin_inset space ~
47739 \begin_inset space ~
47742 options They only have an effect when the program
47746 is used as DVI-viewer, read its manual to find out more.
47749 \begin_layout Standard
47750 Here you can also specify options and commands with parameters for processors.
47751 But before you change something, it is strongly recommended to read the
47752 manuals of the applications.
47755 \begin_layout Description
47757 \begin_inset space ~
47760 generation Settings for the generation of the bibliography, see section
47761 \begin_inset space ~
47765 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47767 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
47774 \begin_layout Description
47776 \begin_inset space ~
47779 generation Settings for the generation of the index, see section
47780 \begin_inset space ~
47784 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47786 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
47793 \begin_layout Description
47795 \begin_inset space ~
47798 command Command for the program that generates the nomenclature, see section
47799 \begin_inset space ~
47803 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47805 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
47812 \begin_layout Description
47818 \begin_inset space ~
47821 command Command for the program
47823 Check\SpecialChar TeX
47826 that is described in the section
47828 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
47833 Additional Features
47838 \begin_layout Standard
47839 There are additionally the following options:
47842 \begin_layout Description
47844 \begin_inset space ~
47848 \begin_inset space ~
47852 \begin_inset space ~
47856 \begin_inset space ~
47861 \begin_inset space ~
47864 files Uses paths in the notation of Windows, that means that
47865 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47871 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47875 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47879 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47882 to separate folders.
47883 This option is enabled by default when you use \SpecialChar LyX
47885 \begin_inset Index idx
47888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47895 \begin_inset Index idx
47898 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47907 \begin_layout Description
47909 \begin_inset space ~
47913 \begin_inset space ~
47917 \begin_inset space ~
47921 \begin_inset space ~
47925 \begin_inset space ~
47929 \begin_inset space ~
47932 changes Removes all manually set
47938 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
47939 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
47941 \begin_inset space ~
47946 dialog when changing the document class.
47949 \begin_layout Section
47951 \begin_inset space ~
47955 \begin_inset Index idx
47958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47967 \begin_layout Subsection
47969 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47971 name "subsec:Converters"
47976 \begin_inset Index idx
47979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47988 \begin_layout Standard
47989 Here you find the list of defined converter commands to convert material
47990 from one format to another.
47991 You can modify converters or create new ones.
47992 To modify a converter, select it, change the entry of the
47999 \begin_inset space ~
48004 field and press the
48009 To create a new converter, select an existing one, select a different format
48013 \begin_inset space ~
48018 drop-down list, modify the
48022 field and press the
48029 \begin_layout Standard
48032 Converter File Cache
48038 , conversions will be cached as long as specified in the field
48040 Maximum Age (in days
48043 This means that images don't need to be converted again when you reopen
48044 a document; the converted images from the cache will be used instead.
48047 \begin_layout Standard
48048 More about converters, like the flags that can be used in the converter
48049 definition, is described in the section
48060 \begin_layout Subsection
48062 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48064 name "sec:File-Formats"
48069 \begin_inset Index idx
48072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48079 \begin_inset Index idx
48082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48091 \begin_layout Standard
48092 Here you find the list of defined file formats that \SpecialChar LyX
48102 programs that should be used for certain formats.
48105 \begin_layout Standard
48106 You can also define the
48108 Default output format
48110 that is used when you use
48112 View, Update, View Master Document
48116 Update Master Document
48122 menu or the toolbar.
48125 \begin_layout Standard
48126 More about formats and their options is described in the section
48137 \begin_layout Standard
48138 Since all conversions from one format to another take place in \SpecialChar LyX
48140 directory, it is sometimes necessary to modify a file before copying it
48141 to the temporary directory so that the conversion may be performed.
48142 This is done by specifying a
48147 More about this is described in the section
48158 \begin_layout Chapter
48159 Units available in \SpecialChar LyX
48161 \begin_inset Index idx
48164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48171 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48173 name "chap:Units-available-in"
48180 \begin_layout Standard
48182 \begin_inset space ~
48186 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48188 reference "tab:Units"
48192 explains all the units available in \SpecialChar LyX
48193 and used in this documentation.
48196 \begin_layout Standard
48197 \begin_inset Float table
48203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48204 \begin_inset Caption Standard
48206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48207 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48222 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
48228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48230 \begin_inset Tabular
48231 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="20" columns="3">
48232 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
48233 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
48234 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
48235 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
48237 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48246 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48255 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48267 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48276 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48285 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48296 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48305 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48314 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48325 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48334 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48343 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48354 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48363 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48368 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48372 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48380 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48391 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48400 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48405 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48409 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48417 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48428 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48437 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48441 scaled point (65536
48442 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48446 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48454 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48465 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48474 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48479 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48483 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48491 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48494 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48502 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48505 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48511 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48516 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48520 \begin_inset Formula $\approx$
48524 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48532 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48543 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48552 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48557 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48561 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48569 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48580 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48589 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48593 % of original image width
48598 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48609 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48618 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48627 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48640 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48649 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48652 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48658 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48671 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48674 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48680 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48683 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48689 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48702 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48705 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48711 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48714 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48720 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48723 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48733 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48742 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48751 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48764 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48767 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48773 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48776 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48782 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48785 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48795 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48798 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48804 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48817 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48820 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48828 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48837 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48850 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48861 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48870 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48875 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48879 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48887 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48909 \begin_layout Chapter
48911 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48913 name "chap:Credits"
48920 \begin_layout Standard
48921 The documentation is a collaborative effort between many different people
48922 (and we would encourage people to contribute!).
48925 \begin_layout Itemize
48928 Alejandro Aguilar Sierra
48931 \begin_layout Itemize
48937 \begin_layout Itemize
48943 \begin_layout Itemize
48949 \begin_layout Itemize
48955 \begin_layout Itemize
48961 \begin_layout Itemize
48967 \begin_layout Itemize
48973 \begin_layout Itemize
48976 Lars Gullik Bjønnes
48979 \begin_layout Itemize
48985 \begin_layout Itemize
48991 \begin_layout Itemize
48997 \begin_layout Itemize
49003 \begin_layout Itemize
49009 \begin_layout Itemize
49015 \begin_layout Itemize
49021 \begin_layout Itemize
49027 \begin_layout Itemize
49028 The \SpecialChar LyX
49030 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
49040 \begin_layout Standard
49041 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
49044 The bibliography on the following page was created with the
49051 \begin_layout Bibliography
49052 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49053 LatexCommand bibitem
49060 The \SpecialChar LyX
49062 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49065 target "http://www.lyx.org/Credits"
49071 \begin_inset Newline newline
49075 \begin_inset Flex URL
49078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49080 http://www.lyx.org/Credits
49088 \begin_layout Bibliography
49089 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49090 LatexCommand bibitem
49091 key "latexcompanion"
49096 Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens:
49098 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
49099 Companion Second Edition.
49102 Addison-Wesley, 2004
49105 \begin_layout Bibliography
49106 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49107 LatexCommand bibitem
49113 Helmut Kopka and Patrick W.
49116 A Guide to \SpecialChar LaTeX
49120 Addison-Wesley, 2003
49123 \begin_layout Bibliography
49124 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49125 LatexCommand bibitem
49134 : A Document Preparation System.
49137 Addison-Wesley, second edition, 1994
49140 \begin_layout Bibliography
49141 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49142 LatexCommand bibitem
49152 The \SpecialChar TeX
49156 Addison-Wesley, 1984
49159 \begin_layout Bibliography
49160 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49161 LatexCommand bibitem
49167 The \SpecialChar TeX
49169 \begin_inset Newline newline
49173 \begin_inset Flex URL
49176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49178 http://mirrors.ctan.org/help/Catalogue/bytopic.html
49186 \begin_layout Bibliography
49187 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49188 LatexCommand bibitem
49194 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
49196 \begin_inset Newline newline
49200 \begin_inset Flex URL
49203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49205 http://www.tex.ac.uk/faq/
49213 \begin_layout Bibliography
49214 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49215 LatexCommand bibitem
49222 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49224 name "Documentation"
49225 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf"
49232 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
49236 \begin_inset Newline newline
49240 \begin_inset Flex URL
49243 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49245 http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf
49253 \begin_layout Bibliography
49254 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49255 LatexCommand bibitem
49262 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49264 name "Documentation"
49265 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf"
49270 how to use the program
49272 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
49276 \begin_inset Newline newline
49280 \begin_inset Flex URL
49283 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49285 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf
49293 \begin_layout Bibliography
49294 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49295 LatexCommand bibitem
49302 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49304 name "Documentation"
49305 target "http://www.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/biblatex.pdf"
49310 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49316 \begin_inset Index idx
49319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49321 packages ! biblatex
49327 \begin_inset Newline newline
49331 \begin_inset Flex URL
49334 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49336 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/biblatex.pdf
49344 \begin_layout Bibliography
49345 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49346 LatexCommand bibitem
49353 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49355 name "Documentation"
49356 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/biber/documentation/biber.pdf"
49361 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49367 \begin_inset Index idx
49370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49378 \begin_inset Newline newline
49382 \begin_inset Flex URL
49385 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49387 http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/biber/documentation/biber.pdf
49395 \begin_layout Bibliography
49396 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49397 LatexCommand bibitem
49404 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49406 name "Documentation"
49407 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf"
49417 \begin_inset Newline newline
49421 \begin_inset Flex URL
49424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49426 http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf
49434 \begin_layout Bibliography
49435 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49436 LatexCommand bibitem
49437 key "makeindex-man"
49443 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49446 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi"
49456 \begin_inset Newline newline
49460 \begin_inset Flex URL
49463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49465 http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi
49473 \begin_layout Bibliography
49474 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49475 LatexCommand bibitem
49482 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49484 name "Documentation"
49485 target "http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html"
49495 \begin_inset Newline newline
49499 \begin_inset Flex URL
49502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49504 http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html
49512 \begin_layout Bibliography
49513 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49514 LatexCommand bibitem
49521 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49523 name "Documentation"
49524 target "http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex"
49529 of the AMS \SpecialChar LaTeX
49531 \begin_inset Newline newline
49535 \begin_inset Flex URL
49538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49540 http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex
49548 \begin_layout Bibliography
49549 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49550 LatexCommand bibitem
49557 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49559 name "Documentation"
49560 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf"
49565 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49571 \begin_inset Index idx
49574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49582 \begin_inset Newline newline
49586 \begin_inset Flex URL
49589 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49591 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf
49599 \begin_layout Bibliography
49600 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49601 LatexCommand bibitem
49608 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49610 name "Documentation"
49611 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf"
49616 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49622 \begin_inset Index idx
49625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49627 packages ! enumitem
49633 \begin_inset Newline newline
49637 \begin_inset Flex URL
49640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49642 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf
49650 \begin_layout Bibliography
49651 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49652 LatexCommand bibitem
49659 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49661 name "Documentation"
49662 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf"
49667 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49673 \begin_inset Index idx
49676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49678 packages ! fancyhdr
49684 \begin_inset Newline newline
49688 \begin_inset Flex URL
49691 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49693 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf
49701 \begin_layout Bibliography
49702 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49703 LatexCommand bibitem
49710 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49712 name "Documentation"
49713 target "http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref"
49718 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49724 \begin_inset Index idx
49727 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49729 packages ! hyperref
49735 \begin_inset Newline newline
49739 \begin_inset Flex URL
49742 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49744 http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref
49752 \begin_layout Bibliography
49753 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49754 LatexCommand bibitem
49761 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49763 name "Documentation"
49764 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf"
49769 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49775 \begin_inset Index idx
49778 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49786 \begin_inset Newline newline
49790 \begin_inset Flex URL
49793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49795 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf
49803 \begin_layout Bibliography
49804 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49805 LatexCommand bibitem
49812 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49814 name "Documentation"
49815 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf"
49820 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49826 \begin_inset Index idx
49829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49831 packages ! prettyref
49837 \begin_inset Newline newline
49841 \begin_inset Flex URL
49844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49846 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf
49854 \begin_layout Bibliography
49855 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49856 LatexCommand bibitem
49863 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49865 name "Documentation"
49866 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf"
49871 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49877 \begin_inset Index idx
49880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49882 packages ! refstyle
49888 \begin_inset Newline newline
49892 \begin_inset Flex URL
49895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49897 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf
49905 \begin_layout Bibliography
49906 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49907 LatexCommand bibitem
49914 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49917 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic"
49922 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
49924 \begin_inset Newline newline
49928 \begin_inset Flex URL
49931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49933 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic
49941 \begin_layout Bibliography
49942 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49943 LatexCommand bibitem
49950 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49953 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian"
49958 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
49960 \begin_inset Newline newline
49964 \begin_inset Flex URL
49967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49969 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian
49977 \begin_layout Bibliography
49978 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49979 LatexCommand bibitem
49986 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49989 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic"
49994 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
49995 for Cyrillic languages:
49996 \begin_inset Newline newline
50000 \begin_inset Flex URL
50003 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50005 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic
50013 \begin_layout Bibliography
50014 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50015 LatexCommand bibitem
50022 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50025 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi"
50030 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50032 \begin_inset Newline newline
50036 \begin_inset Flex URL
50039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50041 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi
50049 \begin_layout Bibliography
50050 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50051 LatexCommand bibitem
50058 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50061 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew"
50066 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50068 \begin_inset Newline newline
50072 \begin_inset Flex URL
50075 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50077 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew
50085 \begin_layout Bibliography
50086 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50087 LatexCommand bibitem
50094 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50097 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese"
50102 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50104 \begin_inset Newline newline
50108 \begin_inset Flex URL
50111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50113 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese
50121 \begin_layout Bibliography
50122 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50123 LatexCommand bibitem
50130 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50133 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian"
50138 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50140 \begin_inset Newline newline
50144 \begin_inset Flex URL
50147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50149 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian
50157 \begin_layout Bibliography
50158 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50159 LatexCommand bibitem
50166 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50169 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian"
50174 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50176 \begin_inset Newline newline
50180 \begin_inset Flex URL
50183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50185 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian
50193 \begin_layout Bibliography
50194 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50195 LatexCommand bibitem
50202 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50205 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian"
50210 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50212 \begin_inset Newline newline
50216 \begin_inset Flex URL
50219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50221 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian
50229 \begin_layout Bibliography
50230 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50231 LatexCommand bibitem
50238 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50241 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese"
50246 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50248 \begin_inset Newline newline
50252 \begin_inset Flex URL
50255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50257 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese
50265 \begin_layout Bibliography
50266 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50267 LatexCommand bibitem
50274 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50277 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20"
50282 about new features in
50288 \begin_inset Newline newline
50292 \begin_inset Flex URL
50295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50297 http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20
50305 \begin_layout Standard
50306 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
50313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50340 \begin_inset Note Note
50343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50350 is the name of the bibliography in the current document language.
50351 It is redefined here with the number 2 at the end to state that the following
50352 bibliography is the second one:
50360 \begin_layout Standard
50361 \begin_inset CommandInset bibtex
50362 LatexCommand bibtex
50363 bibfiles "biblio/LyXDocs"
50364 options "biblio/alphadin"
50371 \begin_layout Standard
50372 The above bibliography is created from a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
50376 \begin_layout Standard
50377 \begin_inset CommandInset nomencl_print
50378 LatexCommand printnomenclature
50384 \begin_inset CommandInset index_print
50385 LatexCommand printindex